FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C Non-Broadcast Transmitter

 

ASTRO 25 INTEGRATED VOICE AND DATA GTR 8000 Base Radio FEBRUARY 2020 MN003286A01-E 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All rights reserved MN003286A01-E Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity Declaration of Conformity Per FCC CFR 47 Part 2 Section 2.1077(a) Address: 1303 East Algonquin Road, Schaumburg, IL 60196-1078, U.S.A. Responsible Party Name: Motorola Solutions, Inc. Phone Number: 1-800-927-2744 Hereby declares that the product:

GTR 8000 conforms to the following regulations:

FCC Part 15, subpart B, section 15.107(a), 15.107(d), and section 15.109(a) Class A Digital Device This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC. Note: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital de-

vice, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communi-

cations. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense. Notice to Users (FCC) This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules per the following conditions:

This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation. Changes or modifications made to this device, not expressly approved by Motorola Solutions, could void the authority of the user to operate this equipment. 2 MN003286A01-E Copyrights Copyrights The Motorola Solutions products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola Solutions certain exclusive rights for copyrighted computer programs. Accordingly, any copyrighted Motorola Solutions computer programs contained in the Motorola Solutions products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola Solutions. 2020 Motorola Solutions, Inc. All Rights Reserved No part of this document may be reproduced, transmitted, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without the prior written permission of Motorola Solutions, Inc. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola Solutions products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola Solutions, except for the normal non-exclusive, royalty-free license to use that arises by operation of law in the sale of a product. Please note that certain features, facilities, and capabilities described in this document may not be applicable to or licensed for use on a particular system, or may be dependent upon the characteristics of a particular mobile subscriber unit or configuration of certain parameters. Please refer to your Motorola Solutions contact for further information. Disclaimer Trademarks MOTOROLA, MOTO, MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS, and the Stylized M Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of Motorola Trademark Holdings, LLC and are used under license. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. European Union (EU) Waste of Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE) directive The European Union's WEEE directive requires that products sold into EU countries must have the crossed out trash bin label on the product (or the package in some cases). As defined by the WEEE directive, this cross-out trash bin label means that customers and end-users in EU countries should not dispose of electronic and electrical equipment or accessories in household waste. Customers or end-users in EU countries should contact their local equipment supplier representative or service centre for information about the waste collection system in their country. 3 MN003286A01-E Contact Us Contact Us The Solutions Support Center (SSC) is the primary contact for technical support included in your organization's service agreement with Motorola Solutions. Service agreement customers should be sure to call the SSC in all situations listed under Customer Responsibilities in their agreement, such as:

Before reloading software To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before taking action Your organization received support phone numbers and other contact information appropriate for your geographic region and service agreement. Use that contact information for the most efficient response. However, if needed, you can also find general support contact information on the Motorola Solutions website, by following these steps:

2 Ensure that your organization's country or region is displayed on the page. Clicking or tapping the 1 Enter motorolasolutions.com in your browser. name of the region provides a way to change it. 3 Select "Support" on the motorolasolutions.com page. Comments Send questions and comments regarding user documentation to documentation@motorolasolutions.com. Provide the following information when reporting a documentation error:

The document title and part number The page number or title of the section with the error A description of the error Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For information, go to https://learning.motorolasolutions.com to view the current course offerings and technology paths. 4 MN003286A01-E Document History Document History Version Description MN003286A01-A Original release of the GTR 8000 Base Radio manual MN003286A01-B Updated the following sections:

November 2016 Date November 2016 MN003286A010-C Updated the following sections:

February 2019 MN003286A010-D Updated the following sections:

May 2019 MN003286A010-E Updated the following sections to include addition-

al FCC and safety information:

February 2020 CSS Initial Device Configuration on page 134 GTR 8000 Base Radio General Troubleshoot-

ing on page 212 Illegal Carrier Determination Feature (Trunked) on page 210 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Parts on page 222 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for In-

tegrated Voice and Data UHF R1 (380435 MHz) on page 48 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Parts on Power Amplifier FRU Number Mappings on page 222 page 230 Declaration of Conformity on page 2 General Safety Precautions on page 83 Updated the following sections to include informa-

tion on the high-power/100W Power Amplifier (PA) in the VHF range and changes in the VHF, UHF R1, and UHF R2 ranges:

GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Inte-

grated Voice and Data VHF (136174 MHz) on page 52 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for In-

tegrated Voice and Data VHF (136174 MHz) on page 56 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Parts on page 222 page 230 Power Amplifier FRU Number Mappings on GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Inte-

grated Voice and Data UHF R1 (380435 5 MN003286A01-E Document History Version Description Date MHz) on page 45 GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz) GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for In-

tegrated Voice and Data UHF R1 (380435 MHz) on page 48 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Inte-

grated Voice and Data UHF R2 (435524 MHz) on page 49 GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz) GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for In-

tegrated Voice and Data UHF R2 (435524 MHz) on page 52 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Inte-

grated Voice and Data VHF (136174 MHz) on page 52 GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identi-

fication for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz) GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for In-

tegrated Voice and Data VHF (136174 MHz) on page 56 6 MN003286A01-E Contents Contents Declaration of Conformity.......................................................................................... 2 Copyrights................................................................................................................... 3 Contact Us................................................................................................................... 4 Document History....................................................................................................... 5 List of Figures............................................................................................................16 List of Tables............................................................................................................. 20 List of Processes...................................................................................................... 23 List of Procedures.....................................................................................................24 About GTR 8000 Base Radio....................................................................................27 What Is Covered In This Manual?............................................................................................... 27 Helpful Background Information.................................................................................................. 27 Related Information..................................................................................................................... 28 Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description....................................................... 29 1.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................ 29 1.2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Components..................................................................................... 30 1.3 Supported System Configurations......................................................................................... 30 1.3.1 Supported Frequencies for Trunked IV and D and Conventional Architectures...... 31 1.3.2 Supported Frequencies for HPD..............................................................................31 1.4 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Trunked IP Simulcast Subsystem.................... 31 1.5 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in an ASTRO 25 Repeater Site............................... 31 1.6 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Trunked Single-Site Repeater Configuration....32 1.6.1 Configuring The Ethernet LAN Switch..................................................................... 34 1.7 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a High Performance Data (HPD) Subsystem...... 34 1.8 Overview for a GTR 8000 Base Radio in Conventional Architectures...................................35 1.8.1 ASTRO 25 Conventional Base Radio...................................................................... 36 1.8.2 Analog Conventional Base Radio............................................................................ 37 1.9 Overview of a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Trunked 3600 System.........................................38 1.10 Power Efficiency Package................................................................................................... 38 1.11 License Auditing.................................................................................................................. 39 1.12 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications................................................................................. 40 1.12.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data (700/800 MHz)............................................................................................................................ 40 1.12.1.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Date (700/800 MHz)..........................................................................................44 1.12.2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R1

(380435 MHz)............................................................................................................ 45 7 MN003286A01-E Contents 1.12.2.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R1 (380435 MHz)...........................................................................48 1.12.3 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R2

(435524 MHz) ........................................................................................................... 49 1.12.3.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R2 (435524 MHz)...........................................................................52 1.12.4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data VHF

(136174 MHz) ........................................................................................................... 52 1.12.4.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Data VHF (136174 MHz).................................................................................56 1.12.5 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for High Performance Data (700/800 MHz)............................................................................................................................ 56 1.12.5.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for High Performance Data

(700/800 MHz).................................................................................................. 59 1.12.6 Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio Cabinet................................................. 59 Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation......................................... 61 2.1 Functions of the GTR 8000 Base Radio Modules................................................................. 61 2.1.1 Function of the Transceiver Module.........................................................................61 2.1.1.1 Transceiver Control Board......................................................................... 62 2.1.1.2 Transceiver RF Board ............................................................................... 62 2.1.1.3 Transceiver External Interfaces................................................................. 63 2.1.2 Function of the Power Amplifier Module.................................................................. 64 2.1.2.1 Power Amplifier Input/Output Connections................................................ 65 2.1.3 Function of the Fan Module..................................................................................... 66 2.1.4 Function of the Power Supply.................................................................................. 67 2.1.4.1 AC/DC Power Distribution Base Radio................................................... 68 2.1.4.2 Power Supply Battery Charger...................................................................68 2.1.4.3 Battery Temperature Sensor Cable........................................................... 69 2.1.4.4 ON/OFF Switch for Power Supply and Battery Charger............................ 69 2.1.4.5 Power Supply Module Backplane Connections......................................... 70 2.2 Backplanes and Card Cages................................................................................................. 70 2.3 RFDS Modules...................................................................................................................... 71 2.3.1 RFDS Preselector (700/800 MHz)........................................................................... 71 2.3.2 RFDS Preselector (UHF)......................................................................................... 71 2.3.3 RFDS Preselector (VHF)......................................................................................... 72 2.3.4 RFDS - Transmit Filter (700/800 MHz).................................................................... 72 2.3.5 RFDS - Duplexer (700/800 MHz).............................................................................73 2.3.6 RFDS - Duplexer (UHF)...........................................................................................73 2.3.7 RFDS - Duplexer (VHF)........................................................................................... 74 2.3.8 RFDS - External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz)................................ 75 2.3.9 RFDS - External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF).............................................. 75 8 MN003286A01-E Contents 2.3.10 RFDS - External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (VHF)............................................ 76 2.3.11 Antenna Relay Module...........................................................................................76 2.3.11.1 Mounting Locations.................................................................................. 77 2.3.11.2 Functional Operation................................................................................79 Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation........................................................ 82 3.1 Pre-Installation Tasks............................................................................................................ 82 3.1.1 Equipment Installation Process Overview................................................................82 3.2 General Safety Precautions...................................................................................................83 3.2.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Supplemental Safety Installation Requirements................. 84 3.2.2 DC Mains Grounding Connections.......................................................................... 85 3.2.2.1 Disconnect Device Permanently Connected..............................................85 3.2.2.2 Multiple Power Sources............................................................................. 85 3.2.2.3 Connection to Primary Power.................................................................... 85 3.2.2.4 Replaceable Batteries................................................................................ 85 3.2.3 Maintenance Requiring Two People........................................................................ 86 3.2.4 Equipment Racks.....................................................................................................86 3.3 General Installation Standards and Guidelines..................................................................... 86 3.3.1 General Site Preparation Overview......................................................................... 86 3.3.2 General Equipment Inspection and Inventory Recommendations...........................87 3.3.3 General Placement and Spacing Recommendations.............................................. 87 3.3.4 General Cabinet Bracing Recommendations...........................................................88 3.3.5 Mounting Cabinets or Racks to a Floor....................................................................88 3.3.6 General Bonding and Grounding Requirements......................................................89 3.3.7 General Cabling Requirements................................................................................89 3.3.8 General Power Guidelines and Requirements.........................................................89 3.3.8.1 General AC Power Guidelines and Requirements.....................................90 3.3.8.2 General Breaker Recommendations..........................................................90 3.3.8.3 General Battery Installation Recommendations.........................................91 3.3.9 General Electrostatic Discharge Recommendations............................................... 91 3.3.10 FCC Requirements................................................................................................ 91 3.3.11 Networking Tools................................................................................................... 92 3.3.12 General Installation/Troubleshooting Tools........................................................... 92 3.3.12.1 General Tools...........................................................................................92 3.3.12.2 Rack Tools............................................................................................... 92 3.3.13 Technical Support for Installation...........................................................................93 3.3.13.1 Site-Specific Information.......................................................................... 93 3.4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Hardware Installation........................................................................94 3.4.1 Placement and Spacing........................................................................................... 94 3.4.2 Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio........................................................ 94 9 MN003286A01-E Contents 3.4.2.1 Floor Mounting the Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio........... 95 3.4.2.2 Physical Dimensions and Clearances of the Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio...................................................................................... 96 3.4.2.3 Cabinet Mounting Rails.............................................................................. 97 3.4.2.4 Vertical Lifting of Cabinets......................................................................... 97 3.4.2.5 Removing/Replacing a Cabinet Door.........................................................98 3.4.3 Rack Mounting The GTR 8000 Base Radio...........................................................100 3.4.3.1 Mounting the GTR 8000 Base Radio....................................................... 100 3.4.4 Connecting Power..................................................................................................101 3.4.4.1 Connecting Power Cables to a GTR 8000 Base Radio........................... 101 3.4.4.2 DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Calculations for Integrated Voice and Data..........................................................................................................101 3.4.4.3 DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Calculations for HPD....................... 102 3.4.4.4 Battery Temperature Sensor Mounting.................................................... 103 3.4.5 GTR 8000 Base Radio Grounding......................................................................... 104 3.4.5.1 Grounding the GTR 8000 Base Radio..................................................... 105 3.4.6 GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (Integrated Voice and Data)................105 3.4.7 GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (HPD).................................................. 108 3.4.8 GTR 8000 Base Radio Front Connections............................................................ 110 3.4.8.1 System Connector Ports (Conventional)..................................................112 3.4.8.2 System Connector Ports (Trunked 3600).................................................115 3.4.8.3 Wireline Port Pin-Outs..............................................................................117 3.4.8.4 Microphone Port Pin-Outs........................................................................118 3.4.8.5 Speaker Port Pin-Outs............................................................................. 118 3.4.8.6 V.24 Port Pin-Outs................................................................................... 119 3.4.8.7 GTR 8000 Base Radio Part 68 Information............................................. 119 3.5 Installation/Troubleshooting Tools....................................................................................... 120 3.5.1 Quick Connect RF Coaxial Adapters for GTR 8000 Base Radio Support............. 121 3.6 Installing Device Software Prerequisites............................................................................. 121 3.7 Software Download Manager.............................................................................................. 123 3.8 Installing Devices in the UNC.............................................................................................. 124 3.8.1 Discovering a Device in the UNC...........................................................................125 3.8.2 Loading Device OS Images to the UNC................................................................ 126 3.8.3 Loading Software to a Device................................................................................ 127 3.8.3.1 Enabling FTP Service.............................................................................. 127 3.8.3.2 Transferring and Installing the OS Image................................................ 127 3.8.3.3 Inspecting Device Properties for Transferred and Installed Software...... 130 3.8.3.4 Disabling FTP Service..............................................................................131 Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration..................................................132 4.1 Configuration Software........................................................................................................ 132 10 MN003286A01-E Contents 4.2 Discovering a Device in the UNC........................................................................................ 132 4.3 Security/Authentication Services......................................................................................... 133 4.4 Device Configuration in CSS............................................................................................... 134 4.4.1 CSS Initial Device Configuration............................................................................134 4.4.2 Connecting Through a Serial Port Link.................................................................. 135 4.4.3 Serial Connection Configurations.......................................................................... 137 4.4.3.1 Setting the Device IP Address and Pairing Number in CSS.................... 137 4.4.3.2 Pairing To a Comparator..........................................................................137 4.4.3.3 Serial Security Services in CSS............................................................... 138 4.4.3.4 Resetting SNMPv3 User Credentials to Factory Defaults in CSS............139 4.4.4 Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link............................................................140 4.4.5 Ethernet Connection Configurations...................................................................... 142 4.4.5.1 Setting the BR/CM Pairing Number in CSS............................................. 142 4.4.5.2 Setting the Date and Time in CSS........................................................... 143 4.4.5.3 Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User Credentials in CSS............. 143 4.4.5.4 Customizing the Login Banner in CSS.....................................................146 4.4.5.5 Setting the SWDL Transfer Mode in CSS................................................ 147 4.4.5.6 Manager IP Address Settings in CSS...................................................... 148 4.4.5.7 NTP Server Settings in CSS.................................................................... 148 4.4.5.8 Setting the Local Password Configuration in CSS................................... 149 4.4.6 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Trunked Simulcast).................................................................................................................. 150 4.4.7 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Trunked Repeater)................................................................................................................... 151 4.4.8 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (HPD)...... 151 4.4.9 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio

(Conventional)............................................................................................................152 4.4.10 Configuring Tx Power Values and Battery Type.................................................. 153 4.4.11 Setting RMC System Gain................................................................................... 154 4.5 Configuring Centralized Authentication on Devices in VoyenceControl.............................. 154 Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization................................................... 156 5.1 Aligning the Internal Frequency Reference Oscillator......................................................... 156 5.1.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Time and Frequency Inputs.............................................. 157 5.2 Battery Equalization.............................................................................................................158 5.3 ASTRO Simulcast Alignment (Trunked Operation)............................................................. 158 5.4 ASTRO/Analog Simulcast Alignment (Conventional Operation)......................................... 158 5.5 Carrier Squelch Alignment...................................................................................................158 5.6 Tx Wireline Alignment .........................................................................................................159 5.7 Rx Wireline Alignment......................................................................................................... 159 5.8 Transmitter Testing..............................................................................................................159 11 MN003286A01-E Contents 5.9 Tuning a Preselector............................................................................................................159 5.9.1 VHF Tuning Procedures........................................................................................ 160 5.9.1.1 Calculating Proper VHF Alignment Frequency........................................ 160 5.9.1.2 Preparing the Equipment for VHF Alignment........................................... 161 5.9.1.3 Tuning The VHF Preselector....................................................................161 5.9.2 UHF Tuning Procedures........................................................................................ 162 5.9.2.1 Calculating Proper UHF Alignment Frequency........................................ 163 5.9.2.2 Preparing the Equipment for UHF Alignment...........................................164 5.9.2.3 Tuning The UHF Preselector................................................................... 164 5.10 Tuning a Duplexer............................................................................................................. 165 5.10.1 Field Tuning Overview......................................................................................... 165 5.10.2 Required Test Equipment.................................................................................... 165 5.10.3 Tuning a 700/800 MHz Duplexer......................................................................... 166 5.10.4 Tuning a VHF Duplexer....................................................................................... 166 5.10.4.1 VHF Duplexer Tuning Setup.................................................................. 166 5.10.4.2 VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up.............................168 5.10.4.3 VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up............................169 5.10.4.4 VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up................. 170 5.10.4.5 VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up.................. 171 5.10.4.6 VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Verification Set Up.................................. 172 5.10.4.7 VHF Duplexer Isolation Verification Set Up........................................... 174 5.10.4.8 Checking VHF Duplexer After Tuning.................................................... 176 5.10.5 Tuning a UHF Duplexer....................................................................................... 176 5.10.5.1 UHF Duplexer Tuning Set Up................................................................ 176 5.10.5.2 UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up............................ 177 5.10.5.3 UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up............................178 5.10.5.4 UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up................. 179 5.10.5.5 UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up.................. 180 5.10.5.6 UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Verification Set Up.................................. 181 5.10.5.7 UHF Duplexer Isolation Verification Set Up........................................... 182 5.10.5.8 Checking UHF Duplexer After Tuning....................................................184 5.11 Testing the GTR 8000 Base Radio Performance with a Service Monitor for Integrated Voice and Data..................................................................................................................... 184 5.11.1 Deviation Standards (Digital Operation).............................................................. 184 5.11.2 Monitoring the Power Supply Module.................................................................. 185 5.11.3 Verifying Receiver Performance for FDMA Operation......................................... 185 5.11.4 Verifying Receiver Performance in TTA Operation..............................................187 5.11.4.1 Effective Receiver Sensitivity................................................................. 190 5.11.5 Verify Receiver Performance for APCO TDMA Operation...................................190 5.11.6 Verifying Receiver Performance (Analog Operation)...........................................190 12 MN003286A01-E Contents 5.11.7 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-Test Method) (IV and D)............................. 192 5.11.8 Monitoring the Transmitter Metering Points......................................................... 193 5.11.9 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Digital Operation)........................................ 193 5.11.10 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Analog Operation).....................................195 5.12 Testing the GTR 8000 Base Radio Performance with a Service Monitor for HPD............ 197 5.12.1 Setting Up the HPD Service Monitor for Testing the Base Radio........................ 198 5.12.2 Performing In-band Power Meter User Calibration.............................................. 199 5.12.3 Measuring HPD Base Radio Tx Power, Frequency Accuracy, and Tx EVM....... 200 5.12.4 Measuring HPD Base Radio Rx Sensitivity and Rx BER.....................................203 5.12.5 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-test Method) (HPD)..................................... 206 Chapter 6: GTR 8000 Base Radio Maintenance................................................... 208 6.1 Fan Grill Cleaning Instructions.............................................................................................208 6.2 Aligning the Internal Frequency Reference Oscillator......................................................... 208 Chapter 7: GTR 8000 Base Radio Operation........................................................ 209 7.1 Base Radio Operational States for Trunked Simulcast....................................................... 209 7.2 Base Radio Operational States for Trunked Repeater and HPD.........................................209 7.3 Base Radio Operational States for Conventional................................................................ 210 7.3.1 Packet Data interactions with Multiple NACs.........................................................210 7.3.2 Supplementary Signaling interactions with Multiple NACs.................................... 210 7.4 Illegal Carrier Determination Feature (Trunked).................................................................. 210 7.5 RF Channel Interference Determination Feature (Conventional)........................................ 211 Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting............................................. 212 8.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio General Troubleshooting................................................................ 212 8.2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Tools.................................................................... 215 8.2.1 Links and Components Monitoring in Unified Event Manager............................... 215 8.2.1.1 Unified Event Manager Active Alarm Window Analyzation...................... 216 8.2.1.2 Diagnostic Options in Unified Event Manager..........................................216 8.2.2 MOSCAD Network Fault Management.................................................................. 216 8.2.3 Device Troubleshooting in Unified Network Configurator...................................... 217 8.2.4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting in Configuration/Service Software..........217 8.2.4.1 Internal Diagnostic Test Alarm Log.......................................................... 218 8.2.4.2 Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting...................218 8.3 Site Controller Failure Impact on GTR 8000 Base Radio for Trunked Operation................219 8.4 Conventional Site Controller Failure - Impact on GTR 8000 Base Radio for Conventional Operation........................................................................................................ 219 8.5 Motorola Solutions Support Center......................................................................................219 8.5.1 Information Necessary to Contact Motorola Solutions Support Center................. 219 8.5.2 Where to Call for Service....................................................................................... 220 8.5.2.1 Motorola Solutions Support Center.......................................................... 220 13 MN003286A01-E Contents 8.5.3 Subcontractors.......................................................................................................221 Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures............................................. 222 9.1 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Parts..........................................................................222 9.2 Transceiver Hardware Generations.....................................................................................226 9.2.1 Transceiver Software and Feature Compatibilities................................................ 226 9.2.2 Identifying Transceiver Hardware Generation....................................................... 227 9.2.3 Transceiver FRU Number Mappings..................................................................... 228 9.3 Power Amplifier Hardware Generations.............................................................................. 229 9.3.1 Power Amplifier Software and Feature Compatibilities..........................................229 9.3.2 Identifying Power Amplifier Hardware Generation................................................. 230 9.3.3 Power Amplifier FRU Number Mappings............................................................... 230 9.4 Replacing a Transceiver Module......................................................................................... 231 9.5 Replacing the Fan Assembly............................................................................................... 237 9.6 Replacing a Power Supply...................................................................................................238 9.7 Replacing a Power Supply Fan........................................................................................... 240 9.8 Replacing a Power Amplifier................................................................................................242 9.9 Replacing a GTR 8000 Base Radio Backplane...................................................................245 9.10 Replacing a Preselector Filter............................................................................................250 9.11 Replacing Transmit Filters (700/800 MHz)........................................................................ 251 9.12 Replacing the Dual Circulator/Isolator Modules.................................................................253 9.13 Replacing a Duplexer (700/800 MHz)................................................................................257 9.14 Replacing a Duplexer (UHF)..............................................................................................259 9.15 Replacing a Duplexer (VHF)..............................................................................................261 9.16 Replacing an Antenna Relay............................................................................................. 262 Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference......................................................264 10.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio LEDs.............................................................................................264 10.1.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Transceiver LEDs........................................................... 264 10.1.1.1 Transceiver Status and Alarm LEDs...................................................... 265 10.1.1.2 Transceiver Ethernet Link Status LEDs................................................. 265 10.1.1.3 Transceiver Application-Controlled LEDs.............................................. 266 10.1.1.4 Transceiver Services-Controlled LEDs.................................................. 267 10.1.2 Transceiver Option Card Intercom LED...............................................................267 10.1.3 Power Amplifier LEDs.......................................................................................... 268 10.1.4 Fan Module LED.................................................................................................. 268 10.1.5 Power Supply LEDs............................................................................................. 269 10.2 RFDS Equipment Specifications .......................................................................................270 10.2.1 Transmit Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz)...................................................... 270 10.2.2 Preselector Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz)..................................................271 10.2.3 Preselector Filter Specifications (UHF)................................................................271 14 MN003286A01-E Contents 10.2.4 Preselector Filter Specifications (VHF)................................................................ 271 10.2.5 Duplexer Specifications (700/800 MHz)...............................................................272 10.2.6 Duplexer Specifications (UHF).............................................................................272 10.2.7 Duplexer Specifications (VHF).............................................................................273 10.2.8 External Dual Circulator Specifications (700/800 MHz)....................................... 273 10.2.9 External Dual Circulator Specifications (UHF)..................................................... 274 10.2.10 External Dual Circulator Specifications (VHF)................................................... 274 10.2.11 Antenna Relay Specifications............................................................................ 275 Chapter 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery........................................276 11.1 Recovering the GTR 8000 Base Radio............................................................................. 276 11.2 Performing a Site Download With PSC 9600 Site Controllers...........................................276 11.3 Performing a Site Software Download With GCP 8000 Site Controllers........................... 278 Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits...........................281 A.1 T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits.........................................................281 A.1.1 T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit............................................................................281 A.1.1.1 T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List..............................................282 A.1.2 T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit............................................................................283 A.1.2.1 T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List..............................................284 A.1.3 T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit............................................................................285 A.1.3.1 T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List..............................................287 A.1.4 Expected Site Performance for T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute........... 289 A.1.5 Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit............................................................................289 A.1.5.1 Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List..............................................290 A.1.6 Installing the T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits......................291 A.1.7 Configuring the T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits................. 292 A.2 T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit......................................................................................295 A.2.1 T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Parts List........................................................296 A.2.2 Site Performance Expected for T1-2R with Talk-Around.......................................297 A.2.3 Installing the T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit...................................................298 A.2.4 Configuring the T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit.............................................. 299 A.3 T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit................................................................301 A.3.1 T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Parts List..................................304 A.3.2 Site Performance Expected for T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay.................305 A.3.3 Installing the T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit.............................306 A.3.4 Configuring the T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit........................ 307 15 MN003286A01-E List of Figures List of Figures Figure 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio............................................................................................................ 29 Figure 2: Single-Site Repeater Configuration 1......................................................................................33 Figure 3: Single Site Repeater Configuration 2...................................................................................... 33 Figure 4: GTR 8000 Base Radios in HPD Remote Site......................................................................... 35 Figure 5: Transceiver Module (Front View)............................................................................................ 61 Figure 6: Transceiver Control Board Information Flow...........................................................................62 Figure 7: Transceiver RESET Switch (viewable through the drop-down door)...................................... 63 Figure 8: Transceiver Option Card Intercom Button (behind the fan module)........................................64 Figure 9: Transceiver Module (Backplane Connections) .......................................................................64 Figure 10: Power Amplifier Module........................................................................................................ 65 Figure 11: Power Amplifier (Backplane Connections)............................................................................ 66 Figure 12: Fan Module .......................................................................................................................... 66 Figure 13: Power Supply........................................................................................................................ 67 Figure 14: AC and DC Power Distribution in the GTR 8000 Base Radio .............................................. 68 Figure 15: Power Supply Connections (Rear)........................................................................................ 70 Figure 16: Preselector Filter (700/800 MHz).......................................................................................... 71 Figure 17: Preselector (UHF)................................................................................................................. 72 Figure 18: Preselector (VHF)..................................................................................................................72 Figure 19: Transmit Filter (700/800 MHz)...............................................................................................73 Figure 20: Duplexer (700/800 MHz)....................................................................................................... 73 Figure 21: Duplexer (UHF)..................................................................................................................... 74 Figure 22: Duplexer (VHF)..................................................................................................................... 74 Figure 23: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz)...........................................................75 Figure 24: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF).........................................................................76 Figure 25: Antenna Relay Module Connections..................................................................................... 77 Figure 26: Base Radio Backplane Mounting Location............................................................................77 Figure 27: Antenna Relay Module Mounted on Backplane Cover..........................................................78 Figure 28: Antenna Relay Module Mounted on Peripheral Tray............................................................ 79 Figure 29: Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Antenna Relay Module (Bracket Mounting)...........................................................................................................................................80 Figure 30: Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Antenna Relay Module (Peripheral Tray Mounting)...........................................................................................................................................81 Figure 31: Warning Label on Hot Modules............................................................................................. 84 Figure 32: GTR 8000 Base Radio (Cabinet Version) Floor Mounting Detail....................................... 95 Figure 33: Cabinet Dimensions.............................................................................................................. 96 Figure 34: Cabinet Mounting Rails......................................................................................................... 97 Figure 35: Lifting a Cabinet with a Harness............................................................................................98 16 MN003286A01-E List of Figures Figure 36: Cabinet Door Removal.......................................................................................................... 99 Figure 37: Cabinet Door Replacement................................................................................................... 99 Figure 38: Base Radio Mounted in Rack .............................................................................................100 Figure 39: Battery Temperature Sensor Example 1............................................................................. 103 Figure 40: Battery Temperature Sensor Example 2............................................................................. 104 Figure 41: Rack Grounding.................................................................................................................. 105 Figure 42: Base Radio Integrated Voice and Data Backplane............................................................. 106 Figure 43: Base Radio HPD Backplane............................................................................................ 109 Figure 44: Base Radio Front............................................................................................................. 110 Figure 45: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Conventional)........................................................... 114 Figure 46: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Trunked 3600).......................................................... 117 Figure 47: Wireline Port Pin-Outs.........................................................................................................118 Figure 48: Microphone Port Pin-Outs................................................................................................... 118 Figure 49: Speaker Port Pin-Outs........................................................................................................ 119 Figure 50: VoyenceControl Welcome Page......................................................................................... 128 Figure 51: VoyenceControl Login Window........................................................................................... 128 Figure 52: VoyenceControl Dashboard................................................................................................ 129 Figure 53: SNMPv3 Security Level Option Prompt.............................................................................. 133 Figure 54: CSS Login Banner...............................................................................................................134 Figure 55: CSS Login Banner...............................................................................................................136 Figure 56: SNMPv3 Passphrase Prompt..............................................................................................142 Figure 57: Remote Access Configuration Tab......................................................................................148 Figure 58: Password Configuration Window........................................................................................ 149 Figure 59: Preselector Tuning VHF................................................................................................. 162 Figure 60: Preselector Tuning UHF................................................................................................. 164 Figure 61: VHF Duplexer Tuning Setup............................................................................................... 167 Figure 62: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonator............................ 168 Figure 63: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonator........................... 169 Figure 64: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies............... 170 Figure 65: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies................ 171 Figure 66: Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Test Equipment............................. 172 Figure 67: Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly............. 173 Figure 68: Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Test Equipment...................................... 174 Figure 69: Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly...................... 175 Figure 70: UHF Duplexer Tuning Setup............................................................................................... 176 Figure 71: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonator............................ 177 Figure 72: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonator........................... 178 Figure 73: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies............... 179 Figure 74: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies................180 17 MN003286A01-E List of Figures Figure 75: Verifying UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Test Equipment............................. 181 Figure 76: Verify UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly..................181 Figure 77: Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Test Equipment...................................... 182 Figure 78: Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly ..................... 183 Figure 79: Metering Screen Window.................................................................................................... 185 Figure 80: Configuration for Modulation Fidelity Measurement (Aeroflex 2975 Series Service Monitor or Equivalent Analyzer)...................................................................................................... 195 Figure 81: Configuration for Modulation Fidelity Measurement (Aeroflex 2975 Series Service Monitor or Equivalent)..................................................................................................................... 197 Figure 82: HPD Service Monitor Test Screen (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor)........................198 Figure 83: HPD Service Monitor - RF Control Settings Window (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor)........................................................................................................................................... 201 Figure 84: CSS Test And Measurement Screen.................................................................................. 202 Figure 85: HPD Service Monitor - Rx Meter Subscreen, Reset Soft Keys (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor).............................................................................................................................. 202 Figure 86: HPD Service Monitor - RF Control Settings Window (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor)........................................................................................................................................... 204 Figure 87: Test And Measurement Screen...........................................................................................205 Figure 88: HPD Service Monitor - Rx Meter Subscreen and Soft Keys (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor).............................................................................................................................. 206 Figure 89: CSS Test And Measurement Screen.................................................................................. 207 Figure 90: MOSCAD Network Fault Management Example............................................................. 217 Figure 91: GEN 1 Transceiver Module................................................................................................. 228 Figure 92: GEN 2 Transceiver Module................................................................................................. 228 Figure 93: GEN 1 Power Amplifier Module...........................................................................................230 Figure 94: GEN 2 Power Amplifier Module...........................................................................................230 Figure 95: Transceiver Module.............................................................................................................231 Figure 96: GTR 8000 Base Radio Modules .........................................................................................232 Figure 97: Fan Assembly .....................................................................................................................237 Figure 98: Power Supply...................................................................................................................... 239 Figure 99: Power Supply Fan............................................................................................................... 241 Figure 100: Power Amplifier Module.................................................................................................... 243 Figure 101: Captive Screws................................................................................................................. 243 Figure 102: GTR 8000 Power Amplifier RF Cable (Front)....................................................................244 Figure 103: GTR 8000 Base Radio Showing Connections to Backplane Through Backplane Cover..245 Figure 104: Fan Cable Connector........................................................................................................ 248 Figure 105: EMI Spring Panel Guide Rail Alignment............................................................................249 Figure 106: Preselector Filter (700/800 MHz)...................................................................................... 250 Figure 107: Preselector Filter (UHF).................................................................................................... 250 Figure 108: Preselector Filter (VHF).....................................................................................................251 Figure 109: Transmit Filter (700/800 MHz)...........................................................................................252 18 MN003286A01-E List of Figures Figure 110: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz).......................................................254 Figure 111: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF).....................................................................255 Figure 112: Duplexer Module (700/800 MHz)...................................................................................... 258 Figure 113: Duplexer Module (UHF).................................................................................................... 259 Figure 114: Duplexer Module for IVD (VHF)........................................................................................ 261 Figure 115: Transceiver LEDs (viewable through a drop-down door).................................................. 264 Figure 116: Transceiver Option Card Intercom LED (viewable behind the fan module)...................... 267 Figure 117: Power Amplifier LEDs, viewable through a drop-down door............................................. 268 Figure 118: Fan Module-Alarm LED (lower right corner)......................................................................269 Figure 119: Power Supply Module....................................................................................................... 269 Figure 120: T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram..............................................................282 Figure 121: T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram..............................................................284 Figure 122: T4-4R Receiver Mute Configuration..................................................................................286 Figure 123: T4-4R Splitter and Antenna Relay Tray............................................................................ 286 Figure 124: T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram..............................................................287 Figure 125: Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram..............................................................290 Figure 126: CSS - WildCard Tables Example...................................................................................... 293 Figure 127: T1-2R Talk-Around Option Kit Wiring Diagram................................................................. 296 Figure 128: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Configuration........................................................ 301 Figure 129: Triple Antenna Relay Tray.................................................................................................302 Figure 130: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Wiring Diagram....................................303 19 MN003286A01-E List of Tables List of Tables Table 1: Base Radio Modules and Function...........................................................................................30 Table 2: Standby Power Consumption................................................................................................... 39 Table 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications IV&D (700/800 MHz) ..................................... 40 Table 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D (700/800 MHz) ...........................42 Table 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D (700/800 MHz) ..............................................43 Table 6: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D (700/800 MHz) ....................................... 44 Table 7: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (700/800 MHz)...........................................44 Table 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz) ................. 45 Table 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz).............46 Table 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz)..............................47 Table 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz)....................... 48 Table 12: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (UHF R1 380435 MHz)..........................48 Table 13: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz)................ 49 Table 14: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz)...........50 Table 15: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz)..............................51 Table 16: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz)....................... 52 Table 17: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (UHF R2 435524 MHz)..........................52 Table 18: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz)......................52 Table 19: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz)................ 54 Table 20: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz)....................................55 Table 21: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz)............................. 56 Table 22: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (VHF 136174 MHz)............................... 56 Table 23: General Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) ..........................56 Table 24: Transmitter Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) .................... 57 Table 25: Receiver Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) ........................ 57 Table 26: FCC Identification for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz).................................. 58 Table 27: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for HPD (700/800 MHz)......................................... 59 Table 28: General Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio Cabinet....................................................59 Table 29: Transceiver Front RESET Switch Functions.......................................................................... 63 Table 30: ON/OFF Switch - States for Power Supply and Battery Charger........................................... 69 Table 31: Power Supply Module Backplane Connections......................................................................70 Table 32: Activities for Site Preparation................................................................................................. 86 Table 33: Heavy Gauge Wire Resistance Examples..............................................................................91 Table 34: DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Maximum Distances for an IV and D Site.................... 102 Table 35: Power Connection Wire Gauge Maximum Distances for HPD.............................................102 Table 36: Base Radio Backplane Connections for Integrated Voice and Data.................................... 106 20 MN003286A01-E List of Tables Table 37: Base Radio Backplane Connections for HPD...................................................................... 109 Table 38: Transceiver Connections - Front.......................................................................................... 111 Table 39: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Conventional)............................................................ 112 Table 40: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Trunked 3600)........................................................... 115 Table 41: Wireline Port Pin-Outs.......................................................................................................... 117 Table 42: Microphone Port Pin-Outs.................................................................................................... 118 Table 43: Speaker Port Pin-Outs..........................................................................................................119 Table 44: V.24 Port Pin-Outs................................................................................................................119 Table 45: Quick-Connect RF Coaxial Adapters for GTR 8000 Base Radio Support............................121 Table 46: Time and Frequency Inputs..................................................................................................157 Table 47: Deviation Standards for ASTRO 25 System Test Patterns.................................................. 184 Table 48: Illegal Carrier Determination.................................................................................................211 Table 49: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Troubleshooting.................................................................212 Table 50: Base Radio Diagnostic Options in UEM............................................................................... 216 Table 51: Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting............................................... 218 Table 52: GTR 8000 Base Radio Field Replaceable Units.................................................................. 222 Table 53: GTR 8000 Base Radio Field Replaceable Parts.................................................................. 223 Table 54: GTR 8000 Base Radio Cabinet Field Replacement Parts....................................................225 Table 55: Individual Replaceable Parts on External Dual Circulator Tray............................................225 Table 56: GTR 8000 Base Radio Cables............................................................................................. 225 Table 57: System Feature Exceptions..................................................................................................226 Table 58: Minimum Software Download Version Requirements.......................................................... 227 Table 59: Transceiver FRU Number Mappings.................................................................................... 228 Table 60: Power Amplifier FRU Number Mappings..............................................................................230 Table 61: Transceiver Status and Alarm LEDs.................................................................................... 265 Table 62: Transceiver Ethernet Link Status LEDs................................................................................265 Table 63: Transceiver Application-Controlled LEDs.............................................................................266 Table 64: Transceiver Services-Controlled LEDs.................................................................................267 Table 65: Power Amplifier LEDs...........................................................................................................268 Table 66: Power Supply LEDs..............................................................................................................270 Table 67: Transmit Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz).......................................................................270 Table 68: Preselector Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz).................................................................. 271 Table 69: Preselector Filter Specifications (UHF)................................................................................ 271 Table 70: Preselector Filter Specifications (VHF).................................................................................271 Table 71: Duplexer Specifications (700/800 MHz)............................................................................... 272 Table 72: Duplexer Specifications (UHF)............................................................................................. 272 Table 73: Duplexer Specifications (VHF)............................................................................................. 273 Table 74: External Dual Circulator Specifications (700/800 MHz)........................................................273 Table 75: External Dual Circulator Specifications (UHF)......................................................................274 21 MN003286A01-E List of Tables Table 76: External Dual Circulator Specifications (VHF)......................................................................274 Table 77: Antenna Relay Specifications...............................................................................................275 Table 78: T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List...........................................................................282 Table 79: T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List...........................................................................284 Table 80: T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List...........................................................................287 Table 81: Total Transmit and Receive Attenuation for T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute....... 289 Table 82: Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List...........................................................................290 Table 83: T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Parts List.......................................................................296 Table 84: Total Transmit and Receive Attenuation for T1-2R with Talk-Around.................................. 297 Table 85: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Parts List.................................................304 Table 86: Total Transmit and Receive Attenuation for T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay............ 305 22 MN003286A01-E List of Processes List of Processes Equipment Installation Process Overview ............................................................................................. 82 Installing Device Software Prerequisites ............................................................................................. 121 Installing Devices in the UNC .............................................................................................................. 124 Discovering a Device in the UNC ........................................................................................................ 132 CSS Initial Device Configuration ......................................................................................................... 134 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Trunked Simulcast) ............. 150 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Trunked Repeater) .............. 151 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (HPD) ....................................151 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Conventional) ...................... 152 Configuring Centralized Authentication on Devices in VoyenceControl .............................................. 154 Recovering the GTR 8000 Base Radio ............................................................................................... 276 23 MN003286A01-E List of Procedures List of Procedures Configuring The Ethernet LAN Switch ...................................................................................................34 Mounting Cabinets or Racks to a Floor ................................................................................................. 88 Lifting Cabinets Vertically ...................................................................................................................... 97 Removing/Replacing a Cabinet Door .................................................................................................... 98 Mounting the GTR 8000 Base Radio ...................................................................................................100 Grounding the GTR 8000 Base Radio .................................................................................................105 Discovering a Device in the UNC ........................................................................................................ 125 Loading Device OS Images to the UNC .............................................................................................. 126 Enabling FTP Service ..........................................................................................................................127 Transferring and Installing the OS Image ............................................................................................127 Inspecting Device Properties for Transferred and Installed Software ................................................. 130 Disabling FTP Service ......................................................................................................................... 131 Connecting Through a Serial Port Link ................................................................................................135 Setting the Device IP Address and Pairing Number in CSS ................................................................137 Setting the Serial Security Services in CSS ........................................................................................ 138 Resetting SNMPv3 User Credentials to Factory Defaults in CSS ....................................................... 139 Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link ......................................................................................... 140 Setting the BR/CM Pairing Number in CSS .........................................................................................142 Setting the Date and Time in CSS .......................................................................................................143 Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User Credentials in CSS .........................................................143 Adding or Modifying an SNMPv3 User in CSS ....................................................................................146 Performing an SNMPv3 Connection Verification in CSS .....................................................................146 Customizing the Login Banner in CSS ................................................................................................ 146 Setting the SWDL Transfer Mode in CSS ........................................................................................... 147 Setting the Local Password Configuration in CSS .............................................................................. 149 Configuring Tx Power Values and Battery Type ..................................................................................153 Setting RMC System Gain ...................................................................................................................154 Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency .................................... 160 Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies ................................... 161 Preparing the Equipment for VHF Alignment ...................................................................................... 161 Tuning The VHF Preselector ............................................................................................................... 161 Calculating The UHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency ....................................163 Calculating the UHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies .................................... 163 Preparing the Equipment for UHF Alignment ...................................................................................... 164 Tuning The UHF Preselector ...............................................................................................................164 Setting Up for VHF Duplexer Tuning ................................................................................................... 167 24 MN003286A01-E List of Procedures Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators ...................................................................................... 168 Tuning VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators ..................................................................................... 169 Tuning VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies ...........................................................................170 Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies ............................................................................171 Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss ................................................................................................173 Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation .........................................................................................................175 Checking VHF Duplexer After Tuning ................................................................................................. 176 Setting Up for UHF Duplexer Tuning ...................................................................................................176 Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators ......................................................................................177 Tuning UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators ..................................................................................... 178 Tuning UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies ...........................................................................179 Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies ........................................................................... 180 Verifying UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss ............................................................................................... 182 Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation ........................................................................................................ 183 Checking UHF Duplexer After Tuning ................................................................................................. 184 Monitoring the Power Supply Module ..................................................................................................185 Verifying Receiver Performance for FDMA Operation .........................................................................185 Verifying Receiver Performance in TTA Operation ............................................................................. 187 Verifying Receiver Performance (Analog Operation) .......................................................................... 190 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-Test Method) (IV and D) ............................................................. 192 Monitoring the Transmitter Metering Points .........................................................................................193 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Digital Operation) ........................................................................193 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Analog Operation) ...................................................................... 195 Setting Up the HPD Service Monitor for Testing the Base Radio ........................................................198 Performing In-band Power Meter User Calibration ..............................................................................199 Measuring HPD Base Radio Tx Power, Frequency Accuracy, and Tx EVM .......................................200 Measuring HPD Base Radio Rx Sensitivity and Rx BER .................................................................... 203 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-test Method) (HPD) .....................................................................206 Replacing a Transceiver Module ......................................................................................................... 231 Replacing the Fan Assembly ...............................................................................................................237 Replacing a Power Supply .................................................................................................................. 238 Replacing a Power Supply Fan ........................................................................................................... 240 Replacing a Power Amplifier ............................................................................................................... 242 Replacing a GTR 8000 Base Radio Backplane ...................................................................................245 Replacing a Preselector Filter ............................................................................................................. 250 Replacing Transmit Filters (700/800 MHz) .......................................................................................... 251 Replacing the Dual Circulator/Isolator Modules .................................................................................. 253 Replacing a Duplexer (700/800 MHz) ................................................................................................. 257 Replacing a Duplexer (UHF) ............................................................................................................... 259 25 MN003286A01-E List of Procedures Replacing a Duplexer (VHF) ................................................................................................................261 Replacing an Antenna Relay ............................................................................................................... 262 Performing a Site Download With PSC 9600 Site Controllers .............................................................276 Performing a Site Software Download With GCP 8000 Site Controllers ............................................. 278 Installing the T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits ....................................................291 Configuring the T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits ............................................... 292 Installing the T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit .................................................................................298 Configuring the T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit ............................................................................ 299 Installing the T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit ...........................................................306 Configuring the T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit ...................................................... 307 26 MN003286A01-E About GTR 8000 Base Radio About GTR 8000 Base Radio This manual provides descriptive and procedural information on the GTR 8000 Base Radio. Included in the manual are descriptions of the components of the GTR 8000 Base Radio and their function, specifications for the various configurations, and procedures on installation, configuration, optimization, operation, troubleshooting, and FRU/FRE replacement. Finally, a reference section provides information on LED indicators and RFDS equipment specifications. This manual is intended for technicians and system operators as a resource for understanding and installing the GTR 8000 Base Radio. The manual should be used with the ASTRO 25 system documentation and the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual. What Is Covered In This Manual?

This manual contains the following chapters:

GTR 8000 Base Radio Description on page 29 provides a high-level description of the GTR 8000 Base Radio and the function it serves on your system. GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation on page 61 explains how the GTR 8000 Base Radio works in the context of your system. GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation on page 82 details installation procedures relating to the GTR GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration on page 132 details configuration procedures relating to the 8000 Base Radio. GTR 8000 Base Radio. GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization on page 156 contains optimization procedures and recommended settings relating to the GTR 8000 Base Radio. GTR 8000 Base Radio Maintenance on page 208 describes periodic maintenance procedures relating to the GTR 8000 Base Radio. GTR 8000 Base Radio Operation on page 209 details tasks to perform once the GTR 8000 Base Radio is installed and operational on your system. GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting on page 212 provides fault management and troubleshooting information relating to the GTR 8000 Base Radio. GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures on page 222 lists the Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Field Replaceable Entities (FREs) and includes replacement procedures applicable to the GTR 8000 Base Radio. GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference on page 264 contains supplemental reference information relating to the GTR 8000 Base Radio indicator LEDs. GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery on page 276 provides references and information that enables recovery of a GTR 8000 Base Radio in the event of failure. Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits on page 281 provides the option kits that are available for the conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio. Helpful Background Information Motorola Solutions offers various courses designed to assist in learning about the system. For information, go to http://www.motorolasolutions.com/training to view the current course offerings and technology paths. 27 MN003286A01-E About GTR 8000 Base Radio Related Information In addition to the information in the table, see the Related Information Guide. Related Information Purpose Standards and Guidelines for Communi-

cation Sites Dynamic System Resilience Feature Guide Provides all the information required to understand, operate, main-

tain, and troubleshoot the Dynamic System Resilience feature. Provides standards and guidelines that should be followed when setting up a Motorola Solutions communications site. This may be purchased on CD 9880384V83, by calling the North America Parts Organization at 8004224210 or the international number at 3024449842. Provides an overview of the ASTRO 25 new system features, docu-

mentation set, technical illustrations, and system-level disaster re-

covery that support the ASTRO 25 radio communication system. Provides the information required to understand and operate the conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Centralized or Distributed Conventional Architecture. Provides instructions for replacing conventional QUANTARs with conventional analog, digital and mixed mode GTR 8000 base radios. Also provides detailed comparisons of the devices. Provides the information required to understand and operate the GTR 8000 Base Radio in an ASTRO 25 trunked site. System Overview and Documentation Conventional Operations Conventional QUANTAR Replacement Guide Trunked IP Simulcast Subsystem Re-

mote Site HPD Standalone System - Infrastructure Repeater Site Infrastructure Reference Guide Quick Guide for Replacing a Trunked 3600 QUANTAR with a GTR 8000 Base Radio Provides instructions for replacing trunked 3600 QUANTARs with GTR 8000 base radios and GTR 8000 Expandable Site Subsystem. Also provides detailed comparisons of the devices. 28 MN003286A01-E GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Chapter 1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Description This chapter provides a high-level description of the GTR 8000 Base Radio and the function it serves in your system. 1.1 Introduction Figure 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio This manual provides information on the standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio and associated applications. The term base radio or BR is used to denote the transceiver and associated modules. As viewed in these instances, one base radio is a standalone configuration. A GTR 8000 Base Radio consists of a transceiver module, power amplifier module, fan module, and power supply. The transceiver module includes the functionality for the exciter, receiver, and station control with an optional transceiver option card. The base radio software, configuration, and network management, as well as inbound/outbound traffic handling, are performed through the transceiver module. On-board serial and Ethernet service ports are on this module for local servicing through CSS. The power amplifier module amplifies the low-level modulated RF signal from the transceiver module and delivers the amplified signal on the path to the transmit antenna. The power supply module supports the transceiver and power amplifier modules. Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) provides the interface between the transceivers and the site antennas and between the power amplifier and the site antennas. 29 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description 1.2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Components Table 1: Base Radio Modules and Function Base Radio Description Power Supply Power Amplifier (PA) Transceiver (XCVR) Transceiver Option Card Operates from either an AC or DC input and provides the DC operating voltage for the base radio. May also provide a separate battery charger to maintain the charge on a 48 VDC nominal system, positive or negative ground. Accepts a low-level modulated RF signal from the trans-

ceiver module and amplifies it for transmission through the site transmit antenna. Also provides a low-level RF feedback signal to the transceiver module to achieve the required transmitter linearity. Also performs functions re-

lated to the fan module. Provides the control, exciter, and receiver functions for the base radio. An optional board that attaches to the control board of the transceiver. Provides an internal 10 MHz frequency refer-

ence. For conventional base radio operation, it also pro-

vides the analog interfaces and WildCard I/Os. The trans-

ceiver option card is available in two categories:

OCXO (Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator) TCXO (Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator) NOTICE: The OCXO board when initially pow-

ered on takes a few minutes to reach its opera-

tional temperature. During the warm-up period, if the base radio is configured to use the OCXO frequency reference, the base radio may report a frequency reference failure. This alarm condi-

tion automatically clears once the OCXO board has warmed up sufficiently to provide a stable reference. Fan Provides intermittent forced air cooling for the power am-

plifier and transceiver modules. 1.3 Supported System Configurations The GTR 8000 Base Radio is available in the following system architectures:

High Performance Data (HPD) Trunked IP Simulcast Subsystems (IV&D) ASTRO 25 Repeater Site Trunked Single-Site Repeater Configuration (IV&D) Centralized Conventional Architectures Distributed Conventional (Subsystem) Architecture 30 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description ASTRO 3.1 Conventional System Analog and/or Digital Conventional, Trunked or Mixed-Mode Systems Trunked 3600 SmartZone Systems 1.3.1 Supported Frequencies for Trunked IV and D and Conventional Architectures The GTR 8000 Base Radio is available in the following frequency bands:

700, 800 MHz (700 MHz analog conventional is not available within the U.S.A. or Canada) UHF R1 (380435 MHz) UHF R2 (435524 MHz) VHF (136174 MHz) NOTICE: RF Distribution Functionality (RFDS) information provided in this documentation pertains to the RFDS equipment supplied by Motorola Solutions. 1.3.2 Supported Frequencies for HPD The GTR 8000 Base Radio is available for 25 kHz operation in the following frequency bands:

700 MHz 800 MHz 1.4 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Trunked IP Simulcast Subsystem The base radio captures inbound signals through external receive (Rx) antennas from the subscriber/

mobile radios and then amplifies, filters, and demodulates the signals into voice packets which are forwarded to a comparator. The comparator processes the received voice packets for a particular call and forwards the best quality voice packets to the zone core, which routes them to the associated base radio at each remote site. At a predetermined time, all base radios transmit the voice packets simultaneously on the same frequency to complete the communication. A maximum of 30 base radios can be installed per remote site. Each base radio has an Ethernet connection to a switch at the site for the Network Management interface. 1.5 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in an ASTRO 25 Repeater Site The base radios in an ASTRO 25 repeater site are set up in a single trunked site, with one active control channel and a number of voice channels at the site. If packet data services are supported at the site, a number of voice channels can be configured with packet data channel capability. Voice traffic is routed from each of the base radios to the system for distribution to other sites and is repeated by the base radios to support other local subscribers. However, data traffic is routed to the GCP 8000 Site Controller. The site controller routes these packets upstream to the zone core for further processing and routing. 31 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description A maximum of 28 base radios can be installed at the site. Each base radio has either an Ethernet connection to a site LAN switch or an Ethernet connection to both site controllers at the site, depending on the site configuration. See the Repeater Site Infrastructure Feature Guide manual for details. Besides the power supply module supporting the transceiver and power amplifier modules, the power supply can also provide auxiliary power to a connected site controller. An ASTRO 25 repeater site can also support a mix of GTR 8000 Base Radios and standalone 10Base-T Ethernet Epic IV or Epic VI QUANTAR stations, or STR 3000 Base Radios. If a mix of GTR 8000 Base Radios and QUANTAR stations are at an ASTRO 25 repeater site, SNMPv1 and clear SWDL support is used at the site. 1.6 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Trunked Single-Site Repeater Configuration This configuration consists of standalone GTR 8000 Base Radios and standalone GCP 8000 Site Controllers in a single-site repeater configuration, or can be used in a multi-site system to provide a system migration step that enables replacement of PSC 9600 Site Controllers or base radios other than the GTR 8000 Base Radios. The base radios may be colocated with the site controllers, or be separated (non-colocated) from the site controllers. NOTICE: This configuration can only be used in non-voting configurations. Support is provided only for FDMA when the base radios are physically separated from and not colocated with the site controllers. TDMA requires the use of a frequency reference and timing reference that can only be provided through the CP3 links on the site controller, which cannot be extended to non-colocated base radios when the distance exceeds the noted limits. This configuration is supported only on repeater sites. An Ethernet cable is used to extend the site controllers signal to the first non-colocated base radio through the site controllers Net AUX port into the base radios SC-A port. The site controllers Net AUX port must be enabled and configured using the CSS for 100/FULL (speed and duplex). When the distance between the site controllers and the first non-colocated base radio exceeds 328 ft (100 m), an external HP 2620 24-port Ethernet LAN switch must be used to extend the site controllers signal. When there are additional non-colocated base radios and those base radios are more than 328 ft (100 m) from the previous non-colocated base radio, additional Ethernet LAN switches are required to continue to extend the signal of the site controller. See Figure 2: Single-Site Repeater Configuration 1 on page 33. 32 Figure 2: Single-Site Repeater Configuration 1 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description If the distance between the first non-colocated base radio and subsequent non-colocated base radios is less than 328 ft (100 m), a single Ethernet LAN switch can be used to distribute the site controllers call control signaling to those non-colocated base radios. The stated distance limit for a shielded twisted pair Ethernet cable (CAT5) is 328 ft (100 m) before the signal degrades too much to be used. See Figure 3: Single Site Repeater Configuration 2 on page 33. Figure 3: Single Site Repeater Configuration 2 Once the site controller link is extended, the control plane could be open to access from elements other than the base radios. Each Ethernet LAN switch must be manually configured to provide MAC Port lockdown to make sure that only the proper devices can communicate with each other. MAC Port lockdown may also be applied on any unused Expansion Ports on the site controller. See the MAC Port Lockdown manual to lock down the site controller. The switch ports may be enabled or disabled according to specific security guidelines. See Enabling/Disabling Ports on HP Switches Using Local Access in the System LAN Switches manual. 33 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Each non-colocated base radio is equipped with a transceiver option card, which provides an internal 10 MHz frequency reference. See the Reference Oscillator Alignment Procedures of the base radio Alignment Screens in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) Online Help for alignment details. The base radios that are colocated with the site controllers do not require the transceiver option card. When the Ethernet LAN switch is used in a configuration that does not include centralized network management, the switch must be programmed manually. See the System LAN Switches manual. 1.6.1 Configuring The Ethernet LAN Switch When and where to use: Use this procedure to configure either an HP 2620 LAN switch for a Trunked Single-Site Repeater Configuration. Procedure:

1 Enter the following commands at the prompt: ProCurve Switch 2620-24#

2 ProCurve Switch 2620-24#erase startup-config

(This command removes any existing switch configuration) 3 ProCurve Switch 2620-24#config

(This command puts the switch into configuration mode) 4 ProCurve Switch 2620-24(config)#int X

(Using Port X as an example) 5 ProCurve Switch 2620-24(eth-X)#speed-duplex 100-Full

(This command sets the interface X to 100MB/Full Duplex) 6 ProCurve Switch 2620-24(eth-X)#write memory

(This command saves the configuration changes to persistent memory) 1.7 Overview For a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a High Performance Data (HPD) Subsystem The GTR 8000 Base Radio provides the radio frequency (RF) link between the system site controller and the subscriber/mobile radios. The base radio captures inbound signals through external receive

(Rx) antennas from the subscriber/mobile radios and then amplifies, filters, and demodulates the signals into data packets which are forwarded to the site controller. The site controller routes/receives digitized data payload to/from the Radio Network Gateway (RNG) for further processing and routing. The site controller receives digitized data payload and control packets from the RNG and routes them to a specified base radio. The base radio extracts the control instructions from the packets and uses them for internal management such as channel frequency assignment. The base radio maps the digital data packets to discreet voltage levels which are then used to modulate an RF carrier. The modulated RF carrier is amplified and may be combined with other RF channels, filtered and routed to the transmission (Tx) antennas. The first four base radios at the site are defined as home channel capable. Settings for the base radio are made through Unified Network Configurator (UNC) and Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Besides the power supply module supporting the transceiver and power amplifier modules, it can also provide auxiliary power to a connected site controller or receive multicoupler/low noise amplifier (RMC/

LNA). 34 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description The HPD base radio provides a full-duplex RF interface to HPD Mobile Subscriber Units (MSUs). The HPD base radios are available for 25 kHz HPD operation in the 700 MHz or 800 MHz bands. Up to five HPD base radios may be installed at the site. Each base radio has an Ethernet connection to both of the site controller modules at the site. The HPD base radio uses Radio Link Adaptation (RLA) to provide high-speed, reliable, enhanced data performance when communicating traffic with MSUs. RLA uses adaptive modulation techniques, with slower, and more reliable modulation for control signaling and retries, and faster modulation methods when traffic is successfully being delivered between the base radio and MSUs. The HPD base radio is implemented with 2X receiver diversity. This receiver diversity enhances the inbound signals from the MSUs on the channel. Figure 4: GTR 8000 Base Radios in HPD Remote Site The HPD base radio uses Time Division Multiplex (TDM) frames for random access channels, reserved access channels, and broadcast messages. All carriers in the system are synchronized by a Global Positioning System (GPS) so that transmission slots are synchronized across sites. The base radio is able to schedule inbound/outbound traffic for half-duplex MSUs so that outbound traffic intended for the MSU does not conflict with inbound random or reserved access traffic from the MSU. 1.8 Overview for a GTR 8000 Base Radio in Conventional Architectures Throughout this manual, the term conventional addresses either an analog only base radio or an ASTRO 25 Conventional base radio that operates in either digital mode or mixed (analog/digital) mode. Conventional base radios operate within:

An analog only infrastructure 35 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description A Centralized or Distributed Conventional Architecture, or An ASTRO 3.1 Conventional System. Each conventional base radio uses either:

A 2- or 4-wire TRC or 4-wire E&M interface in an analog infrastructure A V.24 interface for digital voice and data traffic to either a Channel Bank, Digital Interface Unit, Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW), MLC 8000, or link converter, ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator, and an optional 4-wire link for analog voice in a mixed mode configuration An IP interface for digital voice and data traffic to a CCGW or GCM 8000 Comparator. NOTICE: For information about conventional functions and topologies the base radio supports, see the Conventional Operations manual. The device can be IP managed while using the 4-

wire/V.24 interface for channel traffic. NOTICE: A base radio can be implemented as a QUANTAR replacement within an ASTRO 3.1 conventional system. The implementation details can be found in the Conventional QUANTAR Replacement Guide manual. 1.8.1 ASTRO 25 Conventional Base Radio ASTRO 25 Conventional base radio features include:

Separate Tx and Rx network access code Console or repeat priority Repeater set-up knockdown from the console Voice and data Control Messages (TSBK) Standalone repeater Control station Receive-only station Voting Multicast Simulcast Console Control

- Monitor Mode

- Repeat Control

- Frequency Select WildCard Operation Scan Operation Analog Phone Patch 36 Multi-Channel up to 16 channels with base station or repeater functionality Multiple Network Access Code (Multi-NAC) Operation 4-wire and V.24 connections to a DIU or an ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator using the same V.24 connector pin-outs as a QUANTAR station An ASTRO 25 Conventional base radio can be used in the following architectures:

MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description ASTRO 3.1 Conventional Systems Centralized Conventional Architectures

- Zone Core with Colocated Conventional Channels

- Trunked IP Simulcast Remote Site with Conventional Channels

- Dispatch Console Site with Colocated Conventional Channels

- Conventional-Only Remote Site

- HPD Site with Conventional Channels Distributed Conventional (Subsystem) Architectures

- Conventional Base Radio Sites

- Conventional Hub Sites 1.8.2 Analog Conventional Base Radio Analog conventional base radio features include:

12.5 kHz channel operation on all bands; 25 kHz channel operation for UHF T-Band and 800 MHz HearClear capability for 800 MHz Repeater Access Control Multi-Channel up to 16 channel with base station or repeater functionality Alarm tones over-the-air and over-the-wireline Transmit Antenna Relay Control and Simplex Operation WildCard Operation E&M Interface; Ext PTT keying and COR receiver I/O Analog simulcast support using Gen Tx and PL Analog inputs and Ext PTT and Ext PTT keying 2-wire or 4-wire connection to console or Comparator Multi-PL receive operation RA/RT configuration with analog 4-wire connections Analog Wireline Automatic Level Control (ALC) Wideband Receiver Operation Telephone Interconnect PL/DPL Tone Remote Control (TRC) Fall Back In-Cabinet Repeat (Automatic Mode)*

In-Cabinet Repeat (External Mode)*

Interfaces for a local microphone and speaker Control Station Simplex operation Scan Operation Voting Multicast 37 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Simulcast Console Control

- Monitor Mode

- Repeat Control

- Frequency Select

* For detailed information on the differences between the automatic Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat and the externally wired In-Cabinet Repeat functions, see the Conventional Operations manual. An analog conventional base radio can be used in the following architectures:

ASTRO 3.1 Conventional Systems Centralized Conventional Architectures

- Zone Core with Colocated Conventional Channels

- Trunked IP Simulcast Remote Site Conventional Channels

- Dispatch Console Site with Colocated Conventional Channels

- Conventional-Only Remote Site Distributed Conventional (Subsystem) Architectures

- Conventional Base Radio Sites

- Conventional Hub Sites 1.9 Overview of a GTR 8000 Base Radio in a Trunked 3600 System In a trunked 3600 system, the GTR 8000 Base Radio control channel runs at 3600 bps, and the voice channels can be configured for analog or ASTRO 25 voice operation. The base radio can be used in the following trunked 3600 SmartZone systems:

Trunked SmartX 6809/MTC 3600 Site Controller Simulcast Subsystem Depending on the system capabilities, each base radio can be configured for analog voice (4-wire interface), digital voice (V.24 interface) or mixed-mode (4-wire and V.24 interfaces). These interfaces connect to either a channel bank or ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator. The base radio is available in the following frequency bands:

800 MHz UHF R1 (380435 MHz) UHF R2 (435524 MHz) VHF (136174 MHz) NOTICE: A GTR 8000 Base Radio can be implemented as a QUANTAR replacement within a trunked 3600 SmartZone system. The implementation details can be found in the Quick Guide for Replacing a Trunked 3600 QUANTAR with a GTR 8000 Base Radio manual. 1.10 Power Efficiency Package The GTR 8000 Base Radio is available in a Power Efficiency Package, which provides low standby power consumption (see Table 2: Standby Power Consumption on page 39) functionality for ASTRO 25 Conventional base radios and trunked base radios operating in the UHF-R1 and UHF-R2 frequency bands. The Power Efficiency Package optimizes the power consumption for supported base radios for the use of power generated from alternate energy sources such as solar or wind. 38 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description The Power Efficiency Package hardware includes a modified transceiver, power amplifier, power supply, fan, and optional transceiver option card (internal reference) along with additional software configurations through Configuration/Service Software (CSS). The following conditions must be met to obtain a power consumption of less than or equal to 35 W:

DC source only Speaker turned OFF (if equipped with a transceiver option card) No activation of Aux Out Relays (if equipped with a transceiver option card) No 29 V AUX loads. For example: active draws by a site controller CSS configured for applications not requiring receiver diversity CSS Fan Holdover configured to short (length of time the fan stays ON after transmission) Ambient temperature of 104 F (40 C) or less (single fan operation disabling one of the fans within the fan module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 in the Field-Replaceable Unit

(FRU) Procedures chapter for instructions on how to disable the fan.) NOTICE: To validate the 35 W standby power consumption specification, wait for the main fans to turn off after the transmitter dekeys. The turn off delay of the main fans is controlled by the fan holdover configuration in the CSS. Single fan operation requires the Tx Power Out in the CSS to be limited to 50 W. Transceiver, power amplifier, power supply, fan, and TCXO transceiver option card (internal reference) are all power efficiency package versions NOTICE: The TCXO transceiver option card is available only for non-simulcast conventional systems. The OCXO transceiver option card is available for trunked or simulcast systems, but does not guarantee 35 W. Table 2: Standby Power Consumption cast 35 W 35 W Internal Reference Ca-

pable Not Internal Reference Capable 1.11 License Auditing Conventional Non- Simul-

Conventional Trunked Non-

Trunked Si-

Simulcast Simulcast mulcast 45 W 35 W 35 W 35 W 45 W 35 W License auditing for ASTRO 25 G-series devices at M and L core systems can be enabled through the License Manager to ensure that site licenses have been purchased and also to prevent the transfer of site licenses across systems. The License Manager performs the following functions:

Monitors the number of site devices in use within the system. Audits the number of active licenses. devices exceeds the licenses. If a site license is not present, the following functions do not occur:

Send or receive audio Displays a noncompliance notification on the Unified Event Manager (UEM) when the number of 39 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Vote audio Implement site control functions; such as assigning channels or calls. Any issues with an existing site license are sent to the UEM without system functionality being restricted. 1.12 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications The following G-Series Product Specifications references the TIA specifications for the base radio. This includes the following Methods and Performance recommendations:

Phase 1 (includes Linear Simulcast):

September 2008 Methods: TIA-102.CAAA-C, Digital C4FM/CQPSK Transceiver Measurements Methods Performance: TIA-102.CAB-C, Land Mobile Radio Transceiver Performance Recommendations, Project 25 Digital Radio Technology, C4FM/CQPSK Modulation January 2010 Phase 2:

Methods August 2011 Methods: TIA-102.CCAA, Two-Slot Time Division Multiple Access Transceiver Measurement Performance: TIA 102.CCAB, Two-Slot Time Division Multiple Access Transceiver Performance Recommendations October 2011 IMPORTANT: Specifications are subject to change without notice. 1.12.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data

(700/800 MHz) Table 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications IV&D (700/800 MHz) General Specifications Model Number Number of Channels (trunked) Number of Channels (conventional) Size (H x W x D) Weight (Mid-Power) Weight (High-Power) Temperature Range Operating Altitude T7039A 1 16 21 kg (46 lbs) 22 kg (48 lbs) 133mm x 483mm x 457mm (5.25" x 19" x 18") Operating:

-30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F) Storage:

-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) Up to 1800 meters (5900 ft) above mean sea level Above 1800 meters (5900 ft), the derating is 1.5 C/km (0.8 F/1000 ft) 40 Power Requirements Power Consumption Transmitting Low Power

(230W) Power Consumption Transmitting Mid Power

(2100 W) MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description General Specifications Above 3000 meters (9800 ft), the peak power derating for the Tx filter is 1 dB/1km (0.3 dB/

1000 ft) Maximum operational altitude is 5000 meters

(16900 ft) AC: 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz DC: 43.2-60 VDC C4FM, FM: 200W max., 700/800 MHz H-DQPSK, LSM: 195W max., 700/800 MHz C4FM, FM: 185 W max., 700/800 MHz H-DQPSK, LSM: 195W max., 700/800 MHz C4FM, FM: 470 W max., 700/800 MHz H-DQPSK, LSM: 530 W max., 700/800 MHz C4FM, FM: 430 W max., 700/800 MHz H-DQPSK, LSM: 490 W max., 700/800 MHz C4FM, FM: 725 W max., 800 MHz C4FM, FM: 700 W max., 800 MHz AC:

DC:

AC:

DC:

AC:

DC:

AC:

DC:

Power Consumption Transmitting High Power

(15150 W) Power Consumption (Standby) Channel Spacing Power Supply Type Battery Revert Input/Output Impedance Antenna Connector Types 110 W max. 75 W max. 12.5/25 kHz Switching Included 50 Ohms Frequency Stability Internal Reference (transceiver option card) Frequency Stability External Reference N female Tx:

Rx:

BNC female without preselector N female with preselector Aging:

30 ppb/yr 100 ppb/5yr Temperature: 40 ppb TRAK 41 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Frequency Generation Synthesized General Specifications Table 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D (700/800 MHz) Frequency Range 769-775, 775-776, 851870 MHz Transmitter Specifications Power Output* (Low-Power, 700/800 MHz) Power Output* (Mid-Power, 700/800 MHz) Power Output* (High-Power, 800 MHz) 2-30 W 2-100 W 15-150 W Electronic Bandwidth Full Bandwidth Modulation (Mid-Power, 700/800 MHz) C4FM, LSM, H-DQPSK, FM Modulation (High-Power, 800 MHz) Modulation Fidelity FM, C4FM 5%

Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB Analog FM Hum and Noise 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB Analog Audio Distortion Less than 2% at 1000 Hz Emission Designators (Low-Power, 700/800 MHz) 700MHz, 30W 8K70D1E, 8K70D1D, 8K70D1W, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1W, 9K80D7E, 9K80D7D, 9K80D7W 800MHz, 30 W:

8K70D1E, 8K70D1D, 8K70D1W, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1W, 10K0F1E, 10K0F1D, 10K0F1W, 9K80D7E, 9K80D7D, 9K80D7W, 17K7D7D, 16K0F1D, 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 14K0F1D, 14K0F3E 8K70D1E, 8K70D1D, 8K70D1W 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1W 9K80D7E, 9K80D7D, 9K80D7W 10K0F1E, 10K0F1D 800 W only:

10K0F1W, 16K0F1D, 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 14K0F1D, 14K0F3E 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 8K10F1W, 16K0F1D, 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 14K0F10, 14K0F3E, 10K0F1E, 10K0F1E, 10K0F1W Emission Designators (Mid-Power, 700/800 MHz) Emission Designator (High-Power, 800 MHz) Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 12.5 kHz offset, 6 kHz BW:

67 dB Tx Noise in Rx Band

-145 dBc/Hz 42 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Transmitter Specifications Intermodulation Attenuation (High-Power, 800 MHz) Intermodulation Attenuation (Mid-Power, 700/800 MHz) 55 dB 80 dB

*Full transmitter output power is available during battery revert. NOTICE: The output power reference plane is the output connector of the power amplifier. The loss of the transmitter output cable (PA output to back of base radio) is 4% at 800 MHz. However, the base radio software allows the transmitter output power to be set at 10% above rated value. Table 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D (700/800 MHz) Frequency Range Modulation Analog Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Receiver Specifications 792825 MHz C4FM, H-CPM, FM 12.5 kHz:

-118 dBm 25 kHz:

-117 dBm C4FM:

-118 dBm H-CPM:

-116 dBm C4FM:

-110 dBm Digital Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate Static

(BER) Faded Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate (BER) Intermodulation Rejection Digital Adjacent Channel Rejection Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (EIA603) Analog 12.5 kHz Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (TIA603D) 85 dB 60 dB 75 dB Analog 12.5 kHz:

50 or 60 dB (adjustable) Analog 25 kHz:

80 dB Spurious and Image Response Rejection 85 dB 100 dB with preselector Analog Audio Response Analog Audio Distortion Analog FM Hum and Noise

+1, -3 dB from 6 dB per octave de-emphasis;

3003000 Hz referenced to 1000 Hz at line out-

put 3% or 5% (adjustable) 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB 43 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Signal Displacement Bandwidth 1 kHz Intermediate Frequencies Receiver Specifications Electronic Bandwidth Blocking Immunity Conducted Spurious Bit Error Rate Floor 1st:

73.35 MHz 2nd:

2.16 MHz Full Bandwidth 100 dB

-57 dBm 0.01%

Table 6: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D (700/800 MHz) FCC Identification Frequency Range Type Power Output Type Acceptance Number 769775, 775776 MHz Transmitter 851870 MHz 851870 MHz 794825 MHz 851-870 MHz 769-775 MHz, 775-776 MHz Transmitter Receiver Transmitter Transmitter 2-100 W 2-100 W N/A 2-30W 2-30W Transmitter 15-150 W ABZ89FC5812B ABZ89FC5810B ABZ89FC5825B ABZ89FR5811B ABZ89FC5829 ABZ89FC5831 1.12.1.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Date

(700/800 MHz) Table 7: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (700/800 MHz) IC Approval Number Frequency Range Type Power Output 109AB-5810 B Tx 851869 MHz, Rx 806824 MHz LSM Variable 2-100 Watts

(average) IC Model Number T7039-800B 109AB-5810 B Tx 851869 MHz, Rx 806824 MHz C4FM, FM Variable 2-100 Watts T7039-800B 109AB-5812 B Tx 768776 MHz, Rx 798806 MHz LSM Variable 2-100 Watts

(average) T7039-700B 109AB-5812 B Tx 768776 MHz, Rx 798806 MHz 109AB-5825 B Tx 851869 MHz, Rx 806824 MHz 109AB-5829 Tx 851869 MHz, Rx 806824 MHz C4FM, FM Variable 2-100 Watts T7039-700B C4FM, FM Variable 15150 W T7039-8001 LSM Variable 2-30W 50B GTR8000-80 030W 44 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description IC Approval Number 109AB-5829 109AB-5831 109AB-5831 Frequency Range Type Power Output Tx 851869 MHz, Rx 806824 MHz Tx 768776 MHz, Rx 798 806MHz Tx 768776 MHz, Rx 798 806MHz C4FM, FM Variable 2-30W LSM Variable 2-30W C4FM, FM Variable 2-30W IC Model Number GTR8000-80 030W GTR8000-70 030W GTR8000-70 030W 1.12.2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R1 (380435 MHz) Table 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz) Model Number Number of Channels (trunked) Number of Channels (conventional) Size (H x W x D) Weight Temperature Range Operating Altitude General Specifications T7039A 1 16 21 kg (46 lbs) Operating:

-30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F) Storage:

-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) 133mm x 483mm x 457mm (5.25" x 19" x 18") Up to 1800 meters (5900 ft) above mean sea level Above 1800 meters (5900 ft), the derating is 1.5 C/km (0.8 F/1000 ft) Maximum operational altitude is 5000 meters

(16900 ft) AC: 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz DC: 43.2-60 VDC Power Requirements Power Consumption (Transmitting) AC:

DC:

C4FM, FM: 500 W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: 550 W max. C4FM, FM: 460 W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: 510 W max. AC:

DC:

110 W max. 75 W max. Power Consumption (Standby) Power Consumption (Standby with Power Effi-

ciency Package) 45 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description General Specifications AC:

DC:

70 W 35 W 12.5/25 kHz Switching Included 50 Ohms Channel Spacing Power Supply Type Battery Revert Input/Output Impedance Antenna Connector Types N female Tx:

Rx:

BNC female without preselector N female with preselector Frequency Stability Internal Reference (OCXO transceiver option card) Frequency Stability Internal Reference (TCXO transceiver option card) Frequency Stability External Reference Aging:

30 ppb/yr 100 ppb/5yr Temperature: 40 ppb Aging:

1000 ppb/yr Temperature: 500 ppb TRAK Frequency Generation Synthesized Table 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz) Transmitter Specifications 380435 MHz 2-110 W C4FM, FM 2-100 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-110 W C4FM, FM 3.5-182 W LSM, H-DQPSK Full Bandwidth C4FM, LSM, H-DQPSK, FM 5%

Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB Analog FM Hum and Noise 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB Less and 2% (1% typical) at 1000 Hz 8K70D1W, 8K70D1E, 8K70D1D, 8K10F1W, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 9K80D7W, 9K80D7E, Frequency Range Power Output*

Peak Envelope Power Electronic Bandwidth Modulation Modulation Fidelity Analog Audio Distortion Emissions Designators 46 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Transmitter Specifications 9K80D7D, 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 16K0F1D, 10K0F1D Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 12.5 kHz offset, 6 kHz BW:

67 dB Tx Noise in Rx Band Intermodulation Attenuation 142 dBc/Hz 65 dB

* Full transmitter output power is available during battery revert. NOTICE: The output power reference plane is the output connector of the power amplifier. The loss of the transmitter output cable (PA output to back of base radio) is 3% at 450 MHz. However, the base radio software allows the transmitter output power to be set at 10% above rated value. If more than 70 dB Intermodulation Attenuation is required at a site, an external circulator should be added to the transmitter output. Table 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz) Frequency Range Modulation Analog Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Receiver Specifications 380435 MHz C4FM, H-CPM, FM 12.5 kHz:

-118 dBm 25 kHz:

-117 dBm C4FM:

-118 dBm H-CPM:

-116 dBm C4FM:

-110 dBm Digital Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate Static

(BER) Faded Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate (BER) Intermodulation Rejection Digital Adjacent Channel Rejection Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (EIA603) Analog 12.5 kHz Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (TIA603D) 85 dB 60 dB 75 dB Spurious and Image Response Rejection 85 dB 100 dB with preselector Analog Audio Response Analog Audio Distortion Analog FM Hum and Noise Analog 12.5 kHz: 50 or 60 dB (adjustable) Analog 25 kHz: 80 dB

+1, -3 dB from 6 dB per octave de-emphasis;

3003000 Hz referenced to 1000 Hz at line out-

put 3% or 5% (adjustable) 47 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Signal Displacement Bandwidth 1 kHz Intermediate Frequencies Electronic Bandwidth Blocking Immunity Conducted Spurious Bit Error Rate Floor Receiver Specifications 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB 1st:

73.35 MHz 2nd:

2.16 MHz Full Bandwidth 100 dB

-57 dBm 0.01%

Table 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D UHF R1 (380435 MHz) Frequency Range Type Power Output FCC Identification 406.1435 MHz Transmitter 406.1435 MHz Transmitter 2-110 W C4FM, FM, LSM, H-

DQPSK 2-110 W C4FM, FM 2-100 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-33 W C4FM, FM 2-30 W LSM, H-DQPSK 406.1435 MHz Transmitter ABZ89FC4831 380435 MHz Receiver N/A ABZ89FR4822B Type Acceptance Number ABZ89FC4821C ABZ89FC4821B 1.12.2.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R1 (380435 MHz) Table 12: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (UHF R1 380435 MHz) IC Approval Number Frequency Range Type Power Output 109AB-4821C Tx 406.1430 MHz, Rx 406.1430 C4FM, FM, LSM, H-DQPSK Variable 2-100 Watts IC Model Num-

ber T7039-UHFR1C 109AB-4821B Tx 406.1430 MHz, Rx 406.1430 C4FM, FM T7039-UHFR1B 109AB-4821B Tx 406.1430 MHz, Rx 406.1430 LSM, H-DQPSK Variable 2-100 T7039-UHFR1B Variable 2-110 Watts Watts MHz MHz MHz 109AB-4831 Tx 406.1430 MHz, Rx 406.1430 MHz C4FM, FM Variable 2-33 Watts GTR8000-

UHF130W 109AB-4831 Tx 406.1430 MHz, Rx 406.1430 MHz LSM, H-DQPSK Variable 2-30 Watts GTR8000-

UHF130W 48 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description 1.12.3 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R2 (435524 MHz) Table 13: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz) Model Number Number of Channels (trunked) Number of Channels (conventional) Size (H x W x D) Weight Temperature Range Operating Altitude General Specifications T7039A 1 16 21 kg (46 lbs) Operating:

-30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F) Storage:

-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) 133mm x 483mm x 457mm (5.25" x 19" x 18") Up to 1800 meters (5900 ft) above mean sea level Above 1800 meters (5900 ft), the derating is 1.5 C/km (0.8 F/1000 ft) Maximum operational altitude is 5000 meters

(16900 ft) AC: 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz DC: 43.2-60 VDC AC:

DC:

C4FM, FM: 460 W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: 510 W max. C4FM, FM: 420 W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: 470 W max. Power Requirements Power Consumption (Transmitting) Power Consumption (GTR 8000 Base Radio Standby) Power Consumption (Standby with Power Effi-

ciency Package) Channel Spacing Power Supply Type Battery Revert Input/Output Impedance Antenna Connector Types AC:

DC:

110 W max. 75 W max. AC:

DC:

70 W 35 W 12.5/25 kHz Switching Included 50 Ohms 49 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description General Specifications N female Tx:

Rx:

BNC female without preselector N female with preselector Frequency Stability Internal Reference (OCXO transceiver option card) Frequency Stability Internal Reference (TCXO transceiver option card) Frequency Stability External Reference Aging:

30 ppb/yr 100 ppb/5yr Temperature: 40 ppb Aging:

1000 ppb/yr Temperature: 500 ppb TRAK Frequency Generation Synthesized Table 14: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz) Transmitter Specifications Frequency Range Power Output*

Peak Envelope Power Electronic Bandwidth Modulation Modulation Fidelity 435524 MHz 2-110 W C4FM, FM 2-100 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-110 W C4FM, FM 3.5-182 W LSM, H-DQPSK Full Bandwidth C4FM, LSM, H-DQPSK, FM 5%

Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB Analog FM Hum and Noise 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB Analog Audio Distortion Emissions Designators Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 12.5 kHz offset, 6 kHz BW:

67 dB Tx Noise in Rx Band Intermodulation Attenuation

-142 dBc/Hz 65 dB

*Full transmitter output power is available during battery revert. 50 Less than 2% (1% typical) at 1000 Hz 8K70D1W, 8K70D1E, 8K70D1D, 8K10F1W, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 9K80D7W, 9K80D7E, 9K80D7D, 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 16K0F1D, 10K0F1D MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description NOTICE: The output power reference plane is the output connector of the power amplifier. The loss of the transmitter output cable (PA output to back of base radio) 3% at 450 MHz. However, the base radio software allows the transmitter output power to be set at 10% above rated value. If more than 70 dB Intermodulation Attenuation is required at a site, an external circulator should be added to the transmitter output. Table 15: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz) Frequency Range Modulation Analog Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Receiver Specifications 435524 MHz C4FM, H-CPM, FM 12.5 kHz:

-118 dBm 25 kHz:

-117 dBm C4FM:

-118 dBm H-CPM:

-116 dBm C4FM:

-110 dBm Digital Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate Static

(BER) Faded Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate (BER) Intermodulation Rejection Digital Adjacent Channel Rejection Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (EIA603) Analog 12.5 kHz Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (TIA603D) 85 dB 60 dB 75 dB Analog 12.5 kHz:

50 or 60 dB (adjustable) Analog 25 kHz:

80 dB

+1, -3 dB from 6 dB per octave de-emphasis;

300-3000 Hz referenced to 1000 Hz at line out-

put 3% or 5% (adjustable) Analog Audio Response Analog Audio Distortion Analog FM Hum and Noise 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB Spurious and Image Response Rejection 85 dB 100 dB with preselector Signal Displacement Bandwidth 1 kHz Intermediate Frequencies Electronic Bandwidth Blocking Immunity 1st:

73.35 MHz 2nd:

2.16 MHz Full Bandwidth 100 dB 51 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Conducted Spurious Bit Error Rate Floor Receiver Specifications

-57 dBm 0.01%

FCC Identification Table 16: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D UHF R2 (435524 MHz) Frequency Range Type Power Output 435512 MHz Transmitter 435512 MHz Transmitter 435512 MHz Transmitter 2-110 W C4FM, FM, LSM, H-DQPSK 2-50 W C4FM, FM, LSM, H-

DQPSK 2-110 W C4FM, FM 2-100 W LSM, H-DQPSK Type Acceptance Num-

ber ABZ89FC4819C ABZ89FC4819C ABZ89FC4819B 435524 MHz Receiver N/A ABZ89FR4820B 1.12.3.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Data UHF R2 (435524 MHz) Table 17: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (UHF R2 435524 MHz) IC Approval Number 109AB-4819C Tx 406.1-430 MHz, RX 406.1-430 MHz Frequency Range Type Power Output 109AB-4819B Tx 450470 MHz, Rx 450470 MHz 109AB-4819B Tx 450470 MHz, Rx 450470 MHz LSM, H-

DQPSK C4FM, FM, LSM, H-

DQPSK C4FM, FM Variable 2-110 Watts Variable 2-110 Watts Variable 2-100 Watts IC Model Num-

ber T7039-UHFR2C T7039-UHFR2B T7039-UHFR2B 1.12.4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for Integrated Voice and Data VHF (136174 MHz) Table 18: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Specifications for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz) General Specifications Model Number Number of Channels (trunked) Number of Channels (conventional) T7039A 1 16 Size (H x W x D) 133mm x 483mm x 457mm (5.25" x 19" x 18") 52 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Weight Temperature Range Operating Altitude General Specifications 21 kg (46 lbs) Operating:

-30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F) Storage:

-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) Up to 1800 meters (5900 ft) above mean sea level Above 1800 meters (5900 ft), the derating is 1.5 C/km (0.8 F/1000 ft) Maximum operational altitude is 5000 meters

(16900 ft) AC: 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz DC: 43.2-60 VDC Power Requirements Power Consumption (Transmitting) Mid-Pow-

er Power Consumption (Transmitting) High-Pow-

er AC:

DC:

AC:

DC:

C4FM, FM: 500 W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: 410 W max. C4FM, FM: 460 W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: 360 W max. C4FM, FM: TBD W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: TBD W max. C4FM, FM: TBD W max. H-DQPSK, LSM: TBD W max. AC:

DC:

110 W max 75 W max 12.5/25 kHz Switching Included 50 Ohms N female Tx:

Rx:

BNC female without preselector N female with preselector Aging:

30 ppb/yr 100 ppb/5yr Temperature: 40 ppb 53 Power Consumption (Standby) Channel Spacing Power Supply Type Battery Revert Input/Output Impedance Antenna Connector Types Frequency Stability Internal Reference (transceiver option card) MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Frequency Stability External Reference General Specifications TRAK Frequency Generation Synthesized Table 19: GTR 8000 Base Radio Transmitter Specifications for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz) Transmitter Specifications Frequency Range Power Output* (Mid-Power) Power Output* (High-Power) Peak Envelope Power Peak Envelope Power (High-Power) Electronic Bandwidth Modulation Modulation Fidelity 136174 MHz 2-100 W C4FM, FM 2-60 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-100 W C4FM, FM 2-100 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-100 W C4FM, FM 3.5-110 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-100 W C4FM, FM 3.5-182 W LSM, H-DQPSK Full Bandwidth C4FM, LSM, H-DQPSK, FM 5%

Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB Analog FM Hum and Noise 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB Analog Audio Distortion Emissions Designators Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 12.5 kHz offset, 6 kHz BW:

67 dB Intermodulation Attenuation 55 dB

*Full transmitter output power is available during battery revert. Less than 2% (1% typical) at 1000 Hz 8K70D1W, 8K70D1E, 8K70D1D, 8K10F1W, 8K10F1E, 8K10F1D, 9K80D7W, 9K80D7E, 9K80D7D, 16K0F3E, 11K0F3E, 16K0F1D, 10K0F1D NOTICE: The output power reference plane is the output connector of the power amplifier. The loss of the transmitter output cable (PA output to back of base radio) 1% at 150 MHz. However, the base radio software allows the transmitter output power to be set at 10% above rated value. If more than 70 dB Intermodulation Attenuation is required at a site, an external circulator should be added to the transmitter output. 54 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Table 20: GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz) Frequency Range Modulation Analog Sensitivity (12 dB SINAD) Receiver Specifications 136174 MHz C4FM, H-CPM, FM Digital Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate Static

(BER) 12.5 kHz:

-119 dBm 25/30 kHz:

-118 dBm C4FM:

-119 dBm H-CPM:

-117 dBm C4FM:

-111 dBm Faded Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate (BER) Intermodulation Rejection Digital Adjacent Channel Rejection Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (EIA603) Analog 12.5 kHz Analog Adjacent Channel Rejection (TIA603D) 85 dB 60 dB 75 dB Analog 12.5 kHz:

50 or 60 dB (adjustable Analog 25 kHz:

80 dB Spurious and Image Response Rejection 90 dB 95 dB with preselector Analog Audio Response Analog Audio Distortion Analog FM Hum and Noise

+1, -3 dB from 6 dB per octave de-emphasis;

3003000 Hz referenced to 1000 Hz at line out-

put 3% or 5% (adjustable) 12.5 kHz:

45 dB 25 kHz:

50 dB Signal Displacement Bandwidth 1 kHz Intermediate Frequencies RF Input Connector with Optional Preselector N female 1st:

44.85 MHz 2nd:

2.16 MHz Full Bandwidth 100 dB

-57 dBm 0.01%

Electronic Bandwidth Blocking Immunity Conducted Spurious Bit Error Rate Floor 55 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Table 21: GTR 8000 Base Radio FCC Identification for IV&D VHF (136174 MHz) FCC Identification Frequency Range Type Power Output 136174 MHz Transmitter 136174 MHz Transmitter 2-100 W C4FM, FM 2-60 W LSM, H-DQPSK 2-100 W C4FM, FM, LSM, H-

DQPSK 136174 MHz Receiver N/A Type Acceptance Number ABZ89FC3790B ABZ89FC3799B ABZ89FR3791B 1.12.4.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for Integrated Voice and Data VHF

(136174 MHz) Table 22: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for IV&D (VHF 136174 MHz) IC Approval Number Frequency Range Type Power Output 109AB-3790B Tx 138174 MHz, Rx 138174 MHz C4FM, FM Variable 2100 Watts IC Model Number T7039-VHFB 109AB-3790B Tx 138174 MHz, Rx 138174 MHz LSM, H-DQPSK Variable 260 Watts T7039-VHFB 109AB-3799B Tx 138174 MHz, Rx 138174 MHz C4FM, FM, LSM, H-DQPSK Variable 2100 Watts T7039-

VHF100W 1.12.5 GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications for High Performance Data

(700/800 MHz) Table 23: General Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) General Specifications T7039A 1 21 kg (46 lbs) 133mm x 483mm x 457mm (5.25" x 19" x 18") Operating:

-30 to 60 C (-22 to 140 F) Storage:

-40 to 85 C (-40 to 185 F) Up to 1800 meters (6000 ft) above mean sea level AC: 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz DC: 43.2-60 VDC Model Number Number of Channels Size (H x W x D) Weight Temperature Range Operating Altitude Power Requirements 56 Power Consumption AC: 450 W MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Channel Spacing Modulation Power Supply Type Battery Revert Input/Output Impedance Antenna Connector Types General Specifications 64 QAM, 16 QAM, QPSK DC: 410 W 25 kHz Switching Included 50 Ohms Tx:

Rx:

N female BNC female Frequency Stability Frequency Generation External Reference (TRAK) Synthesized Table 24: Transmitter Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) Frequency Range Power Output*

Electronic Bandwidth Error Vector Magnitude Transmitter Specifications 769-775, 775-776, 851870 MHz 2-50 W Full Bandwidth 10%

Spurious and Harmonic Emissions Attenuation 90 dB Emissions Designators 17K7D7D Adjacent Channel Power Ratio 25 kHz offset, 18 kHz BW:

58 dB 37.5 kHz offset, 25 kHz BW:

65 dB Tx Noise in Rx Band Intermodulation Attenuation

-142 dBc/Hz 80 dB

* Full transmitter output power is available during battery revert. NOTICE: The output power reference plane is the output connector of the power amplifier. The loss of the transmitter output cable (PA output to back of base radio) is 4% at 800 MHz. However, the base radio software allows the transmitter output power to be set at 10% above rated value. Table 25: Receiver Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) Frequency Range 792825 MHz Receiver Specifications Digital Sensitivity 1% Bit Error Rate Static

(BER) 64 QAM:

-98 dBm 57 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description Faded Sensitivity 1% Bit Error Rate TU50

(BER) Faded Sensitivity 5% Bit Error Rate HT200

(BER) Faded Sensitivity 2% Bit Error Rate HT200

(BER) Faded Sensitivity 1% Bit Error Rate HT200

(BER) Receiver Specifications 16 QAM:

-104 dBm QPSK:

-111dBm 64 QAM:

-90 dBm 16 QAM:

-96 dBm QPSK:

-101 dBm 64 QAM:

-90 dBm 16 QAM:

-94 dBm QPSK:

-98 dBm Intermodulation Rejection*

Digital Adjacent Channel Rejection*

Spurious and Image Response Rejection*

Intermediate Frequencies 75 dB 50 dB 85 dB Electronic Bandwidth Blocking Immunity Conducted Spurious Bit Error Rate Floor Co-Channel Rejection QPSK

* Reference signal is QPSK 1st:

73.35 MHz 2nd:

2.16 MHz Full Bandwidth 90 dB

-57 dBm 0.01%

11 dB Table 26: FCC Identification for GTR 8000 Base Radio for HPD (700/800 MHz) FCC Identification Frequency Range Type Power Output Type Acceptance Number 769-775, 775-776 MHz Transmitter 2-50 W 851870 MHz 792825 MHz Transmitter 2-50 W Receiver N/A ABZ89FC5812B ABZ89FC5810B ABZ89FR5811B 58 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description 1.12.5.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for High Performance Data

(700/800 MHz) Table 27: GTR 8000 Base Radio Industry Canada for HPD (700/800 MHz) IC Approval Number Frequency Range Type Power Output 109AB-5810B Tx 851866 MHz, Rx 806821 MHz HPD 109AB-5812B Tx 768776 MHz, Rx 798806 MHz HPD Variable 2-50 Watts (aver-

age) Variable 2-50 Watts (aver-

age) IC Model Number T7039-800B T7039-700B 1.12.6 Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio Cabinet Table 28: General Specifications for GTR 8000 Base Radio Cabinet General Specifications Height Cabinet Version (Option CA02446AA):

Cabinet Version (Option CA02447AA):

31 in. (78.74 cm) 15 Rack Units 47 in. (119.4 cm) 24 Rack Units 24 in. x 24 in. (609.6 mm x 609.6 mm) Footprint (W x D) Weight (empty cabinet) Weight (with one base radio) Cabinet Version (Option CA02446AA):

Cabinet Version (Option CA02447AA):

77.6 lb (35.2 kg) 123 lb (55.8 kg) Cabinet Version (Option CA02446AA):

Cabinet Version (Option CA02447AA):

98.6 lb (44.72 kg) 144 lb (65.32 kg) Maximum Stack Quantity*

2 Maximum Stack Height Cabinet Version (Option CA02446AA):

Cabinet Version (Option CA02447AA):

62 in. (157.48 cm) 94 in. (238.76 cm) Temperature Range, Operating Cabinet without Doors:

-22 to 140 F (-30 to 60 C) Cabinet with Doors:

-22 to 131 F (-30 to 55 C) 59 MN003286A01-E Chapter 1: GTR 8000 Base Radio Description General Specifications Temperature Range, Storage

-40 to 185 F (-40 to 85 C) Maximum Recommended Ambient with # of Base Radios**

31 in. 15 RU Cabinet 47 in. 24 RU Cabinet 55 50 50 NR NR na na na 55 55 55 50 50 45 NR NR Operating Altitude Up to 1800 meters (5900 ft) above mean sea level Above 1800 meters (5900 ft), the derating is 1.5 C/km

(0.8 F/1000 feet) Maximum operational altitude is 5000 meters (16900 ft)

* = If different size cabinets are being stacked, place the larger cabinet on the bottom. Use a 9/16 in. hexagon head screw with washer and lock nut. The minimum bolt size must not be smaller than 1/2 in.

** = NR - Not recommended. Though the cabinet does have enough available space to accommodate this number of chassis, typically some peripherals, RFDS, networking, and other equipment may be colocated and occupy the remaining space. In addition, a few RUs of space for cable egress is recommended at the top of the cabinet so cables do not interfere with the airflow from the equipment. If adding more equipment than shown, validate that the internal cabinet temperature does not exceed the rating of any installed devices. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 60 MN003286A01-E GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Chapter 2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation For an understanding of the GTR 8000 Base Radio components, review the modules that provide the base radio functionality, the modules that provide RF distribution functionality (RFDS), and the backplane that connects to other modules within the site. This chapter explains how the GTR 8000 Base Radio works in the context of your system. 2.1 Functions of the GTR 8000 Base Radio Modules The following lists GTR 8000 Base Radio modules:

Transceiver (XCVR) module (with or without a transceiver option card) Power amplifier module Fan module Power supply module 2.1.1 Function of the Transceiver Module The transceiver module provides the control, exciter, receiver, and optional transceiver option card for the base radio. Figure 5: Transceiver Module (Front View) The transceiver generates the station reference, which typically must be locked on to one of many possible external sources. The external source can be either the site controller TDM clocks or the external reference operating at 5 MHz or 10 MHz. The transceiver SPI bus allows communication with its receiver and exciter circuitry, as well as the power supply module and power amplifier module. Two or three circuit boards in the transceiver are:

Transceiver Control Board Performs the control management, digital signal processing, and transmit and receive data formatting for the base radio. Transceiver RF Board Contains DC power conversion/regulation and performs receiver and exciter functions. 61 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Transceiver Option Card An optional board that attaches to the control board. Provides an internal 10 MHz frequency reference. For conventional operation, it also provides the analog interfaces and WildCard I/Os. The transceiver option card requires an internal frequency reference oscillator alignment at different intervals mandated by its category and frequency band. See Base Radio Service Help > Service Screens > Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures and mandated intervals. The transceiver option card is available in two categories:

OCXO (Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator) operates at 0.1 ppm and is inclusive to temperature and aging. The OCXO Transceiver Option Card is available in 700/800 MHz, UHF R1/R2, and VHF frequency bands. TCXO (Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator) operates at 1.5 ppm, of which 0.5 ppm is allocated to temperature, and 1.0 ppm is allocated to aging. Reference precision with the TCXO is traded for lower power consumption. The TCXO mandates shorter maintenance intervals. The TCXO transceiver option card is available in UHF R1/R2 frequency bands. The TXCO is only available for non-simulcast conventional systems. 2.1.1.1 Transceiver Control Board The main operating software for the base radio is loaded in the XCVRs control section. As the main manager for the base radio, the XCVR control board provides operational control over the other station modules. It handles three types of information flow, in the following ways:

Serves as a gateway between the network and RF functionality, by distributing the RF payload to and from the network. Supports operational and diagnostic functions with digital control data (for example: site information, channel assignments, and identification numbers for call processing). Ensures the flow of other network management configuration information. Figure 6: Transceiver Control Board Information Flow on page 62 shows the information flow through the transceiver control and RF sections for trunked and conventional operation. Figure 6: Transceiver Control Board Information Flow 2.1.1.2 Transceiver RF Board In addition to DC power conversion/regulation, the XCVR RF board provides circuitry for the following exciter and receiver functions. 62 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.1.1.2.1 Exciter 2.1.1.2.2 Receiver The exciter on the XCVR RF board provides the transmitter functions for the base radio. The exciter circuitry generates a low-level, modulated RF signal that passes to the power amplifier. It supports various modulation types as well as bandwidths up to 25 kHz, through software programming. The exciter also provides a controlled output power level to the power amplifier. The receiver provides either single receiver input or dual (HPD or TDMA) receiver inputs for dual diversity. The receiver also provides enhanced diagnostic capabilities using an on board noise source generator. It includes a wide tuning range (electronic varactor-tuned) preselector. The preselector is electronically tuned to the desired receive frequency anywhere between 792825 MHz, UHF R1 380 435 MHz, UHF R2 435524 MHz, or VHF 136174 MHz. 2.1.1.3 Transceiver External Interfaces The transceiver external interfaces include seven external ports, a switch, and LEDs. If a transceiver option card is part of the transceiver, there are four additional external ports. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Front Connections on page 110 for the port connections. See GTR 8000 Base Radio LEDs on page 264 for information on the LEDs. 2.1.1.3.1 Transceiver Switch The multifunction RESET switch on the front of the transceiver module is accessible through the drop-

down door to the left of the fans. The RESET switch has two functions:

Figure 7: Transceiver RESET Switch (viewable through the drop-down door) Table 29: Transceiver Front RESET Switch Functions User Action Result Press switch for less than 1 second Toggles between Tx Inhibit and Tx Enable (LED 3 blinks amber) Press switch for more than 3 seconds, then re-

lease Transceiver Control Module Reset 63 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.1.1.3.2 Transceiver Option Card Intercom Button The intercom button on the front of the transceiver option card is accessible behind the fan module. Pressing the intercom button toggles the intercom function between the ON and OFF states. Figure 8: Transceiver Option Card Intercom Button (behind the fan module) 2.1.1.3.3 Transceiver Ports (Rear) The transceiver interconnects to the backplane using a 120-pin HVDML digital connector and 8-pack RF connector, as shown in the figure. These connections handle multiple signals including power supply communications, power amplifier communications, fan interface, and peripheral interface. The digital connection receive alarm data and the site controller Time Division Multiplexer (TDM) signals are used to pass reference and control data to the base radio. Figure 9: Transceiver Module (Backplane Connections) Single Receiver Input Dual Receiver Input An RJ-45 Ethernet port on the backplane is cabled to a site LAN switch for this channel. The backplane also provides an RF connection to the transceiver for receive (Rx) path A. RJ-45 Ethernet ports on the backplane are cabled to corresponding ports on the site controller backplanes (HPD). The backplane also provides RF connections to the transceiver for receive (Rx) paths A and B (HPD and TDMA). 2.1.2 Function of the Power Amplifier Module The power amplifier (PA) is a forced convection-cooled RF power amplifier. It accepts a low-level modulated RF signal from the transceiver module, and amplifies it for transmission through the site transmit antenna. Also, to complete the Cartesian correction loop (linearization method), it provides a low-level RF feedback signal to the transceiver module to achieve the required transmitter linearity. Transmit power output can be set using Configuration/Service Software (CSS). See Configuring Tx Power Values and Battery Type on page 153. 64 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation The power amplifier also performs functions related to the fan module, including reporting of the fan module status and supplying power to the fan power bus. Figure 10: Power Amplifier Module The power amplifier is comprised of six internal modules:

Core Board Converter Board Driver Amplifier Board Final Amplifier Board Distribution Board Output Circuitry 2.1.2.1 Power Amplifier Input/Output Connections There are three electrical connection assemblies on the power amplifier:

RF output (front QN "quick-N" connector) on the front of the power amplifier module NOTICE: This is cabled to the N-type female bulkhead connection at the rear of the base radio housing. DC power supply/control signal (backplane connection) RF input/feedback (backplane connection). 65 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 11: Power Amplifier (Backplane Connections) 2.1.3 Function of the Fan Module The fan module provides intermittent forced-air cooling for the power amplifier and transceiver modules. The fan module houses two 119 mm axial fans which deliver a total of approximately 160 cubic feet per minute of airflow. Nominal fan speed is 4100 revolutions per minute. A thermostat behind the fan module controls each fan. If the fan speed for either fan falls below 30% of the rated speed, a built-in speed sensor on each fan turns on the red Fan Alarm LED. If the fan module is used for the Power Efficiency Package, the following must be configured in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) to take full advantage of the Power Efficiency Package:

Optional fan holdover time (length of time the fan stays ON after transmission). Disabling one of the fans within the fan module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 for instructions on how to disable one of the fans. Configuring the base radios Tx Power Out in the CSS should be limited to 50 W. The fan module connects to the backplane through a 4-pin port on the front of the chassis. NOTICE: The power supply module has its own fan which provides independent airflow. Figure 12: Fan Module 66 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.1.4 Function of the Power Supply The power supply, with front-to-rear airflow, operates from either an AC or DC input and provides the DC operating voltage for the base radio. However the power supply prioritizes an AC source (if present) over a DC source. Figure 13: Power Supply NOTICE: If the power supply module is used for the Power Efficiency Package, the power supply must be used in DC mode to obtain the 35 W standby power consumption performance. When operating from an AC source (90 to 264 VAC, 47-63 Hz), the supply generates two DC output voltages of 29 V with respect to output ground. The power supply automatically adjusts to AC input ranges and supplies a steady output. In AC mode, the power supply may provide a separate battery charger which can be used to maintain the charge on a 48 VDC nominal system, positive or negative ground, if installed. The supply generates two DC output voltages of 29 V with respect to output ground, when operating from a DC source (43.2 VDC to 60 VDC maximum), positive or negative ground. This voltage limit includes consideration of the battery charging "float voltage" associated with the intended supply system, regardless of the marked power rating of the equipment. Whether in AC, Battery Revert, or DC Only mode, at a voltage of 42 V or lower, the power supply shuts down to not damage any connected battery bank. Once this condition occurs, the power supply starts only after the applied voltage exceeds 45 V. The battery charger is not usable when operating from a DC input power source. This DC source must be located in the same building as the base radio, and it must meet the requirements of a SELV circuit. The power supply contains several switching-type power supply circuits as follows:

Power factor correction circuitry Battery charging circuitry Diagnostics and monitoring circuitry The power supply controls its own continuously running fan, changing its speed to fast, or slow as needed. 67 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation NOTICE: If the power supply module is used for the Power Efficiency Package, the power supply fan does not run below a 40 C air inlet temperature in DC mode with the transmitter in a de-keyed state. 2.1.4.1 AC/DC Power Distribution Base Radio Figure 14: AC and DC Power Distribution in the GTR 8000 Base Radio If present, the base radio operates from AC power as the preferred power source. When AC power is not available, the base radio switches to operate from the DC source. Operation returns to the AC source when the AC source is restored. Switchover from AC to DC and back again is fully automatic. The Main DC output of the power supply is used to provide power to the power amplifier and the transceiver. The Auxiliary output of the power supply is not used within the base radio, but is reserved for use as a redundant power input to other site components such as the site controller. 2.1.4.2 Power Supply Battery Charger The power supply may include an integrated battery charger. The battery charger is controlled through software residing on the associated device module. Software contains the information on supported battery types and obtains user-specific information pertaining to the particular site. The device software receives battery bus voltage and battery temperature information from the power supply, and uses these variables with supported battery charging profiles to return a signal which sets the charger output voltage appropriately. The battery charge and temperature conditions are viewed through 68 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Configuration/Service Software (CSS) and Unified Network Configurator (UNC), or through alarms to Unified Event Manager (UEM). The maximum charging current available from the integrated charger is 3 A (48 VDC nominal system). A battery with capacity no larger than 60 Ah should be connected to a single charger to ensure that the charger maintains an adequate state-of-charge on the backup battery, and the backup battery is restored to full capacity within a reasonable amount of time following operation on battery backup power. In addition to standard sealed lead-acid batteries (valve-regulated lead acid or gel cells), the power supply supports charging of vented lead-acid and NiCd batteries. 2.1.4.3 Battery Temperature Sensor Cable The integrated charger in the power supply performs temperature compensated battery charging when a temperature sensor is connected. If the sensor is disconnected, the charger continues to operate as an uncompensated charger with the charging profile following the minimum charger voltage specified by the battery manufacturer. Included is a 40 ft battery temperature sensor cable, which attaches to a battery pack, supplied by your organization, and to the backplane of the device. This three-wire cable carries a voltage signal to the power supply from the sensor element, which must be mounted close to the storage battery. Voltage is proportional to the battery temperature, and the diagnostic circuitry in the power supply module. This cable is extended to a total length of 190 ft using 50 ft extensions. See Battery Temperature Sensor Mounting on page 103. IMPORTANT: Continuous operation with a disconnected sensor is not recommended. 2.1.4.4 ON/OFF Switch for Power Supply and Battery Charger This table identifies the switch states for the power supply and battery charger. Table 30: ON/OFF Switch - States for Power Supply and Battery Charger Switch Position Power Supply State Battery Charger State ON (1) DLN6781A can be started if desired (AC input only) DLN6805A Disabled OFF (0) Disabled (AC input only) Power Factor Correction

(PFC) section is active (AC input only) Main DC converter runs to create the MAIN and AUX DC outputs Main DC converter is turned OFF and the MAIN and AUX DC outputs become 0.0 VDC 69 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.1.4.5 Power Supply Module Backplane Connections This table provides descriptions and functions of the power supply backplane connections. Table 31: Power Supply Module Backplane Connections Description Port/Type AC Battery / DC Power and Control Sig-

nal Input only 48 VDC:

29 VDC:

Provides the DC input to the power supply when operating from a DC source. Connects the charger output to the standby battery when operating from an AC input with a standby DC battery. Provides the Main and Auxiliary DC outputs of the power supply for use by the power amplifier, transceiver, and site controller. Other signals this connector handles include control interface and battery tempera-

ture interface. Figure 15: Power Supply Connections (Rear) 2.2 Backplanes and Card Cages Card cages are created with a welded and riveted design. Each card cage has a backplane. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (Integrated Voice and Data) on page 105 and GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (HPD) on page 108. 70 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.3 RFDS Modules The Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) equipment included in your system depends on which options were purchased from Motorola Solutions. The following are some examples of the RFDS equipment available for your system. NOTICE: If the RTTE option was selected, a duplexer is required for applicable applications. 2.3.1 RFDS Preselector (700/800 MHz) The preselector provides a first level of band pass filtering for inbound RF signals. RF input and output connectors are cabled to the RF Output RX-A. This filter must be included to fulfill TIA102-CAAB Class A spurious response rejection (90 dB). The filter is not required when using a receiver multicoupler system. This filter CANNOT be retuned in the field. Figure 16: Preselector Filter (700/800 MHz) 2.3.2 RFDS Preselector (UHF) The preselector rejects unwanted signals including the transmitter signals from overloading the receiver. This filter must be included to fulfill TIA102-CAAB Class A spurious response rejection (90 dB). The filter is not required when using a receiver multicoupler system. This filter can be retuned in the field. 71 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 17: Preselector (UHF) 2.3.3 RFDS Preselector (VHF) The preselector rejects unwanted signals including the transmitter signals from overloading the receiver. This filter must be included to fulfill TIA102-CAAB Class A spurious response rejection (90 dB). The filter is not required when using a receiver multicoupler system. This filter can be retuned in the field. Figure 18: Preselector (VHF) 2.3.4 RFDS - Transmit Filter (700/800 MHz) The transmit filter removes any noise in the receive sub-band. The Tx Output from the GTR 8000 Base Radio connects to the Transmit Filters Tx In. The Transmit Filters Tx Out connects the Tx Output or any other RFDS equipment. 72 Figure 19: Transmit Filter (700/800 MHz) MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.3.5 RFDS - Duplexer (700/800 MHz) This optional filter provides the capability to use a single antenna for both transmitter and receiver. Only one transmitter and receiver can be combined. Figure 20: Duplexer (700/800 MHz) 2.3.6 RFDS - Duplexer (UHF) This optional filter provides the capability to use a single antenna for both transmitter and receiver. Only one transmitter and receiver can be combined. 73 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 21: Duplexer (UHF) 2.3.7 RFDS - Duplexer (VHF) Figure 22: Duplexer (VHF) This optional filter provides the capability to use a single antenna for both transmit and receiver. Only one transmitter and receiver can be combined. 74 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.3.8 RFDS - External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz) An option for the GTR 8000 Base Radio is an External Dual Circulator module which isolates the base radio from the antenna, thus preventing the transmitter from generating intermodulation. The circulator load dissipates reflected power. It includes a cable that connects to the RF Peripherals port on the base radio backplane to provide temperature monitoring. Figure 23: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz) 2.3.9 RFDS - External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF) An option for the GTR 8000 Base Radio is an External Dual Circulator module which isolates the base radio from the antenna, thus preventing the transmitter from generating intermodulation. The circulator load dissipates reflected power. It includes a cable that connects to the RF Peripherals port on the base radio backplane to provide temperature monitoring. 75 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 24: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF) 2.3.10 RFDS - External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (VHF) An option for the GTR 8000 Base Radio is an External Dual Circulator module which isolates the base radio from the antenna, thus preventing the transmitter from generating intermodulation. The circulator load dissipates reflected power. It includes a cable that connects to the RF Peripherals port on the base radio backplane to provide temperature monitoring. 2.3.11 Antenna Relay Module The antenna relay module allows a single antenna to be used for both transmit and receive functions on a conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio. A signal from the base radio transceiver module controls the antenna relay module. The antenna relay module is typically mounted on the backplane cover on the rear of the base radio, or on the peripheral tray if the base radio is equipped with other options. Figure 25: Antenna Relay Module Connections on page 77 shows the antenna relay module input and output external connections. Settings for the antenna relay module are made through Configuration/Service Software (CSS) and UNC. NOTICE: If the antenna relay is Enabled and it is then disconnected, a failure is generated and logged stating the antenna relay is disconnected. However, the base radio also generates an exciter failure because the antenna relay is controlled and monitored through the exciter module. The exciter failure should be ignored until after the antenna relay failure is corrected. The failures are reported in the Status Report and UEM. 76 Figure 25: Antenna Relay Module Connections MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.3.11.1 Mounting Locations The antenna relay module may be installed in either of two locations. On base radios not equipped with the peripheral tray, the antenna relay is mounted on the backplane cover. Figure 26: Base Radio Backplane Mounting Location 77 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 27: Antenna Relay Module Mounted on Backplane Cover On base radios equipped with the peripheral tray, the antenna relay is mounted on the peripheral tray. 78 Figure 28: Antenna Relay Module Mounted on Peripheral Tray MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation 2.3.11.2 Functional Operation The antenna relay module contains a relay with a set of normally open and normally closed contacts. A signal from the transceiver module controls the relay coil connected to the Receiver input port RX-A or the PA deck to a single transmit/receive antenna. NOTICE: With the relay de-energized, the antenna is connected to the Receiver input port RX-

A. To connect the antenna to the PA deck, the transceiver module must energize the relay. 79 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 29: Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Antenna Relay Module (Bracket Mounting) 80 MN003286A01-E Chapter 2: GTR 8000 Base Radio Theory of Operation Figure 30: Functional Block and Interconnect Diagram for Antenna Relay Module (Peripheral Tray Mounting) 81 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Chapter 3 GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation This chapter details installation procedures relating to GTR 8000 Base Radio. Follow this process to perform the installation tasks. Ensure that you have the following:

Access to Software Download Manager (SWDL), Configuration/Service Software (CSS), and the 3.1 Pre-Installation Tasks Appropriate cables Unified Network Configurator (UNC) IP/DNS information Login and password information 3.1.1 Equipment Installation Process Overview Process:

1 Prepare the site to comply with the Motorola Solutions requirements and specifications for the equipment, as listed in the Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual. The base radio may be installed in a suitable, restricted access, indoor enclosure in any location suitable for electronic communications equipment. Other codes and guidelines that may apply to the location must also be met. See General Safety Precautions on page 83. 2 Inspect and inventory all racks, cabinets, cables, and other equipment with a Motorola Solutions representative to ensure that the order is complete. See General Installation Standards and Guidelines on page 86. 3 Various tools are used to install and service the equipment. If information is needed regarding where to obtain any of the equipment and tools listed, contact the Motorola Solution Support Center (SSC). See General Installation/Troubleshooting Tools on page 92 for a list of general recommended tools for installing and servicing the hardware. 4 Install all equipment using the site drawings and other documents provided by the Field Engineer. Use the installation standards and guidelines for placing and installing equipment. 5 Properly ground all the racks and cabinets to protect against ground faults, electrical surges, and lightning. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Hardware Installation on page 94. 6 Connect all necessary cables within a rack and between the racks for system interconnection. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (Integrated Voice and Data) on page 105, GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (HPD) on page 108, and GTR 8000 Base Radio Front Connections on page 110. 7 Run a preliminary check of a site before applying power. 8 See Installing Device Software Prerequisites on page 121 for a list of items you need access to before installing the software. software images from the UNC. 9 See Installing Devices in the UNC on page 124 to discover the base radio and to load OS 82 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 10 See Device Configuration in CSS on page 134 to program the configurations into the base radio using CSS. 11 See Configuring Centralized Authentication on Devices in VoyenceControl on page 154 to program the base radio using UNC. 3.2 General Safety Precautions WARNING: Compliance with FCC guidelines for human exposure to Electromagnetic Energy

(EME) at Transmitter Antenna sites generally requires that personnel working at a site must be aware of the potential for exposure to EME, and can exercise control of exposure by appropriate means, such as adhering to warning sign instructions, using standard operating procedures (work practices), wearing personal protective equipment, or limiting the duration of exposure. For more details and specific guidelines, see Appendix A of the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites manual. Installation guidelines for compliance with RF exposure regulations This equipment must be installed and operated at a fixed location, in compliance with all applicable code requirements. The antenna installation must comply with all applicable building and safety codes. In order to ensure optimal communication performance and compliance with applicable RF exposure limits, it is recommended that the antenna is installed outside the building hosting this equipment, on the roof or on a tower if at all possible. It is the licensee or site owner responsibility to establish an RF exposure safety program meeting the applicable regulatory requirements concerning RF exposure of working personnel and the general public, implementing actions such as site survey measurements and computational analysis, signage and barriers, site access restrictions, as needed. General safety precautions during all phases of operation, service, and repair Observe the following general safety precautions during all phases of operation, service, and repair of the equipment described in this manual. Follow the safety precautions listed and all other warnings and cautions necessary for the safe operation of all equipment. See the appropriate section of the product service manual for additional pertinent safety information. Due to the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modifications of equipment. NOTICE: The installation process requires preparation and knowledge of the site before installation begins. Review installation procedures and precautions in the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites manual before performing any site or component installation. Always follow all applicable safety procedures, such as Occupational Safety and Health Administration

(OSHA) requirements, National Electrical Code (NEC) requirements, local code requirements, and safe working practices. Also, all personnel must practice good judgment. General safety precautions include the following:

Read and follow all warning notices and instructions marked on the product or included in this manual before installing, servicing, or operating the equipment. Retain these safety instructions for future reference. If troubleshooting the equipment while power is on, be aware of the live circuits. Do not operate the radio transmitters unless all RF connectors are secure and all connectors are properly terminated. Ground all equipment properly in accordance with the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites manual and specified installation instructions for safe operation. Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation. Do not block or cover openings that protect the devices from overheating. 83 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Only a qualified technician familiar with similar electronic equipment should service equipment. Some equipment components can become hot during operation. Turn off all power to the equipment and wait until sufficiently cool before touching. Maintain emergency first aid kits at the site. Direct personnel to call in with their travel routes to help ensure their safety while traveling between remote sites. Institute a communications routine during certain higher risk procedures where the on-site technician continually updates management or safety personnel of the progress so that help can be dispatched if needed. Never store combustible materials in or near equipment racks. The combination of combustible material, heat, and electrical energy increases the risk of a fire safety hazard. Equipment installed at the site meeting the requirements of a "restricted access location," per UL60950-1, is defined as follows: "Access can only be gained by service persons or by a user who has been warned about the possible burn hazard on equipment metal housing. Access to the equipment is by using a tool or lock and key, or other means of security, and is controlled by the authority responsible for the location."

WARNING: Burn hazard. The metal housing of the product may become extremely hot. Use caution when working around the equipment. Figure 31: Warning Label on Hot Modules WARNING: DC input voltage must be no higher than 60 VDC. This maximum voltage includes consideration of the battery charging "float voltage" associated with the intended supply system, regardless of the marked power rating of the equipment. Failure to follow this guideline may result in electric shock. RF energy burn hazard: disconnect power in the cabinet to prevent injury while disconnecting and connecting antennas. CAUTION: All Tx and Rx RF cables outer shields must be grounded per Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites manual requirements. All Tx and Rx RF cables must be connected to a surge protection device according to the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communications Sites manual. Do not connect Tx and Rx RF cables directly to an outside antenna. IMPORTANT: All equipment must be serviced by Motorola Solutions-trained personnel. 3.2.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Supplemental Safety Installation Requirements The Supplemental Safety and Installation Requirements include the following:

The GTR 8000 Base Radio must be installed in a suitable, in-building enclosure. A restricted access location is required when installing this equipment into the end system. The base radio contains a Class 1 built-in power supply component. This component is equipped with an appliance inlet for connecting to an AC input, as well as DC input terminals which meet SELV DC circuit requirements. 84 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation When installing the equipment, all requirements of relevant standards and local electrical codes must be fulfilled. The maximum operating ambient temperature of this equipment is 60 C. The maximum operating altitude is 3000 meters above sea level. The 28.6 VDC output from the power supply to the PA is at an energy hazard level (exceeds 240 VA). When installing into the end system, care must be taken so as not to touch the output wires. When the base radio is used in a DC reverting system, the DC power supply must be located in the same building as the base radio, and it must meet the requirements of a SELV circuit. 3.2.2 DC Mains Grounding Connections CAUTION: This equipment is designed to permit the connection of the grounding conductor of the DC supply circuit to the grounding conductor at the equipment. If this connection is made, you must meet all following conditions:

Connect this equipment directly to the DC supply system grounding conductor or to a bonding jumper from a grounding terminal bar or bus in which the DC supply system grounding electrode conductor is connected. Locate this equipment in the same immediate area (such as adjacent cabinets) as any other equipment that has a connection between the grounded conductor of the same DC supply circuit and the grounding conductor (and also the point of grounding of the DC system). Do not ground the DC system elsewhere. Locate the DC supply source within the same premises as the equipment. Do not install switching or disconnecting devices in the grounded circuit conductor between the DC source and the point of connection of the grounding conductor. 3.2.2.1 Disconnect Device Permanently Connected Incorporate a readily accessible disconnect device (circuit breaker or switch) in the building installation wiring. 3.2.2.2 Multiple Power Sources This product has multiple power sources. If service requires the removal of a power source, disconnect all inputs (AC and DC power) to remove power completely from the equipment before servicing. 3.2.2.3 Connection to Primary Power For supply connections, use wires rated for at least 75C (167F). 3.2.2.4 Replaceable Batteries WARNING: Risk of explosion if you replace a battery with an incorrect type. Dispose of used batteries according to the instructions. 85 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.2.3 Maintenance Requiring Two People Identify maintenance actions that require two people to perform the repair. Two people are required when:

A repair involves the risk of injury that would require one person to perform first aid or call for emergency support. An example is work around high-voltage sources. If an accident occurs to one person, another person may be required to remove power and call for emergency aid. Heavy lifting is involved. Use the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH) lifting equation to determine whether one or two persons are required to lift a system component when it must be removed and replaced in its rack. 3.2.4 Equipment Racks Lift equipment racks without the use of lifting equipment only when sufficient personnel are available to ensure that regulations covering health and safety are not breached. Use an appropriately powered mechanical lifting apparatus for moving and lifting the equipment racks. In addition, comply with any local regulations that govern the use of lifting equipment. For installation of the cabinet version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio, see Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio on page 94. WARNING: Crush Hazard could result in death, personal injury, or equipment damage. Equipment racks can weigh up to 360 kg (800 lb). See the following instructions for proper lifting procedures. 3.3 General Installation Standards and Guidelines This section provides guidelines to ensure a quality installation. Review these guidelines before unpacking and installing the system. Additionally, review the installation information in the Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for more details, including:

Equipment installation Antenna installation Review installation information specifically for GTR 8000 Base Radios and subsystems in GTR 8000 Base Radio Hardware Installation on page 94. 3.3.1 General Site Preparation Overview Perform the activities listed in this table to ensure proper site preparation. The table references specific chapters in the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for more information. Table 32: Activities for Site Preparation Activity Description of Activity Chapter Reference Review the site plan. Prevents potential on-site and Chapter 2 "Site Design and De-

off-site interference by local trunked systems. velopment"

86 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Activity Description of Activity Chapter Reference Minimizes cable lengths. Determines the location of tele-

com equipment. Determine site access and security. Outlines of site access and securi-

ty measures. Chapter 2 "Site Design and De-

velopment"

Review safety consid-

erations. Schedule installation of telephone service. Review grounding specifications. Outlines general, installation, and environmental safety guidelines and requirements and OSHA-relat-

ed considerations. Ensures options and functions of on-site, two-way communications for personnel safety and mainte-

nance. Ensures that the site meets or ex-

ceeds the Quality Audit Checklist in Appendix F as well as the Power and Grounding Checklist in Appen-

dix D. Chapter 3 "Communications Site Building Design and Instal-

lation"

Chapter 3 "Communications Site Building Design and Instal-

lation"

Appendix D. Grounding (Earth-

ing) Electrode System Testing/

Verification Appendix F. R56 Compliance Schedule installation of site power. Covers grounding, power sources, and surge protection. Chapter 4 "External Grounding Checklist

(Earthing)"

(Earthing)"

Chapter 5 "Internal Grounding Chapter 6 "Power Sources"

Chapter 7 "Surge Protective Devices"

3.3.2 General Equipment Inspection and Inventory Recommendations Take an inventory of all equipment with a Motorola Solutions representative to ensure that the order is complete. Carefully inspect all equipment and accessories to verify that they are in good condition. Promptly report any damaged or missing items to a Motorola Solutions representative. CAUTION: Do not tamper with factory configuration settings for these devices. These settings include software configuration, firmware release, password, and physical connections. Motorola Solutions has configured and connected these devices to meet specific performance requirements. Tampering with these devices may result in unpredictable system performance or catastrophic failure. 3.3.3 General Placement and Spacing Recommendations When placing equipment at a site, perform the following:

Place each rack on a firm, level, and stable surface, and bolt the racks together. Use correct mounting hardware and shims to prevent rack movement. 87 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Use strain relief when installing and positioning cables and cords to help ensure that no interruption of service occurs. and safe access to equipment. Provide an appropriate amount of space around all components to allow for proper air flow, cooling, Locate the site racks and other equipment with enough spacing to allow access for service. NOTICE: Proper spacing of equipment is essential for ease of maintenance and safety of personnel. Spacing requirements have been established to meet the National Fire Protection Associations (NFPA) code, and the American Society of Heating, Refrigerating, and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) standards. Adhere to any local regulations that apply to the installation. Locate the system in an area free of dust, smoke, and electrostatic discharge (ESD). See the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for details on these space requirements. 3.3.4 General Cabinet Bracing Recommendations Use all supplied bracing hardware when installing a rack or cabinet, and secure all equipment within a rack or cabinet. If additional equipment is installed, see the system design document the field engineer provided, or consult the Motorola Solutions Field Representative. Subsystem cabinets are self-supporting structures. In areas subject to seismic activity, additional bracing of the cabinet may be required to prevent it from tipping. However, the bracing hardware must be locally procured. No specific procedures are provided within this manual for bracing cabinets in active seismic areas. See the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for details on seismic conditions. 3.3.5 Mounting Cabinets or Racks to a Floor When and where to use: Perform the following steps to properly install a cabinet or open rack within a site building. Secure the cabinets and racks to the floor for optimum stability. This procedure is written so that the cabinet or rack is moved only once. Procedure:

footprint. 1 Carefully mark the mounting holes with a pencil, as indicated on the appropriate cabinet or rack 2 Drill the marked mounting holes to the appropriate depth of the mounting hardware with a hammer drill and bit. 3 Insert an anchor into the drilled hole. If necessary, tap the anchor into place using a hammer. 4 For cabinets, remove the four screws securing the bottom kick panel to the front and back of the cabinet. Remove the kick panel and set aside during installation. 5 Carefully move the cabinet or rack into the position indicated by the holes in the floor. WARNING: Equipment cabinets and racks are heavy and may tip. Use extreme caution when moving. Lift from top eyenuts with the appropriate apparatus, or secure the cabinet or rack from tipping if lifting from the bottom. Failure to do so could result in death or serious injury or equipment damage. 6 Adjust and level the cabinet or rack as necessary to position the cabinet mounting holes with the pre-drilled holes. 88 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 7 Secure the cabinet or rack to the site floor with the locally procured mounting hardware. IMPORTANT: If securing the cabinet or rack to a concrete floor, use 1/2-inch grade 8 bolts with anchors. 3.3.6 General Bonding and Grounding Requirements Cabinets and racks include a Rack Grounding Bar (RGB) with the capacity to terminate numerous ground wires. Attach equipment added to the cabinet or rack to the ground bar using solid or stranded 6 AWG copper wire. The RGB uses dual-hole lugs to terminate ground wires. The minimum number of dual-hole attachments is system-dependent and specified by the customer. This bar provides electrical continuity between all bonds and ground wire with a current-carrying capacity equal to or exceeding that of a 6 AWG copper wire. See the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for more information on proper bonding and ground at a site. 3.3.7 General Cabling Requirements Diagrams for cabling are typically included in the system-specific configuration documentation Motorola Solutions provides. Also see the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for cabling standards. IMPORTANT: System certification was completed using shielded cables. To prevent emission problems, use only shielded cables. Do not substitute other cable types. Position the equipment to avoid excessive tension on cables and connectors. Cables must be loose with absolutely no stress on the connectors. Careful cable routing and securing the cables with tie wraps (or other devices) is one way to provide this protection. Set up preventive maintenance loops. Dress the cables neatly using cable ties. Do not tighten the cable ties until you are sure that the required service length and bend radius requirements are met. Leave cable ties loose enough to allow adjustment. Verify that all cables are properly labeled to match System-specific configuration documentation Motorola Solutions provided. Ensure that cables do not exceed the minimum bend radius as outlined in the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual. CAUTION: Use only Category 5 Shielded Twisted Pair (or higher) for cabling Ethernet connections. Motorola Solutions has engineered this system to meet specific performance requirements. Using other cabling and connectors may result in unpredictable system performance or catastrophic failure. NOTICE: For more information on cabling guidelines, see the documentation supplied with components from each equipment manufacturer. 3.3.8 General Power Guidelines and Requirements See the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for information on providing electrical service, power budgeting, selecting batteries, and other topics for supplying power at the site. 89 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Perform electrical installation work in accordance with the current edition of the NFPA 70 and local building codes. Where required, use a qualified and licensed electrician for all electrical installations. 3.3.8.1 General AC Power Guidelines and Requirements The Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual defines the guidelines and requirements for cabinets and racks which house equipment that requires AC power input. Some of the guidelines and requirements are as follows:

The cabinet or rack is designed to accept 120/240 V, single-phase power with an amperage service size as required by the electronic equipment. Cabinets and racks powered by commercial power must be equipped with a Nationally Recognized Test Laboratory (NRTL) certified power distribution module that contains a main circuit breaker or individual circuit breakers of the correct size as required for the electronic equipment or as the customer specified. A decal showing an electrical schematic of the power wiring is affixed to the inside surface of the cabinet. All AC power equipment and electrical components must conform to National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA) and National Electrical Code (NEC). The AC power equipment must also be listed by an NRTL. A surge arrestor, designed to protect equipment systems from a 120/240 V service and load center, is placed on the power feed ahead of all individual load center circuit breakers. This gapless arrestor must be listed by an NRTL for the purpose intended. Selection of a surge arrestor is based on the susceptibility of the equipment powered by the electrical service, with margin provided for locally generated disturbances. See ANSI/IEEE C62.41

(21) for more details. At least one 120 VAC, 15 A duplex convenience outlet equipped with Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) protection must be provided in the electronic equipment compartment. CAUTION: Do not use surge/transient suppressors without careful and expert power system analysis. NOTICE: Redundant devices could be terminated on different AC main phases so that a single phase failure does not result in a power loss for both devices. 3.3.8.2 General Breaker Recommendations To ensure that a fault which causes the breaker to open does not result in the loss of multiple transmit channels, each power supply should have its own supply breaker. The breaker recommendations for AC and DC supply breakers are as follows:

For a 120 VAC, 60 Hz application, the AC supply breaker must be rated for a continuous current of 20 A. For a 220 VAC, 50 Hz application, the AC supply breaker must be rated for a continuous current of 10 A minimum, not to exceed 20 A. Individual DC breakers are not used. For information involving the sizing of cables and DC power distribution, see the Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual. Site installation must include a single current interrupting device on the DC input distribution (fuse or circuit breaker) rated for the application loading, not to exceed 200 A. For each standalone device, the DC supply breaker should be rated for a continuous current of 25 A. 90 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.3.8.3 General Battery Installation Recommendations Position the batteries and charger as closely as possible to the rectifier system using the cables. Use a heavy gauge stranded cable to minimize voltage drop. Examples of the resistance of some heavy gauge wire are:

Table 33: Heavy Gauge Wire Resistance Examples Gauge

#6 gauge

#4 gauge

#2 gauge Resistance 0.3951 /1000 ft 0.2485 /1000 ft 0.1563 /1000 ft The maximum voltage drop can be calculated by knowing the peak current the radio system draws. Use the following formula:

Total Voltage drop = [/1000 ft] x [total loop length (ft)] x [Ipeak (A)] + [connector(s) voltage drop(s)]

See DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Calculations for Integrated Voice and Data on page 101 and DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Calculations for HPD on page 102 for additional guidelines on the cable sizing. 3.3.9 General Electrostatic Discharge Recommendations Electronic components, such as circuit boards and memory modules, can be sensitive to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD). Use an antistatic wrist strap and a conductive foam pad when installing or upgrading the system. If an ESD station is not available, wear an antistatic wrist strap. Wrap the strap around the wrist and attach the ground end (usually a piece of copper foil or an alligator clip) to an electrical ground. An electrical ground can be a piece of metal that literally runs into the ground (such as an unpainted metal pipe), or the metal part of a grounded electrical appliance. An appliance is grounded if it has a three-

prong plug and is plugged into a three-prong grounded outlet. NOTICE: Do not use a computer as a ground, because it is not plugged in during installation. 3.3.10 FCC Requirements Radio frequency (RF) transmitters installed at sites within the US must be in compliance with the following FCC regulations:

The station licensee is responsible for the proper operation of the station at all times and is expected to provide observations, servicing, and maintenance as often as may be necessary to ensure proper operation. The transmitter ERP must not exceed the maximum power specified on the current station authorization. The frequency of the transmitter must be checked during initial installation of the transmitter, when replacing modules, or when making adjustments that affect the carrier frequency or modulation characteristics. 91 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.3.11 Networking Tools Use the following networking tools for installing and servicing the network:

Fluke OneTouch Assistant LAN tester NiMH rechargeable battery for Fluke T1/E1 or E1 test set (such as the Hewlett-Packard HP37702A) Serialtest software with the ComProbe and SerialBERT option 3.3.12 General Installation/Troubleshooting Tools If information is needed regarding where to obtain any of the equipment and tools listed, contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC). See Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. 3.3.12.1 General Tools Use the following general tools to install, optimize, and service equipment in the system:

150 MHz 4 Channel Digital Storage Oscilloscope Transmission Test Set (TIMS Set) Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor or equivalent 50 Ohm Terminated Load Digital Multimeter (DMM) Terminal Emulation Software DB-9 Straight through serial cable RS-232 Cables with Connectors Punch Block Impact Tool MODAPT RJ-45 Breakout Box connectors) ESD field service kit Amprobe Instruments GP-1 Earth Tester AEMC 3730 Clamp-on Ground Resistance Tester 3.3.12.2 Rack Tools Remote RJ-11/ RJ-45 Cable Tester (1200 ft length maximum) PC Cable Tester (RG-58, 59, 62, BNC, RJ-45, RJ-11, DB-9, DB-15, DB-25, Centronics 36-pin Use the following tools to install, optimize, and service the equipment:

Service Monitor: Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor with P25 Options installed (plus High Performance Data (HPD) and Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) options as required) Personal Computer meeting the following specifications:

- Operating Systems:

92 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation

+ Windows 10 (Server 2012 R2) Hardware Requirements:

- Processor:

+ 1 GHz or higher Pentium grade

- Processor Memory:

+ 2 GB RAM recommended for Windows 10

- Hard Disk Space:

+ 300 MB minimum free space (for a Typical Installation, including Help Text and Software Download Manager) or 100 MB minimum free space (for a Compact Installation)

- Peripherals:

+ Microsoft Windows supported mouse or trackball

+ Microsoft Windows supported serial port for product communication

+ Microsoft Windows supported Ethernet port for product communication

+ Microsoft Windows supported printer port for report printing

+ CD-ROM for software installation Configuration/Service Software (CSS) DLN6455 CSS serial programming cable Ethernet cable Antenna tester 50 Ohm terminated load 3.3.13 Technical Support for Installation Rohde & Schwarz NRT-Z14 Directional Power Sensor, 25-1000 GHz, 0.1-120 W. Recommended for all uses when a service monitor is not available. Technical support is available from the site-specific documents the Field Engineer or Motorola Solutions Field Representative provided for the system, one of the Motorola Solutions Support Centers

(SSC), or qualified subcontractors. SSC can help technicians and engineers resolve system problems and ensure that warranty requirements are met. Check your contract for specific warranty information. See Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. The Motorola Solutions System Service Subcontractor Assessment program ensures that service people contracted by Motorola Solutions meet strict minimum requirements before they can work on any system. For more information on this program, contact the Motorola Solutions representative. 3.3.13.1 Site-Specific Information When the Motorola Solutions Center for Customer Solution Integration (CCSi) stages a system, the Field Engineer assigned to the system creates all site-specific system documentation to document how the system was staged. Site-specific information includes the following:

Site design drawings showing the location of racks, cabinets, cable trays, and other components Rack drawings showing the location of the equipment in each rack Cable matrix in a table format that shows each cable and its connections 93 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Interconnect wiring diagrams to show the cable connections between devices Pre-programmed parameters of each site component Templates used to program each device All firmware and software revisions of each site component Test data from each device that requires operational verification Optimization requirements and settings of each electrical path Acceptance Test Plan for the site components NOTICE: Maintain this site-specific information to reflect the current site configuration and layout for the system. 3.4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Hardware Installation The following is information specific to GTR 8000 Base Radios. 3.4.1 Placement and Spacing Cabinets and racks allow equipment to be added to a site. Always consider room for expansion when setting up a site. Cabinets or racks may be installed next to each other or to other equipment. However, provide all cabinets and racks with sufficient floor space to permit access for installation and service. Clearance required for service and installation is at least 2 ft in the front and rear. Front access:

Side and rear access:

At least 2 ft floor access in front of the cabinet or rack. At least 2 ft floor access at the rear of the cabinet or rack, or At least 2 ft access on at least one side of the cabinet or rack, plus 6 inches at the rear of the cabinet or rack. To maintain this clearance, the following is required:

If there is less than 2 ft rear access, do not install more than two cabinets or racks side by side, and allow at least 2 ft access on at least one side of each cabinet or rack. For the cabinet version, if there is less than 2 ft rear access, do not install the optional rear door on the cabinet. NOTICE: For the cabinet version, when an eyenut has to be replaced, provide at least 2 ft access to both sides of the cabinet so that both side panels can be removed. 3.4.2 Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio The GTR 8000 Base Radios are offered with factory cabinet options for mounting flexibility. Two cabinet height options are available:

31 in. 15 Rack Units (Option CA02446AA) 47 in. 24 Rack Units (Option CA02447AA) Each cabinet is ordered with a single base radio and Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) equipment pre-installed. Additional base radios and other devices are installed in the cabinet during 94 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation field installation. For spacing equipment or placing peripherals between base radios, additional slides rails can be ordered. The cabinets have knockouts on the top and bottom that provide space and separation of cable types when routing the cables. Follow the Motorola Solutions Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for the multiple knockouts for the different cable types as shown in Figure 33: Cabinet Dimensions on page 96. The doors on both cabinets are provided with standard locks (key# 2135), which come with two keys per lock. Each door can also be detached and mounted on a reverse direction. 3.4.2.1 Floor Mounting the Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio Securely fasten the cabinet to the floor or other rigid surface capable of supporting the load of the cabinet. Figure 32: GTR 8000 Base Radio (Cabinet Version) Floor Mounting Detail IMPORTANT: The four 5/8 in. holes in the top of the cabinet are for stacking cabinets and are not intended for strength when lifting a cabinet. 95 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.4.2.2 Physical Dimensions and Clearances of the Cabinet Version of the GTR 8000 Base Radio The figures show the dimensions for both the 31 in. and 47 in. cabinets. Minimum recommended clearances are 36 in. (front and rear) for installation access. Figure 33: Cabinet Dimensions 96 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.4.2.3 Cabinet Mounting Rails The figures show the dimensions and spacings of the mounting rails inside both the 31 in. and 47 in. cabinets. The mounting rails are square hole and require cage nuts for additional equipment installation. Figure 34: Cabinet Mounting Rails Motorola Solutions made no provision to enable the removal of a harness after the equipment has been lifted and placed flat onto a surface. Your organization must provide those provisions. 3.4.2.4 Vertical Lifting of Cabinets 3.4.2.4.1 Lifting Cabinets Vertically When and where to use: Use this procedure to lift the cabinet with a harness and place onto a flat surface. Procedure:

1 Place two temporary supports onto the floor or flat surface. Position the supports to facilitate the removal of harness. See Figure 35: Lifting a Cabinet with a Harness on page 98. 97 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Figure 35: Lifting a Cabinet with a Harness 2 Using the harness, lift the cabinet onto the two supports. 3 Remove the harness. onto the flat surface. 4 Lift one side of the cabinet slightly and remove one of the supports. Carefully lower the cabinet 5 Lift the other side of the cabinet slightly and remove the other support. Carefully lower the cabinet onto the flat surface. 3.4.2.5 Removing/Replacing a Cabinet Door When and where to use: The default orientation of the door hinge is on the right side of the cabinet. Use this procedure to change the hinge to the left side of the cabinet, or to replace a cabinet door. Procedure:

1 Loosen the M6 fastener and detach the ground cable from the bus bar. If removing the front cabinet door, the ground cable is detached from the M6 nut in the cabinet body. 98 Figure 36: Cabinet Door Removal MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 2 To remove the door, release the spring loaded latch. 3 Lift the door from the pin hinge. Figure 37: Cabinet Door Replacement 99 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 4 Flip the door 180 and reattach it to the cabinet with the pin hinge. 5 Reattach the ground cable to the M6 nut in the cabinet body. 3.4.3 Rack Mounting The GTR 8000 Base Radio Mount the base radio housing in a rack that has been secured to the floor. For open racks, two brackets are required to distribute the weight. Without brackets, the center of gravity of the system shifts to the back, potentially causing structural issues with the rack. The brackets come with the required number of screws. Figure 38: Base Radio Mounted in Rack NOTICE: Perform this installation with two people so that one person can hold the device in place while the other person attaches the brackets to the rack. 3.4.3.1 Mounting the GTR 8000 Base Radio Procedure:

1 Determine where to mount the device on the rack and mark the location. The brackets are useful in making this determination, and the pin on the back of the bracket helps in finding the exact location on the rack. 2 Attach the brackets to the sides of the chassis:

a Use M6x1x13 machine screws with a captive washer (zinc plated). b Screw one bracket into the clinch nuts on the side of the chassis. c Screw the second bracket into the clinch nuts on the other side of the chassis. 100 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3 Lift the device into place on the rack using the pins on the brackets to properly line up the 4 Attach the two brackets to the rack:

a For a Motorola Solutions modular rack, use M6x1x10 thread-forming screws with a black b For a Motorola Solutions open rack, use 1224x5/8 thread-forming screws (zinc plated). c For your own rack, use hardware appropriate for the rack. d Attach the brackets to both sides of the rack through the upper back openings on the device. finish. brackets. e Attach the brackets to the rack on both sides through the lower back openings. 5 In the front, attach the chassis to the brackets:

a Screw two M6x1x10 thread-forming screws (black finish) through the front holes on one side of the chassis and into the bracket. b Screw two M6x1x10 thread-forming screws (black finish) through the front holes on the other side of the chassis and into the bracket. 3.4.4 Connecting Power This section covers topics on connecting power cables to the base radio, calculating the length of wire for various gauges, and mounting the battery temperature sensor. 3.4.4.1 Connecting Power Cables to a GTR 8000 Base Radio For standalone base radios, AC and DC inputs, provided by your organization, connect to the power supply through the backplane of the base radio. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections

(Integrated Voice and Data) on page 105, GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (HPD) on page 108, and GTR 8000 Base Radio Front Connections on page 110. 3.4.4.2 DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Calculations for Integrated Voice and Data Because the power supply disconnects itself from the DC input when it senses that DC voltage has dropped to 42 VDC, it is important to minimize the voltage drop in the DC power supply loop (the total length of the 48 VDC hot wire and the DC return wire) to no more than 1 V total. Minimizing the voltage drop ensures that the maximum energy is removed from the battery before disconnecting the power supply from the DC input line. A base radio transmitting at 100 W draws up to 10 A* current when operating from a 54 V source

(nominal 48 VDC system). As voltage decreases (due to the standby battery discharging) the current increases proportionally (because the base radio appears to be a constant power load). At the low voltage disconnect point (42 V for a nominal 48 VDC system), the current is up to 13 A*. If a single pair of 2 AWG wire is used to connect the battery to the back panel, the maximum length of a single conductor would be 75 m (245 ft). Use of smaller gauge wire would reduce this length depending on the resistance of the wire.

* = The actual current value can be calculated from the power consumption value in the specifications tables. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. To determine the maximum length of wire for wire other than 2 AWG, the following relationship can be used:

101 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Length (m/ft) = V/I/R where:

V = voltage drop in one leg of the loop (max = 0.5 V) I = current the base radio draws during DC operation R = resistance of the wire being considered (in Ohms per ft) For common wire sizes, the maximum distances shown in Table 34: DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Maximum Distances for an IV and D Site on page 102 apply. Table 34: DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Maximum Distances for an IV and D Site AWG Resistance (ohm/304.8 meter/ 1000 ft) Maximum Distance (for 13A) 2 3 4 5 6 0.1563 0.1970 0.2485 0.3133 0.3951 75 m (245 ft) 60 m (195 ft) 47 m (155 ft) 37 m (120 ft) 30 m (95 ft) 3.4.4.3 DC Power Connection Wire Gauge Calculations for HPD Since the power supply disconnects itself from the DC input when it senses that DC voltage has dropped to 42 VDC, it is important to minimize the voltage drop in the DC power supply loop (the total length of the 48 VDC hot wire and the DC return wire) to no more than 1 V total. Minimizing the voltage drop ensures that the maximum energy is removed from the battery before disconnecting the power supply from the DC input line. A base radio transmitting at 50 W draws up to 7.4 A current when operating from a 54 V source

(nominal 48 VDC system). As voltage decreases (due to the standby battery discharging) the current increases proportionally (since the base radio appears to be a constant power load). At the low voltage disconnect point (42 V for a nominal 48 VDC system), the current will be up to 9.5 A. Use of smaller gauge wire would reduce this length depending on the resistance of the wire. To determine the maximum length of wire for wire other than 2 AWG, the following relationship can be used:

Length (ft) = V/I/R where:

V = voltage drop in one leg of the loop (max = 0.5 V) I = current drawn by the base radio during DC operation (9.5A) R = resistance of the wire being considered (in Ohms per ft) For common wire sizes, the maximum distances shown in Table 35: Power Connection Wire Gauge Maximum Distances for HPD on page 102 apply. Table 35: Power Connection Wire Gauge Maximum Distances for HPD AWG Resistance (ohm/1000 ft) Maximum Distance 0.1563 0.1970 0.2485 102m (335 ft) 81m (265 ft) 64m (210 ft) 2 3 4 102 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation AWG Resistance (ohm/1000 ft) Maximum Distance 5 6 0.3133 0.3951 51m (165 ft) 40m (130 ft) 3.4.4.4 Battery Temperature Sensor Mounting A 40 ft battery temperature sensor cable is shipped with your device. This three-wire cable carries a voltage signal to the power supply from a sensor element which must be mounted close to the storage battery. Voltage is proportional to the battery temperature and the diagnostic circuitry in the power supply module. The 40 ft cable can be extended to a total length of 190 ft using 50 ft extensions

(Motorola Solutions part number 3084827Y04. See Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. Mount the sensing element of the temperature sensor so that it detects the actual battery temperature

(or the ambient temperature as close as possible to the batteries being charged). The two examples of mounting are as follows:

Example 1 Use cable ties to attach the sensing cable to the positive (or negative) power cable. A minimum of two cable ties should be used (spaced 6 inches apart), with one of the cable ties not more than 2 inches from the sensing element. Mount the sensing element not more than 2 inches from the battery post where the power cable connects. See Figure 39: Battery Temperature Sensor Example 1 on page 103. Figure 39: Battery Temperature Sensor Example 1 Example 2 103 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Attach the sensing cable to an existing battery tray support bracket using cable ties or nylon loop straps of the proper size. Mount the sensing element not more than 2 inches from the surface of the batteries being monitored. Use a minimum of two cable ties and/or loop straps to secure the sensing cable to the bracket. Place the cable ties/ loop straps no more than 6 inches apart with one placed no more than 2 inches from the sensing element. See Figure 40: Battery Temperature Sensor Example 2 on page 104. Figure 40: Battery Temperature Sensor Example 2 3.4.5 GTR 8000 Base Radio Grounding Detailed grounding information is beyond the scope of this manual. See the Standards and Guidelines for Communication Sites manual for detailed information about grounding and lightning protection. IMPORTANT: Ground the battery system, either positive or negative, at the battery. The DC input (battery charger output) of the power supply floats with respect to earth ground. The power supply can therefore be used in either positive ground or negative ground DC systems. Connect the appropriate terminal (+ or -) of the DC system to protective earth at the battery. These instructions assume that all telephone lines, antenna cables, and AC or DC power cables have been properly grounded and lightning-protected. When rack installations have a primary rack and one or more expansion racks, all these racks must be connected to the same Sub System Ground Bus Bar (SSGB) (with no other rack connected to the SSGB). Grounding ensures that surge events do not produce ground potential differences that affect signals between the racks. 104 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation The backplane has a double lug with two lock nuts on the rear panel where the ground wire connects to the backplane on one end, and to the rack grounding bar on the other. The rack grounding bar is connected to the master ground bus bar. To use the grounding lugs, a length of #6 AWG wire with UL-listed ring lugs is required on both ends. This wire is shipped with the device. For the cabinet version of the base radio, the rack grounding bar is connected to the SSGB with a provided AWG2 dual hole lug. Figure 41: Rack Grounding 3.4.5.1 Grounding the GTR 8000 Base Radio Procedure:

rack grounding bar. 1 Connect the ground wire attached to the two grounding lugs at the rear of the base radio to the 2 Tighten the ground lock nut to 60 in-lb (6.94 N.m). 3 Connect all other equipment and peripherals to the rack grounding bar. 3.4.6 GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (Integrated Voice and Data) The base radio connects to SITE CTRL ports for this channel and to the transmit and receive paths. 105 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Figure 42: Base Radio Integrated Voice and Data Backplane Table 36: Base Radio Backplane Connections for Integrated Voice and Data Device it connects to:

Description Port /

Type SC-A port, RJ-45 Simulcast Site:

Site LAN switch Port /

Type LAN port, RJ-45 SC A to Base Ra-

dio 1-6 port, RJ-45 LAN port, RJ-45 IP interface connection to the site LAN switch port for this channel. An optional SDM RTU device connects to the site LAN switch that is connected to this port. Connects to site controller A base radio port for this channel. NOTICE: The length of the cable between the site controller and the base radio should be no greater than 30 ft. IP interface connection to the site LAN switch port for this channel or connection to site controller A base radio port for this channel. An optional SDM RTU device connects to the site LAN switch that is con-

nected to this port. ASTRO 25 repeater site with Less than six GTR 8000 Base Ra-

dios, or with a mix of QUANTAR stations:

Site Controller module A ASTRO 25 repeater site with More than six GTR 8000 Base Ra-

dios, or with a mix of QUANTAR stations:

External Site LAN switch or Site Controller mod-

ule A SC-B port, RJ-45 Simulcast Site:

Not in use ASTRO 25 repeater site with Less than six GTR 8000 Base Ra-

SC B to Base Ra-

dio 1-6 Connects to site controller B base radio port for this channel. 106 Port /

Type Device it connects to:

Description MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation NOTICE: The length of the cable between the site controller and the base radio should be no greater than 30 ft. IP interface connection to the site LAN switch port for this channel or connection to site controller B base radio port for this channel. An optional SDM RTU device connects to the site LAN switch that is con-

nected to this port. Port /

Type port, RJ-45 LAN port, RJ-45 dios, or with a mix of QUANTAR stations:

Site Controller module B ASTRO 25 repeater site with More than six GTR 8000 Base Ra-

dios, or with a mix of QUANTAR stations:

External Site LAN switch or Site Controller mod-

ule B Receive line A BNC RF coax to receive path for antenna A. Receive line B BNC RF coax to receive path for antenna B. This port is used for dual diversity for TDMA. Transmit line N-type RF coax to transmit antenna. RX-A, BNC RX-B, BNC Transmit port, N-

type Aux Pwr Output Comparator or Site Con-

troller Aux Pwr Input Bat Temp, 6-pin Battery temperature sensor RF Pe-

ripherals RF peripheral sensor ports Batt/DC DC power supply or bat-

tery Batt/DC Provides secondary power to a convention-

al comparator for a conventional base ra-

dio, or to the site controller in an ASTRO 25 repeater site. Connection to temperature sensor, allow-

ing for temperature compensated battery charging. Antenna relay and presence detect, exter-

nal circulator load temperature (external wattmeter not supported). Input from and output to a 48 VDC power supply or backup battery. When AC power is not available, the device switches to op-

erate from a DC source if the optional DC power (8AWG; length 9 ft), CA01400AA is ordered and installed. One end connects into the Batt/DC port and the other end connects into the DC source. The contacts are 39-83503N02 (AMP #53880-2), the re-

ceptacle housings are 15-83502N01 (AMP

#53884-1) and the mounting ears are 07-83504N01 (AMP #53887-1). 3084869Y06 cable is used for a positive ground system. 3084869Y02 cable is used for a negative ground system. 107 AC 120/240 VAC power source. Input from 120/240 VAC nominal power source. MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Port /

Type EXT FREQ REF*

TRAK (Simulcast Site Reference) Port /

Type BNC Device it connects to:

Description 1 In an Analog or ASTRO 25 simulcast configuration, this input is connected to an external reference signal source

(TRAK 9100) to drive an internal oscilla-

tor for precise frequency stability. The source can be 5 or 10 MHz. 2 In an ASTRO 25 simulcast (TRAK 9100) or ASTRO 25 site repeater

(TRAK 9100 or TRAK 8835) configura-

tion, it is used as an input connected to an external reference, which provides a composite 5 MHz + 1 PPS signal source to drive an internal oscillator for precise frequency stability and provides a time reference for precisely launching ASTRO 25 signals over the air. This input is used when a composite 5 MHz + 1PPS signal source is not used. It is connected to an external 1 PPS time refer-

ence source to provide an accurate time source used for precisely launching AS-

TRO 25 signals over the air. This input is used in conjunction with EXT FREQ REF option 1. 1 PPS*

TRAK 9100 (Simulcast Site Reference) BNC

* See GTR 8000 Base Radio Time and Frequency Inputs on page 157. NOTICE: The EXT FREQ REF input on the rear of the device is high impedance. Use an external termination to properly terminate the cable connected to the input. It is recommended that a BNC "T" and a 50 Ohm BNC termination is connected to the input to terminate the cable. If the cable is daisy chained (multiple base radios connected together and driven by one TRAK/PSC output), only the last base radio in the chain has the termination. 3.4.7 GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (HPD) The base radio connects with each of the site controllers and to the transmit and receive paths. 108 Figure 43: Base Radio HPD Backplane MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Table 37: Base Radio Backplane Connections for HPD Port /

Type SC A port, RJ-45 Site Controller module A Device it connects to:

Description Connects to site controller A base radio port for this channel. NOTICE: The length of the cable between the site controller and the base radio should be no greater than 30 feet. SC B port, RJ-45 Site Controller module B Connects to site controller B base radio port for this channel. Receive line A BNC RF coax to receive path for Rx antenna. Receive line B BNC RF coax to receive path for antenna B. Transmit line N-type RF coax to transmit antenna. Port /

Type Base ra-

dio port, RJ-45 Base ra-

dio port, RJ-45 Site Controller or RMC/LNA Aux Pwr Input Bat Temp, 6-pin Battery temperature sen-

sor The auxiliary output power can be used to provide secondary power to the site con-

troller or receive multicouplers (Site RMCs/

LNAs). Connection to temperature sensor, allow-

ing for temperature compensated battery charging. RX-A, BNC RX-B, BNC Transmit port, N-

type Aux Pwr Output 109 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Device it connects to:

Description Port /

Type Not in use DC power supply or bat-

tery Batt/DC Input from and output to a 48 VDC power supply or backup battery. Input from and output to a 48 VDC power supply or back-

up battery. When AC power is not availa-

ble, the device switches to operate from a DC source if the optional DC power

(8AWG; length 9 ft), CA01400AA is or-

dered and installed. One end connects into the Batt/DC port and the other end con-

nects into the DC source. The contacts are 39-83503N02 (AMP #53880-2), the recep-

tacle housings are 15-83502N01 (AMP

#53884-1) and the mounting ears are 07-83504N01 (AMP #53887-1). 3084869Y06 cable is used for a positive ground system. 3084869Y02 cable is used for a negative ground system. Not in use Not in use 120/240 VAC power source. Input from 120/240 VAC nominal power source. 3.4.8 GTR 8000 Base Radio Front Connections Two service ports are accessible through a drop-down door to the left of the fans. The remaining ports are behind the fan module. Figure 44: Base Radio Front Port /

Type RF Pe-

ripherals Batt/DC AC EXT FREQ REF 1 PPS 110 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation NOTICE: The optional Transceiver Option Card attaches to the control board. The board provides an internal 10 MHz frequency reference. For conventional operation, it provides the analog interfaces and WildCard I/Os. Table 38: Transceiver Connections - Front XCVR Port / Type Connects to This Device/

Port Description Ethernet service port, RJ-45 Service PC, LAN port Serial service port, DB-9 Service PC, RS-232 port Microphone port, RJ-45 Microphone, RJ-45 port Speaker port, RJ-9 External Speaker, RJ-9 port Wireline port, RJ-45 Landline equipment, RJ-45 System Connector, mini SCSI 50-pin Telco Connector or Punchblock Asynchronous port, RS232, RJ-45 V.24 port Digital Circuit, RJ-45 Ethernet service port for local ac-

cess using Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Also may be used for localized software down-

loads. NOTICE: Supports only 10 Mb half duplex oper-

ation. Serial service port for initial con-

figuration of the IP address. Used to connect to a microphone with a PTT button. NOTICE: Use micro-

phone kit GMMN4063B. Used to connect to an amplified

(DC powered) external speaker. Audio volume level is set from the CSS. CAUTION: To prevent damage to the base ra-

dio, use speaker kits HSN1006A and cable part no. 0185180U01. Connection between telephone lines or analog site equipment and the analog base radio. The wireline processes and routes all wireline audio signals between the base radio and landline equip-

ment (such as consoles or mo-

dems). Provides the WildCard I/Os and supplementary Analog I/Os for analog simulcast and special ap-

plications. Editing of Wildcard configurations is permitted only through CSS. Not in Use Connection port when the base radio is part of a conventional or 111 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation XCVR Port / Type Connects to This Device/

Port Description Reference frequency input, BNC*

Service monitor trunked circuit-based site, mixed mode, or digital only. Connection port to service moni-

tor for frequency calibration.

* See GTR 8000 Base Radio Time and Frequency Inputs on page 157. NOTICE: For information about conventional functions and topologies the base radio supports, see the Conventional Operations manual. The base radio can be IP managed while using the 2-

or 4-wire/V.24 interface for channel traffic. 3.4.8.1 System Connector Ports (Conventional) The system connector, a 50-pin Mini SCSI connector, is used for the WildCard inputs, outputs, and the analog audio paths not routed to their own connector. Table 39: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Conventional) Pin No. Signal Function Note Main Standby - External handshaking Main Standby- Status of oth-

er side Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate In-Cabinet Repeat Pull To Ground To Activate Main Standby - Connectivity other Station Pull To Ground To Activate Aux In 9 Input Phone Patch - PL Strip Aux In 10 Input Phone Patch - Monitor Type Input Input Input Input Input Input Aux In 13 Input For future use Pull To Ground To Activate 10 Aux Out 12 Output 11 Aux Out 2 Output Phone Patch - Rx Carrier 12 Aux Out 4 Output Main Standby - Station Sta-

tus Low Impedance to Ground When Active 13 Aux Out 6 Output Low Impedance to Ground When Active Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Aux In 2 Aux In 4 3*

Aux In 6 Aux In 8 Aux In 11 Aux In 12 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 112 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Pin No. Signal Type Function Note Output RD STAT - Receiver Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Main Standby - Antenna Re-

lay Form Relay A Closed When Active 14 15 16 17 Aux Out Relay 7 Com Aux Out Relay 8 Com Aux Out Relay 9 Com Aux Out Relay 10 Com Output Output Output 18 Aux Out 11 Output 19 External_Reset Input Reset 20 TSTAT Output For future use Output Aux Rx Analog Signal Unbalanced Gen TX Data-

Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced Phone Patch - Call Request Pull To Ground To Activate GND Aux Tx PL(-) In Tx Inhibit External PTT Rx Inhibit Phone Patch - PL Strip Input/

Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input 21 22 AUX RX GND 23**

AUX TX 24 PL -

25**

Gen TX 26 27 28 29 30 Aux In 1 Aux In 3 Aux In 5 Aux In 7 Aux In 9 +

32 Aux In 11 +

33 Aux In 12 +

34 35 36 GND Aux In 14 Aux Out 1 31 Aux In 10 +

Input Phone Patch - Monitor Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Buffered Input Pull To Ground To Activate 0 Volts When Inactive / +5 Volts when Active Analog Signal 600 Ohm Unbal-

anced Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active 113 GND Input For future use Pull To Ground To Activate Output Phone Patch - Inhibit / Ena-

ble Low Impedance to Ground When Active 37 Aux Out 3 Output 38 Aux Out 5 Output 39 Aux Out Relay 7 N.O. Output RD STAT - Receiver Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Pin No. Signal Function Note Main Standby - Antenna Re-

lay Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Output For future use 0 Volts When Inactive / +5 Volts when Active MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 Aux Out Relay 8 N.O. Aux Out Relay 9 N.O. Aux Out Relay 10 N.O. Type Output Output Output GND GND RSTAT TX DATA +

GND GND PL +

GND GND GND GND PL(+ ) In Input Input 50**

Gen TX +

Gen TX DATA +

Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced

* For detailed information on the differences between the automatic Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat and the externally-wired In-Cabinet Repeat functions, see the Conventional Operations manual.

** It is the responsibility of the third-party vendor to ensure that the signal generated by their device is compliant with any regulatory agency limitation imposed on the channel. This signal is not filtered or limited by the GTR 8000 Base Radio. Figure 45: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Conventional) 114 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.4.8.2 System Connector Ports (Trunked 3600) The system connector is a 50-pin Mini SCSI connector. It is used for the WildCard inputs, outputs, and the analog audio paths not routed to their own connector. Table 40: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Trunked 3600) Pin #

Signal Function Note 3*

Aux In 6 In-Cabinet Repeat Pull To Ground To Activate CCI TPTT Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate Type Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Aux In 2 Aux In 4 Aux In 8 Aux In 9 Aux In 10 Aux In 11 Aux In 12 1 2 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Aux Out 12 Output 11 Aux Out 2 Output 12 Aux Out 4 Output 13 Aux Out 6 Output 14 15 16 17 Aux Out Relay 7 Com Aux Out Relay 8 Com Aux Out Relay 9 Com Aux Out Relay 10 Com Output Output Output 18 Aux Out 11 Output 19 External_Reset Input Reset 20 TSTAT Output TSTAT Aux In 13 Input Trunking Mute Pull To Ground To Activate Output RD STAT - Receiver Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Pull To Ground To Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Buffered Input Pull To Ground To Activate 0 Volts When Inactive / +5 Volts when Active 115 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Pin #

Signal Type Function Note Output Aux Rx Analog Signal Unbalanced Analog Signal 600 Ohm Unbal-

anced Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate Pull To Ground To Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Opto-Isolated In - Current flow to Activate Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Low Impedance to Ground When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active Form Relay A Closed When Active GND Output Failsoft Indicate Input For future use Pull To Ground To Activate Output RD STAT - Receiver Active Form Relay A Closed When Active GND Aux Tx n/a Gen TX Data-

Ext Failsoft Tx Inhibit External PTT Rx Inhibit Input/

Output Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input Input 21 22 AUX RX GND 23**

AUX TX 24 PL -

25**

Gen TX Aux In 1 Aux In 3 Aux In 5 Aux In 7 Aux In 9 +

31 Aux In 10 +

32 Aux In 11 +

33 Aux In 12 +

GND Aux In 14 Aux Out 1 26 27 28 29 30 34 35 36 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 116 37 Aux Out 3 Output 38 Aux Out 5 Output Aux Out Relay 7 N.O. Aux Out Relay 8 N.O. Aux Out Relay 9 N.O. Aux Out Relay 10 N.O. Output Output Output GND GND RSTAT GND GND TX DATA +

GND GND GND GND Output RSTAT 0 Volts When Inactive / +5 Volts when Active MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Pin #

Signal 49 PL +

50**

Gen TX +

Type Input Input Function Note n/a Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced Gen TX DATA +

Analog Signal 600 Ohm Balanced

* For detailed information on the differences between the automatic Fallback In-Cabinet Repeat and the externally-wired In-Cabinet Repeat functions, see the Conventional Operations manual.

** It is the responsibility of the third-party vendor to ensure that the signal generated by their device is compliant with any regulatory agency limitation imposed on the channel. This signal is not filtered or limited by the GTR 8000 Base Radio. Figure 46: 50Pin System Connector Pin-Outs (Trunked 3600) 3.4.8.3 Wireline Port Pin-Outs Table 41: Wireline Port Pin-Outs The Wireline port, an RJ-45 connector, can accommodate up to eight pins. Signal Name Pin No. nection nection tion 2-Wire Con-

4-Wire Con-

Wire Connec-

Auxiliary 4-

Line2_+

Line2_ Line3_+

Line1_ Line1_+

Line3_ Line4_+

Line4_ Input/Output Input/Output Output Output Input Input 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Input Input Output Output 117 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation Figure 47: Wireline Port Pin-Outs 3.4.8.4 Microphone Port Pin-Outs Table 42: Microphone Port Pin-Outs Signal Name Pin No. Reserved Reserved MIC_PTT MIC_AUDIO GND Reserved Reserved Reserved 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Figure 48: Microphone Port Pin-Outs The Microphone port is an RJ-45 connector that provides the interface for a microphone. 3.4.8.5 Speaker Port Pin-Outs The Speaker port is an RJ-9 connector that provides the interface to an external speaker. 118 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation CAUTION: To prevent damage to the base radio, use the HSN1006A speaker with the 0185180U01 cable. Table 43: Speaker Port Pin-Outs Signal Name Pin No. GND

+12 V GND Speaker Out Figure 49: Speaker Port Pin-Outs The V.24 port is an RJ-45 connector that provides the interface to a Digital Interface Unit, Conventional Channel Interface, Conventional Channel Gateway (CCGW), ASTRO-TAC 3000 Comparator, Link Converter, or Channel Bank. 3.4.8.6 V.24 Port Pin-Outs Table 44: V.24 Port Pin-Outs Signal Name Pin No. RCLK Rx Line Det TCLK GND Data Rx Data Tx CTS RTS Input/Output Type Input Input GND Input Output Input Output 3.4.8.7 GTR 8000 Base Radio Part 68 Information This section applies when the base radio is equipped with the optional wireline interface circuitry contained on the Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator (OCXO) Transceiver Option Card (Option 119 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation CA01506AA) or Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator (TCXO) Transceiver Option Card

(Option CA01953). NOTICE: The TCXO Transceiver Option Card is used for the Power Efficiency Package option. This equipment complies with Part 68 of the FCC rules and the requirements of the Administrative Counsel for Terminal Attachments (ACTA). On the rear of this equipment is a label that contains, among other information, the registration number:

US: ABZNINANT7039 If requested, this number must be provided to the telephone company. The connector used to connect this equipment to the premises wiring and telephone network must comply with the applicable FCC Part 68 rules and requirements of the ACTA. A compliant connector is provided with this product. See installation instructions for details. REN: N/A Connector: RJ-48 Authorized Network Port: 04NO2 Service Order Code: 7.0Y If the equipment causes harm to the telephone network, the telephone company notifies your organization in advance that temporary discontinuance of service may be required. If advance notice is not practical, the telephone company notifies your organization as soon as possible. Also, your organization is advised of the right to file a complaint with the FCC if it is necessary. The telephone company may change its facilities, equipment, operations, or procedures that could affect the operation of the equipment. If changes happen, the telephone company provides advance notice so your organization can make necessary modifications to maintain uninterrupted service. If your organization experiences trouble with this equipment, see Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219 for repair and warranty information. If the equipment is causing harm to the telephone network, the telephone company may request that you disconnect the equipment until the problem is resolved. None of the circuit boards in this equipment are field repairable. For assistance in sending the boards back for repair, see Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. This equipment cannot be used on telephone company public coin phone service. Connection to party line service is subject to state tariffs. Contact the state public utility commission, public service commission, or corporation commission for information. 3.5 Installation/Troubleshooting Tools In addition to the general tools needed for site installation activities, a service monitor is used specifically for testing the equipment. To place an order, contact Motorola Solutions at:

Phone: 1-800-422-4210 ext. 6883 TTY Phone: 1-866-522-5210 Motorola Online users: Web: https://businessonline.motorolasolutions.com Fax: 1-800-622-6210 120 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.5.1 Quick Connect RF Coaxial Adapters for GTR 8000 Base Radio Support The GTR 8000 Base Radio employs a number of "QN" and "QMA" Quick-Connect RF connectors in its design. The following RF adapters are available from Motorola Solutions and can be used to connect test equipment to the various station devices for troubleshooting purposes. Table 45: Quick-Connect RF Coaxial Adapters for GTR 8000 Base Radio Support Type Adapter / Connector description Motorola Solutions Part

"N"/QN

"N"/QN

"N"/QN QN QN N/QMA N/QMA QMA/QMA QMA/QMA 7/16/QN 7/16/QN 7/16/QN 7/16/QN Female "N" to Male QN Female "N" to Female QN Male "N" to Male "QN"

Right Angle Male QN cable plug for RG-400 coax Right Angle Male QN cable plug for RG-213 coax Female "N" to Male QMA Female "N" to Female QMA Female QMA to Female QMA Male QMA to Male QMA Female 7/16 to male QN Male 7/16 to Male QN

"Female 7/16 to female QN Intermod test adaptor"

"Male 7/16 to female QN Intermod test adaptor"

Number 5886055Y01 5886055Y10 5886055Y05 2871002H01 2886067Y01 5886055Y06 5886055Y07 5886055Y08 5886055Y09 5886055Y03 5886055Y02 5886055Y04 5886055Y11 3.6 Installing Device Software Prerequisites When and where to use: The following tasks are required before you can complete the device software installation and begin the configuration procedures in the Configuration chapter. Process:

1 Transfer and install new software to a device using the Software Download Manager. See Software Download Manager on page 123. 2 Obtain the ASTRO 25 media. Specifically, you need the Motorola Solutions Device OS Image media. See Loading Device OS Images to the UNC on page 126. 3 Obtain user names, passwords, and procedures required to access the devices on the network. For specific user names and passwords to access devices on the network, contact your system administrator. 4 Set up the users in the IT Admin group in Active Directory Users and Computers. See the Authentication Services manual. 121 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 5 Obtain the following values from the system administrator:

Line interface number Zone Controller (ZC) site link path 1 IP address ZC site link path 2 IP address Host name to access the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) server application using Secure SHell (SSH) (<username> @IP address format) Site ID number IP address 1 and 2 Primary and secondary NTP IP addresses NOTICE: The following are applicable to systems with Authentication, Authorization, and Accounting (AAA) Servers, Domain Controllers, or Syslog Servers. Primary, secondary, and tertiary Domain Name Services (DNS) IP addresses Requested DNS Domain Name Requested DNS Host Name System Name Primary SYSLOG Service Name Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) Backup SYSLOG Service Name Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service (RADIUS) FQDN parameter value RADIUS Row Status parameter value RADIUS Service Time Out (seconds) parameter value RADIUS Service Retransmits Attempts parameter value RADIUS Service Dead Timer (min) parameter value RADIUS Specific Key parameter value RADIUS Service Global Key parameter value 6 Obtain the default credentials (local accounts, central authentication, and SNMPv3) for the device being installed, as well as the updated passwords for those types of accounts (so that you can change the password after you install the device). Contact your system administrator, if you do not have this information. See the SNMPv3 manual or see Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting on page 218 for more information. 7 Configure the device as a RADIUS client on the RADIUS server. When these devices are configured with a RADIUS key that matches a shared secret for that device in Microsoft Windows Internet Authentication Service (IAS), they become RADIUS clients. They do not join the Active Directory domain. See the Authentication Services manual for more information. 8 NOTICE: This step is applicable to systems with AAA Servers, Domain Controllers, or Syslog Servers. To use the VoyenceControl component of the Motorola Solutions centralized configuration application for any of the site device procedures, set up the UNC. Depending on your organizational policies, you may also need to implement a secure protocol between the UNC and the site device. Before performing any procedures using VoyenceControl, the device must be discovered in VoyenceControl, and the device configurations must be recently pulled to the UNC database. See the following ASTRO 25 system documentation: Unified Network Configurator manual and Securing Protocols with SSH manual. 122 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 3.7 Software Download Manager The Software Download Manager (SWDL) is an application that can transfer only, install only, or transfer and install new software to devices. The new software can be installed either locally at a site or on the Network Management subsystem. Individual devices not connected to the system can be downloaded using single device mode. NOTICE: Throughout this manual, the name SWDL is used to refer to the Software Download Manager application. Software Download Security Transfer Modes A software download can be performed using the following security transfer modes:

Transfers the software without security, based on the File-Transfer Protocol (FTP) Clear SWDL Secure SWDL Transfers the software as encrypted, based on the Secure File-Transfer Protocol (SFTP) NOTICE: All secure sequential and simultaneous transfers use the Diffie-Hellman group exchange. The Diffie-Hellman group exchange is used for devices supporting Diffie-Hellman group exchange. The Diffie-Hellman group exchange enhances the security of Secure Shell

(SSH) protocol initial key exchange. See the Software Download Manager manual for details. Before initiating transfer, SWDL connects to the site in the zone to discover all devices. The transfer mode of all devices is displayed in the SWDL window. It is important that all devices have the same SWDL transfer mode. Otherwise, SWDL flags a mismatch of the SWDL transfer modes across site devices. SWDL provisions the credentials for Secure SWDL as part of initiating the SWDL operation. No user intervention is required. For a single device, Secure or Clear SWDL is configured based on the SWDL Transfer Mode configuration within the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). The Unified Network Configurator (UNC) can be used to schedule and configure all devices in the system at once. For information on how to configure the secure or clear SWDL transfer mode, see the Unified Network Configurator manual and Configuring Devices for Security in the CSS Online Help. Software Download Transfer Methods A software download can be accomplished in two ways:

Site Software Download Allows you to transfer and install application software from any location within a network. The Software Download Manager resides on the Network Management Client computer and a service computer/laptop loaded with the CSS application. From either of the computers, you can select device types to download software. Site Software Download allows you to select the zone, site, device types, and software download operation to perform. When performing a site software download, the site controller coordinates the software transfer for all trunked base radios, receivers, comparators, and reference distribution modules installed at the site. A site software download can only be performed on a trunked ASTRO 25 system. NOTICE: Trunked GPW 8000 Receivers in a circuit simulcast configuration are not supported using a site software download. Single Device Software Download Allows you to transfer and install software to a single instance of a device (such as one base radio). This feature gives the technician the ability to install different versions of software. Single device software download is done from a service computer/laptop loaded with the CSS application either connected directly to the device or connected to the network. 123 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation NOTICE: Conventional devices and 3600 base radios are supported only in single device software download. Site Software Download Functionality When SWDL is connected from a central remote location, SWDL performs a site software download to the site controllers, then to the comparators and base radios or receivers installed at the site. Both active and standby site controller modules have two flash memory banks for storing software. The device application is run from RAM, and is loaded from the active flash memory bank after a reset. One bank is active while the other bank is inactive. The transfer of the software using SWDL is a background process, without interruption of services at the site, that loads the software into the inactive bank. The site controller executes the software from one bank, while software is simultaneously downloaded to the inactive bank. The transfer and install are done in the background. An install causes the site controller to reset and load the RAM from the bank that was installed with the new software. NOTICE: For geographically redundant prime sites, a site software download should not be attempted while the third Site Controller (SC3) is in the active state. SWDL communicates with the site controllers to determine the number of existing remote sites and the number of channels. SWDL considers a channel or remote site to be accessible if its status is Not Unconfigured. This term means that the site must be set up with a service computer/laptop with CSS or a network management client before software download is performed on the site. The system downloads software to the site controllers, comparators, base radios, or receivers as a unit. Use SWDL to transfer software to each device type, then perform an install operation. During the transfer, the operation designates a proxy for each device type at each LAN. Site controllers proxy for comparators, and base radios or receivers proxy for each other. The proxy cross-transfers the software to other devices on the LAN. Using proxies minimizes system downtime. Transfers to the LAN are done simultaneously except for the site controller and comparators. Software installation is done on a channel-by-channel basis, starting with the highest number channel. When a channel software download occurs, the base radio or receiver which incorporates that channel is processed along with the comparator for that channel. For example, if channel 3 was being downloaded, comparator 3 and the base radios or receivers for channel 3 at each of the remote sites would be installed simultaneously. SWDL operation can be fault managed through Unified Event Manager (UEM), syslog, local SWDL log files, user messages, and device reports. For further information on SWDL, see the Software Download Manager manual. The operating software can also be loaded using the UNC. See the Unified Network Configurator manual to perform single device software downloads (ruthless download) to the devices. See the G-Series Equipment System Release User Guide for SWDL instructions specific to the operating characteristics of your existing system release. 3.8 Installing Devices in the UNC When and where to use: The Unified Network Configurator (UNC) is the Network Manager used to discover a device and load Operating System images. This process lists the basic steps involved using the UNC on a device. NOTICE: The UNC is not applicable for K core or non-networked sites. 1 Discover the device in the UNC. See Discovering a Device in the UNC on page 125. Process:

124 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation manual. page 126. on page 127. 2 Log in to the UNC server application using PuTTY. See the Securing Protocols with SSH 3 Load the operating system images to the UNC. See Loading Device OS Images to the UNC on 4 Enable FTP services on the UNC. See Enabling FTP Service on page 127. 5 Transfer and install the OS image to the device. See Transferring and Installing the OS Image 6 Inspect the device properties for the transferred and installed software. See Inspecting Device Properties for Transferred and Installed Software on page 130. 7 Disable FTP services for the UNC. See Disabling FTP Service on page 131. 3.8.1 Discovering a Device in the UNC When and where to use:

The discovery process allows the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) to manage the site devices. Once the device is installed, configured through the Configuration/Service Software (CSS), and security parameters are enabled, follow this procedure to discover the device. The configuration information can then be updated using this configuration management application. The UNC network management solution consists of two applications. Both the UNC Wizard and the VoyenceControl applications are used in this procedure. NOTICE: The names EMC Smarts Network Configuration Manager and VoyenceControl are used interchangeably for this product. Once the device is discovered in the UNC, the OS images and CSS configuration files can be loaded to add a device to a site, which then connects the site to the current ASTRO 25 zone core. Procedure:

1 Ensure that Domain Name Services (DNS) is functional on your system. DNS is supplied by a specific server application, which must be operational before you can discover the device. 2 Log on to the UNC Wizard from the Network Management (NM) client, by double-clicking the Internet Explorer icon on the desktop. The Internet Explorer browser opens. 3 In the Address field, enter: http://ucs-unc0<Y>.ucs:9443/UNCW where <Y> is the number of the UNC server (01 for primary core UNC server, and 02 for backup core UNC server). The UNC Wizard launches and a login dialog box appears. 4 Type the administrative user name and password. Click OK. The UNC Wizard appears. 5 From the list of available wizards on the left side, select Subnet Discovery. The right side of the window is updated with the Subnet Discovery form. 6 Select RF Site by clicking the Discovery Type drop-down list. 7 Enter the Zone ID and the Site ID. Click Submit. An auto-discovery job is created in the UNC Schedule Manager. 125 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 8 Log on to the UNC from the NM client by entering:

http://ucs-unc0<Y>.ucs where <Y> is the number of the UNC server (01 for primary core UNC server, and 02 for backup core UNC server). The UNC client launches and a login dialog box appears. 9 Type the administrative user name and password. Click OK. VoyenceControl launches. NOTICE: The names EMC Smarts Network Configuration Manager and VoyenceControl are used interchangeably for this product. 10 Press F7 (Schedule Manager). The Schedule Manager window appears in the UNC with the discovery jobs. 11 Verify that the Zone and Site containers include any devices discovered. IMPORTANT: No site devices should be in the Lost and Found folder. If any devices are in the folder, see the Unified Network Configurator manual for troubleshooting guidance. 12 In the UNC Wizard, verify the devices by selecting Channel under RF Site Level Configuration. If multiple zones exist, choose Zone. The device sites are listed, which means they are available for channel configuration. 3.8.2 Loading Device OS Images to the UNC Prerequisites: This procedure requires the Motorola Solutions device Operating System (OS) Image media. Locate the Transport OS Image media packaged with the Network Management media. When and where to use: This procedure loads the OS images for the devices for distribution through the Unified Network Configurator (UNC). Once OS images are distributed to the UNC, you can update the device Configuration/Service Software (CSS) configuration files to the UNC. Procedure:

1 Launch a Secure SHell (SSH) terminal server session in PuTTY to access the UNC Server Administration menu. See the Securing Protocols with SSH manual. 2 From the UNC Server Administration menu, select OS Images Administration. Press ENTER. 3 From the OS Images Administration menu, select Load new OS images. Press ENTER. A message appears indicating there are two methods for loading OS Images. 4 Insert the Motorola Solutions Device OS Images media into the CD/DVD-ROM drive of the server. The drive light starts blinking on the server. 5 When the drive light stops blinking, press ENTER. The OS images load on the UNC. 6 From the menu, select View OS Images. Press ENTER. The device software image appears. 126 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 7 From the menu, select Eject CD. Press ENTER. The media ejects from the drive on the server. 8 Remove the Motorola Solutions Device OS Images media from the CD/DVD-ROM drive of the server. 9 To log out of the server, press ENTER. The User Configuration Server Administration menu appears. 10 Press ENTER again. The prompt appears. 3.8.3 Loading Software to a Device NOTICE: These procedures are for a single device download. For a site download, see Software Download Manager on page 123. The following procedures describe how to load software images onto Unified Network Configurator

(UNC) and download and install this software to the device. Secure protocols for software download is the preferred approach to transfer operations. However, as a backup option, FTP service can be enabled before installing the software. 3.8.3.1 Enabling FTP Service Procedure:

When and where to use: Follow this procedure to enable FTP service before installing the OS software. 1 Launch a Secure Shell (SSH) terminal server session in PuTTY to access the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) Server Administration menu. See the Securing Protocols with SSH manual. 2 From the Server Administration menu, select Unix Administration. Press ENTER. 3 From the Unix Administration menu, select FTP Services. Press ENTER. 4 From the FTP Services menu, select Enable FTP service. Press ENTER. The FTP Services are enabled and available for software transfer and install operations. 3.8.3.2 Transferring and Installing the OS Image When and where to use: Use this procedure to download the OS from the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) to the device. Procedure:

1 On the Private Network Management (PNM) client where you set up VoyenceControl, double-

click the UNC shortcut on the desktop. 127 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation You can also paste the following address into an IE web browser: http://ucs-unc0<Y>.ucs, where <Y> is the number of the UNC server (01 for primary core UNC server, and 02 for backup core UNC server). Internet Explorer opens to the URL of the application server, and a VoyenceControl client session launches with the welcome page. Figure 50: VoyenceControl Welcome Page NOTICE: The names EMC Smarts Network Configuration Manager and VoyenceControl are used interchangeably for this product. 2 Click the launch VoyenceControl link. A VoyenceControl client session launches with the login window. Figure 51: VoyenceControl Login Window 3 Enter the User ID and Password. Click OK. The VoyenceControl Dashboard appears. 128 Figure 52: VoyenceControl Dashboard MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 4 In the left navigation pane, expand Networks, then select ASTRO 25 Radio Network, then Views. The list of options expands. 5 From the navigation pane, double-click Motorola <device>. The view opens and all currently discovered devices appear. 6 From the menu, select Tools OS Inventory. A list of the OS images appears. 7 Verify OS images loaded on the UNC server appear in the OS inventory. NOTICE: These images were automatically created during the Loading Device OS Images to the UNC on page 126 procedure. 8 Under Networks in the navigation pane, select one or more devices from the same device class by right-clicking the selections. 9 From the menu, select Update OS Image. 10 From the Select OS Image window, select Software Image. Click Next. 11 From the Update OS Image window, select each device that appears in the Selected Devices section. This action associates a version to a device instance. NOTICE: In most cases, the summary of device partitions is already set up and the values in step 11 through step 14 must be verified. 12 Select nvm partition from the Manage Partition for Device section. 129 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation NOTICE: Selecting nvm partition defines where the OS image is transferred and is the only choice for the device. 13 From the Selected Image section, select the image for this device. NOTICE: Ignore the Install and Copy check boxes. The Image Info tab is populated and informs the application which image to use. 14 Click Add. both. 16 Click Schedule. Submit. The Summary of Device Partitions for Device populates and confirms the proper setup. 15 Select the Device Options section, Software Operations, then choose transfer, install, or These selections indicate which operations occur when the job is executed. NOTICE: If transfer is chosen, select the install option later to complete the installation. If both is chosen, the software is transferred and installed. There are up to two resets of the device during installation. 17 From the Schedule Push Job window, configure the schedule information. Click Approve and The job is approved and can be viewed in the Schedule Manager window. NOTICE: If only Submit is chosen, the job must be approved later. 18 Verify the job status by pressing F7 (Schedule Manager). The Schedule Manager window appears in the UNC with the discovery jobs. 3.8.3.3 Inspecting Device Properties for Transferred and Installed Software When and where to use: When the software has been transferred and installed, follow this procedure to inspect the device properties before assuming the installation was a success and disabling FTP service Procedure:

1 From the Device view, right-click the device, select Pull, and then Pull Hardware Spec. The current software version information is updated in the Unified Network Configurator (UNC). NOTICE: Skip this step if a Pull All or Pull Hardware Spec has already occurred. 2 From the Device view, right-click on the device, and then choose Properties. The Device Properties window appears. NOTICE: Select the Properties icon to view the device properties appear directly within the Device view. 3 Choose the Configuration tab, and then the Hardware tab. 4 Double-click the Chassis object from the Physical Hardware properties. 130 MN003286A01-E Chapter 3: GTR 8000 Base Radio Installation 5 From the Chassis property tree, view the following properties and their values:

Bnk1:<device>: Transferred software in bank 1. Bnk2:<device>: Transferred software in bank 2.

<device>: Installed and Running Software. NOTICE: The Table format can be used (instead of the Diagram format) to view the Installed and Running Software in the Device view. 3.8.3.4 Disabling FTP Service Procedure:

When and where to use: Follow this procedure to disable the FTP service after the transfer and installation of the software is completed. 1 Launch a Secure SHell (SSH) terminal server session in PuTTY to access the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) UNC Server Administration menu. See the Securing Protocols with SSH manual. 2 From the UNC Server Administration menu, select Unix Administration. Press ENTER. 3 From the Unix Administration menu, select FTP Services. Press ENTER. 4 From the FTP Services menu, select Disable FTP service. Press ENTER. The FTP services are disabled and unavailable for software transfer and install operations. 5 To back out of the menus, press Q three times. 6 At the prompt, enter: exit to return to the previous menu. 7 To log out of the application, enter: exit. 8 Close the PuTTY connection. 131 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Chapter 4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Proper software/hardware configuration for the GTR 8000 Base Radios and subsystems require the following activities:

Updating factory-installed base radio application software Setting parameters in a configuration file stored on the GTR 8000 Base Radio that impacts both base radio and RF Distribution System (RFDS) functionality. This chapter details configuration procedures relating to the base radio. 4.1 Configuration Software Configuration of a device can be done on two software applications: Configuration/Service Software

(CSS) and Unified Network Configurator (UNC). is used to configure the parameters on the device. CSS can access devices remotely over the network, or locally through an Ethernet/serial connection to the service port on the device or through a LAN switch. CSS also can be used to view status information, equalize batteries, and check internal logs of the equipment at the site. See the CSS Online Help for configuration details. is a component of UNC used to configure the parameters of a site, subsite, and channel. See the UNC Wizard Online Help for configuration details. CSS UNC Wizard VoyenceControl is a component of UNC used to pull and push configurations and configure the parameters of the device. See the Unified Network Configurator manual for general information about using VoyenceControl functions. NOTICE: While it is possible to configure a conventional device using the UNC, it is preferable to use CSS because configuration dependencies are enforced. The UNC is not applicable for K core or non-networked sites. All parameters are programmed locally when the site is installed but not linked to a network. Test all parameters before making the site available. The ability to locally program provides the means to test the site before making it available for system operation. 4.2 Discovering a Device in the UNC When and where to use: Use these high-level steps to discover the devices in the Unified Network Configurator (UNC). See the Unified Network Configurator manual for details on discovering devices. Process:

1 Use the UNC Discovery Wizard to:

Discover the devices. Upload configurations for the devices. Generate changes for non-compliant devices. 132 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 2 Approve jobs (if any). 4.3 Security/Authentication Services If the device supports SNMPv3 protocol, a pop-up dialog box appears displaying the SNMPv3 Password Prompt when logging in to a device through Configuration/Service Software (CSS) using an Ethernet connection. For configuration details, see the Information Assurance Features Overview, Software Download Manager, and SNMPv3 manuals. See Figure 53: SNMPv3 Security Level Option Prompt on page 133. Figure 53: SNMPv3 Security Level Option Prompt A pop-up window appears displaying the File Transfer Access Services for CSS. Use this logon when communicating to a device through CSS using either an Ethernet or DB-9 Serial Port connection. See Figure 54: CSS Login Banner on page 134. 133 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Figure 54: CSS Login Banner 4.4 Device Configuration in CSS This section covers configuration of a device using the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). NOTICE: The IP address for the device is available through a serial port connection in the Tools Set IP Address from the CSS menu. 4.4.1 CSS Initial Device Configuration Process:

1 Perform the following configuration steps that require a serial connection. See Connecting Through a Serial Port Link on page 135. a Set the IP address and paring number of the device. See Setting the Device IP Address and Pairing Number in CSS on page 137. b Set the serial security services. See Setting the Serial Security Services in CSS on page 138. 2 Perform the following configuration steps that require an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. a Set the pairing number of the device. See Setting the BR/CM Pairing Number in CSS on page 142. b Set the current date and time. See Setting the Date and Time in CSS on page 143. c Change the SNMPv3 configuration and user credentials on a selected device in the site. See Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User Credentials in CSS on page 143. d Create, update, or delete an SNMPv3 user. See Adding or Modifying an SNMPv3 User in e Verify the SNMPv3 credentials. See Performing an SNMPv3 Connection Verification in CSS f Configure Domain Name Services (DNS). See Configuring DNS in CSS in the Authentication Services manual. g Set the Software Download (SWDL) transfer mode. See Setting the SWDL Transfer Mode in CSS on page 146. on page 146. CSS on page 147. 134 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration h Configure for Secure SHell (SSH). See Chapter 4, Configuring SSH for RF Site Devices and VPMs Using CSS in the Securing Protocols with SSH manual. i Enable RADIUS Authentication. See Chapter 7, Configuring RADIUS Sources and Parameters Using CSS in the Authentication Services manual. Make sure that the devices have been added to the RADIUS servers on the domain controllers as RADIUS clients. j Enable Centralized Authentication. See Chapter 7, Enabling/Disabling Centralized Authentication Using CSS in the Authentication Services manual. k Set the Local Cache Size for Centralized Authentication. See Chapter 7, Setting the Local Cache Size for Central Authentication Using CSS in the Authentication Services manual. l Customize the login banner text (optional). See Customizing the Login Banner in CSS on m Enable Centralized Event Logging (optional). See Chapter 6, Enabling/Disabling Centralized Event Logging on Devices Using CSS in the Centralized Event Logging manual. n Set the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Settings. See NTP Server Settings in CSS on 3 Set up the local Password Configuration (optional). See Setting the Local Password Configuration in CSS on page 149. 4 Continue to one of the following depending on the type of device you are configuring:

Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Trunked Simulcast) on Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Trunked Repeater) on Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (HPD) on page 151. Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio (Conventional) on page page 146. page 148. page 150 page 151. 152. 4.4.2 Connecting Through a Serial Port Link Prerequisites: This procedure assumes that the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) application is loaded on your service computer/laptop. See the Private Network Management Client manual. When and where to use: This procedure describes the steps required to connect through a serial port link to set the IP address of the device and to set the serial security services. Perform all other device function and feature configurations through an Ethernet port connection in the CSS. Procedure:

1 Connect a serial cable to a service computer/laptop running CSS, and the serial connector on the device module. The serial cable is an RS232, female DB-9 to male DB-9 straight through cable. If the service computer/laptop does not have a serial port, use a USB-to-serial converter external device. 2 Open the CSS application. 3 From the menu, select Tools Connection Configuration. The Connection Screen dialog box appears. 4 In the Connection Type area, select Serial. The Serial Settings area on the dialog box becomes enabled. 135 5 In the Serial Port field, select the communication port that matches the one selected on the 6 In the Baud Rate field, select the baud rate with which you want to communicate with the MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration service computer/laptop. device. Baud Rate 19200 7 Click Connect. A login/password prompt screen appears. Figure 55: CSS Login Banner 8 Provide the required credentials. Perform one of the following actions:

If a domain controller is available on the network, enter the Username and Password for the RADIUS service user account assigned to the netwadm group in the Active Directory. (The default service user is serviceuser.) If a domain controller is not available on the network, enter the Username and Password for the local bts_service account. If the Elevated Privileges Password field is active, enter the Elevated Privileges Password that was set up for this device. When accessing the device, if the default passwords do not work, the passwords may have been set to default values by a different system release of software. See "Resetting Device Passwords" in the CSS Online Help to reset the passwords to the current software release defaults. If Authentication Services are not enabled on a device, type any alphanumeric characters to populate the [Username, Password, and Elevated Privileges Password] fields, as they cannot be left blank. 9 To access the device and close the dialog box, click OK. The blank CSS main window appears. NOTICE: The Service menu is not available until you read the configuration file from the device using an Ethernet connection. 136 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 4.4.3 Serial Connection Configurations The following procedures set configuration parameters in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) using a serial connection. 4.4.3.1 Setting the Device IP Address and Pairing Number in CSS Prerequisites: Obtain the required credentials information (local service account password and elevated privileges password) to configure the site devices before proceeding. The user credentials information includes both the current and new credentials. Without the current credentials, access to the device or to the user credentials is denied. See Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting on page 218. NOTICE: Setting or changing the device IP Address causes the SNMPv3 configuration and user credentials to automatically reset. Procedure:

1 Connect to the device using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through a serial port link. See Connecting Through a Serial Port Link on page 135. 2 From the menu, select Tools Set IP Address/BR_CM Pairing Number. NOTICE: If the device is not in a voting or simulcast IP only topology, the menu item is shown as Set IP Address/Box Number. The Set IP Address and Base Radio/Comparator Pairing Number dialog box appears or the Set IP Address and Box Number dialog box appears. 3 In the Device IP Address field, enter the device IP address. Click Set Device IP Address. 4 In a voting or simulcast IP only topology, enter the device pairing number. Click Set BR/CM Pairing Number. 5 Click OK to close the dialog box. 6 Click Reset to initiate a hardware restart. SNMPv3 user credentials reset to their factory default values. 8 To reconfigure the SNMPv3 user credentials, see Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User 7 Click Close to close the dialog box. Credentials in CSS on page 143. 4.4.3.2 Pairing To a Comparator When operating in a voting, multicast, or IP simulcast configuration, base radios must be paired to comparators using the BR/CM Pairing Number. The BR/CM Pairing Number for the base radio and comparator is used to create an IP multicast group that allows the base radio and comparator to talk to each other. The base radio listens for messages that the comparator sends to establish an IP connection with all the paired base radios. When the base radio receives the message from the comparator, it extracts the comparator IP address from the message and uses it to send received voice and data back to the comparator. Communication from the comparator to the paired base radio always uses a multicast IP address. Communication between the paired base radio to the comparator always uses a unicast IP address. 137 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration The multicast IP address is calculated based on the base radio and comparator pairing number and the formula as follows:

For Conventional Systems:

224.10.100.nnn, where nnn is: (2 * channel number) - 1 for channel number between [1, 127]

224.10.101.nnn, where nnn is: (2 * (channel number 127) - 1) for a channel number between [128, 200]

For Trunked Multi-Site Systems:

224.100.102.nnn, where nnn is: 100 + (2 * channel number) - 1 NOTICE: The BR/CM Pairing Number is not used for circuit (V.24 or 4-wire/V.24 hybrid link) configurations. See Setting the Device IP Address and Pairing Number in CSS on page 137 to set the pairing number. The pairing number can also be set using an Ethernet connection. See Setting the BR/CM Pairing Number in CSS on page 142. 4.4.3.3 Serial Security Services in CSS The Serial Security Services in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) enables the secure services and changes the device password. NOTICE: The Serial Security Services must be set before changing the SNMPv3 configuration and user credentials on a selected device in the site. Before enabling this parameter, any login and password may be used on the File Transfer Access Services login window to access a device. After Authentication Services are enabled, the login and password provided is checked against the following authentication sources:

Stored password RF site devices support a configurable password for the Local Service and Elevated Privileges accounts. The password is verified against the stored password for these accounts. Built-in logins and passwords RF site devices support built-in login/password combinations for a login by services such as the software downloads. Only certain software download login names are authenticated in this way. Centralized Authentication For authentication through centralized accounts instead of Local Service, Elevated Privileges, and built-in user accounts, use the Configure the Centralized Authentication parameter in CSS for the Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol (CHAP). See Enabling/Disabling Centralized Authentication with CSS in the Authentication Services manual. This procedure requires an Ethernet connection to the device being configured. 4.4.3.3.1 Setting the Serial Security Services in CSS Prerequisites: Obtain the required credentials information (local service account password and elevated privileges password) to configure the site devices before proceeding. The user credentials information includes both the current and new credentials. Without the current credentials, you cannot access the device and cannot change the user credentials. See Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting on page 218. Changing to the incorrect user credentials may lead to not being able to access the device through Configuration/Service Software (CSS) or Secure Shell (SSH). 138 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Procedure:

Port Link on page 135.

(Serial). 1 Connect to the device using CSS through a serial port link. See Connecting Through a Serial 2 From the menu, select Security Device Security Configuration Security Services 3 From the Security Services Configuration dialog box, set the Test Application Configuration field according to your organizational policies. The recommended secure configuration is Disabled. 4 Set the Authentication Services field to Enabled. Click Apply. This field enables local authentication services and must be enabled as a prerequisite for centralized authentication. 5 Set the Password Reset Mechanism field. This field allows a reset of the passwords for two built-in device accounts to their default values. 6 To update the password for the device, select either Service Account or Elevated Privilege from the drop-down list. Click Update password. 7 In the Change Account Password dialog box, enter the old password, then enter a new password, and confirm the new password before clicking Change Password. 8 To save the new password, click OK. The Change Account Password dialog box closes. 4.4.3.4 Resetting SNMPv3 User Credentials to Factory Defaults in CSS Prerequisites: Obtain the required credentials information (local service account password and elevated privileges password) to configure the site devices before proceeding. The user credentials information includes both the current and new credentials. Without the current credentials, you cannot access the device and cannot change the user credentials. To obtain the keys for resetting either password or SNMPv3 passphrases for the device, contact Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC). Changing to the incorrect user credentials may lead to not being able to access the device through Configuration/Service Software (CSS) or Secure SHell (SSH). Procedure:

Port Link on page 135.

(Serial). 1 Connect to the device using CSS through a serial port link. See Connecting Through a Serial 2 From the menu, select Security SNMPv3 Configuration Reset SNMPv3 Configuration The Reset SNMPv3 Configuration dialog box opens. 3 Click Reset SMPv3 Configuration. The SNMPv3 configuration is reset to factory defaults in the device. 4 Click Exit. The Reset SNMPv3 Configuration dialog box closes. 5 To reboot the device for the SNMPv3 user credentials to take effect, perform the following actions:

Pairing Number. a From the menu, select Tools Set IP Address/Box Number or Set IP Address/BR_CM 139 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration b In the dialog box, click Reset. The device reboots. 6 Proceed to Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User Credentials in CSS on page 143. 4.4.4 Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link Prerequisites: Load Configuration/Service Software (CSS) on the service computer/laptop. See the Private Network Management Client manual if necessary or see the instructions in the CSS DVD jewel box for instructions on loading the CSS onto the service computer/laptop. When and where to use: Use the Ethernet port link to configure all CSS parameters for the device. Procedure:

1 Connect a service computer/laptop to a device using one of the following methods:

NOTICE: Normally the service computer/laptop is connected through the local site switch or remotely through the network. Do not connect directly to the Ethernet service port of the device unless downloading software or individually configuring the device. a Remote Connection to Network or Local Site Switch:

1 Connect remotely to the network or to the local site switch using a straight-through an Ethernet straight-through Ethernet cable. 2 If connecting to the local site switch, configure the Ethernet interface of the service computer/laptop to a Speed/Duplex setting of Auto-Negotiate. Set the IP address of the service computer/laptop to an unused IP address on the subnet of the local site. The IP address on the subnet varies depending on the site and zone numbers. b Direct Connection to Front Ethernet Service Port:

1 Connect directly to the front panel Ethernet service port with a straight-through Ethernet cable. 2 If connecting to a base radio or receiver, set the IP address of the service computer/laptop to 192.168.x, where x is any number between 2 and 253. 3 If connecting to a site controller or reference distribution module, set the IP address of the service computer/laptop to an unused IP address on the subnet of the local site. The IP address on the subnet varies depending on the site and zone numbers. 4 Configure the Ethernet interface of the service computer/laptop to a Speed/Duplex setting of Auto-Negotiate NOTICE: The comparator does not support a direct connection to the front panel Ethernet service port. The connection must be done remotely through the network or through the local site switch. 2 Open the CSS application. 3 From the menu, select Tools Connection Configuration. 4 From the Connection Screen, in the Connection Type area, select Ethernet. 5 If connected directly to the front panel Ethernet service port of a base radio or receiver, click Front Panel Ethernet and go to step 7. 6 Perform one of the following actions:

140 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration If Then If you know the IP address for the de-

vice, perform the following actions:

vice. b Click Connect. c Go to step 7. perform the following actions:

a In the Device IP Address field, enter the IP address for the de-

Trunked Device: If you do not know the IP address, but know the system identification of the device (the zone, physical site, sub-

site, and device ID of the device), Conventional De-

vice: If you do not know the IP ad-

dress, a Click Device Name Wizard to open the Device Name Wizard dialog box. b From the Device drop-down list, select the relevant device type. c In the Zone, Physical Site, Subsite, and Device ID fields, enter the proper values. NOTICE: Some fields, such as Subsite, do not allow entries for some devices. Therefore, select the device first. d Click OK. The Domain Name Services (DNS) information of the device au-

tomatically appears in the Device IP Address field. e Click Connect. f Go to step 7. perform the following actions:

a Establish a serial connection to the device. See Connecting Through a Serial Port Link on page 135. b For a base radio, receiver, or comparator, from the menu, select Tools Set IP Address/BR_CM Pairing Number. For a site controller or reference distribution module, select Set IP Ad-

dress/Box Number. c In the Device IP Address field, record the IP address. d Re-establish an Ethernet connection and repeat steps 1 through e In the Device IP Address field, enter the IP address for the de-

4. vice. f Go to step 7. 7 To make the connection, click Connect. If this device is SNMPv3-capable, the SNMPv3 Passphrase Prompt dialog box appears. 141 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Figure 56: SNMPv3 Passphrase Prompt 8 In the SNMPv3 Passphrase Prompt dialog box, enter the User Information and Passphrase Information. Click OK. If Authentication Services are not enabled on a device, click OK when the dialog box appears. 9 From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. The parameters download from the device to the service computer/laptop. When the download is complete, the CSS main window opens. Use the map on the left side of the screen to view configuration information for the device. 4.4.5 Ethernet Connection Configurations The following procedures set configuration parameters in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) using an Ethernet connection. 4.4.5.1 Setting the BR/CM Pairing Number in CSS When and where to use:

Set the pairing number for the base radio, receiver, and comparator using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) when operating in a voting, multicast, or simulcast IP configuration using an Ethernet connection. 1 Connect to the device using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service BR/CM Pairing Number. Procedure:

142 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 3 Enter the pairing number. Click OK. The pairing number is set. 4.4.5.2 Setting the Date and Time in CSS This procedure provides the date and time to the device. When and where to use: During installation, the date and time is set through an Ethernet cable connected directly to the Ethernet port of the device. After installation, this procedure may be performed remotely. NOTICE: If a power outage occurs, the device does not retain the date and time settings. Procedure:

1 Connect to the device using CSS through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Tools Set Device Date and Time. 3 Enter the current date and time. Click OK. The date and time are set. 4.4.5.3 Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User Credentials in CSS Prerequisites: Obtain the required SNMPv3 credentials information (Authentication passphrase, Encryption passphrase, and Authoritative Engine ID) to configure the device before proceeding. The user credentials information includes both the current and new credentials. Without the current credentials, you cannot access the device and cannot change the user credentials. See Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting on page 218. Changing to the incorrect user credentials may lead to not being able to access the device from the Unified Network Configurator

(UNC), or for the device to be unable to send alarms to the Unified Event Manager (UEM) (for fault management). When and where to use: This procedure changes the SNMPv3 configuration and user credentials from Configuration/Service Software (CSS) on a selected device in the site. For more information on this feature, see the SNMPv3 manual. NOTICE: During installation, perform this procedure through an Ethernet cable connected directly to the Ethernet port of the device. After installation, this procedure may be performed remotely from CSS. Procedure:

Ethernet Port Link on page 140.

(Ethernet). 1 Connect to the device using CSS through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an 2 From the menu, select Security SNMPv3 Configuration Configure SNMPv3 Users The SNMPv3 Passphrase Prompt dialog box appears with MotoAdmin as the selected SNMPv3 user. 3 In the SNMPv3 Passphrase Prompt, enter the appropriate Authentication and Encryption Passphrases in the text fields. 143 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration NOTICE: When accessing the device for the first time, if the default passphrases do not work, the passphrases may have been set to default values by a different system release of software. See Reset SNMPv3 Configuration (Serial) in the CSS Online Help to reset the passphrases to the current software release defaults. 4 If connecting remotely through the network to a different device, perform one of the following actions. Otherwise, go to step 5. If Then If you know the IP address for the de-

vice, If you do not know the IP address, but know the system identification of the device (the zone, physical site, sub-

site, and device ID of the device), a In the Device IP Address field, enter the IP address for the perform the following actions:

device. b Go to step 5. perform the following actions:

a Click Device Name Wizard. b From the Device list box, select the desired device type. c In the Zone, Physical Site, Subsite, and Device ID fields, en-

ter the proper values. NOTICE: Some fields, such as Subsite, do not allow entries for some devices. Therefore, select the de-

vice first. The Domain Name Services (DNS) information of the device automatically appears in the Device IP Address field. d Click OK. e Click Connect. f Go to step 5. 5 Click OK. If the passphrases are authenticated, the Configure SNMPv3 Users window appears. If the connection fails, a message appears. 6 To update the SNMPv3 credentials for a selected user, from the User Information section, select a Username in the Username drop-down list. The CSS retrieves the current credentials from the device for a selected user. NOTICE: Depending on the user selected, some fields on this dialog box become read-

only or disabled. Click Cancel at any time to discard changes made to a selected user. 7 To change or update the SNMPv3 security level for a selected user, from the User Information section, select the security level in the Security Level drop-down list. The security level options are:

NoAuthNoPriv Neither the Authentication Passphrase nor Encryption Passphrase are needed for communicating with the device. AuthNoPriv Authentication Passphrase is needed; but no Encryption Passphrase is needed for communicating with the device. 144 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Both Authentication Passphrase and Encryption Passphrase are needed for communicating with the device. The User Status field reflects the current operational status of the selected SNMPv3 User. The Status Types include:

AuthPriv Active Not in service Not ready Not present User configured on the device; the Update and Delete options are enabled. User configured on the device; the Update and Delete options are enabled. User configured on the device; the Update and Delete options are enabled. Not present on the device; the Create option is enabled. The security level of the selected user is set. 8 To change the Authentication Passphrase for the selected SNMPv3 user, if applicable to the selected security level, perform the following actions:

a From the Authentication Passphrase section, enter the passphrase into the Old Passphrase field. NOTICE: If you do not know the passphrase, select the I do not remember old passphrase check box. b Enter the new passphrase into the New Passphrase field. NOTICE: The passphrase must be between 8 and 64 characters in length and consist of upper or lowercase alphanumeric characters (excluding the @ # $ ^ or _ characters). c Enter the same new passphrase into the Confirm New Passphrase field. 9 To change the encryption passphrase for the selected SNMPv3 user, if applicable to the selected security level, perform the following actions:

a From the Encryption Passphrase section, enter the old passphrase into the Old Passphrase field. NOTICE: If you do not know the passphrase, select the I do not remember old passphrase check box. b Enter the new passphrase into the New Passphrase field. c Enter the same new passphrase into the Confirm New Passphrase field. 10 To change the Authoritative Engine Identifier, applicable to MotoInformA and MotorInformB users only, perform the following actions:

a From the Authoritative Engine ID section, select the desired current engine ID from the Current Engine ID drop-down list. b In the New Engine ID field, enter the new engine ID. NOTICE: The new engine ID must be between 1 and 27 characters and comply with the Engine ID Domain Name Syntax. 11 To create, update, or delete SNMPv3 users, go to Adding or Modifying an SNMPv3 User in CSS on page 146. 145 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 4.4.5.3.1 Adding or Modifying an SNMPv3 User in CSS When and where to use: Use this procedure to create, update, or delete an SNMPv3 user from the Configure SNMPv3 Users window. Procedure:

one of the following:

1 From the Configure SNMPv3 Users window, to add or modify the selected SNMPv3 user, click Create: Creates a user when the status is Not Present. Update: Updates an existing user. Delete: Removes an existing user. A Confirmation dialog box appears and prompts if you want to continue. 2 Click Yes. The Processing Requests dialog box appears and processes the request. A green square X indicates OK and a red square X indicates failure. 3 After reviewing the processing status, click OK. NOTICE: If you encounter any errors, go back to the appropriate step and correct the information entered. 4 Repeat these steps for any SNMPv3 users you wish to create, update, or delete. 5 Click Cancel to exit the Configure SNMPv3 Users window. The Configure SNMPv3 Users window closes, and the CSS main window returns. 4.4.5.3.2 Performing an SNMPv3 Connection Verification in CSS When and where to use: When the SNMPv3 user credentials have been created, modified, or deleted, ensure that the device is properly configured for SNMPv3. Follow this procedure to verify the SNMPv3 connection. Procedure:

1 Connect to the device using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 When the passphrase prompt screen opens, select the configured security level and enter the required passphrases. 3 If the connection was successful, click OK. 4.4.5.4 Customizing the Login Banner in CSS This procedure describes how to edit the login banner security notice. 1 Connect to the device using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Security Device Security Configuration Remote Access/Login Procedure:

Banner (Ethernet). 146 3 From the Remote Access/Login Banner screen, Remote Access Configuration tab, click the MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Login Banner tab. 4 Edit the text of the banner. 5 Click one of the following:

Refresh: re-reads the original Login Banner text. Apply: saves the changes and keep the screen open. OK: saves the changes and close the screen. Cancel: closes the screen without saving the changes. 4.4.5.5 Setting the SWDL Transfer Mode in CSS This procedure sets the Software Download Manager (SWDL) transfer mode. When and where to use: Follow this procedure to set the SWDL transfer mode to Ftp (clear) or Sftp

(secure) before performing a software download on the device. NOTICE: The SWDL transfer mode must be set to Ftp (clear) if any PSC 9600, STR 3000, QUANTAR, or ASTRO-TAC 9600 device is present at a site. Procedure:

1 Connect to the device using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Security Device Security Configuration Remote Access/Login Banner (Ethernet). The Remote Access/Login Banner screen appears displaying the Remote Access Configuration tab. 147 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Figure 57: Remote Access Configuration Tab 3 In the Software Download Transfer Mode (Requested) field, choose either Ftp (clear) or Sftp

(secure). Click OK. NOTICE: Secure Shell Service (Requested) and Secure FTP (Requested) are automatically set to Enabled and grayed out when you choose Sftp. 4.4.5.6 Manager IP Address Settings in CSS When IP addresses exceed the allowed total, remove the IP addresses that are no longer used at the site. This removal allows the Unified Event Manager (UEM) to be identified as the current manager and handles traps for the device. See Clearing Manager IP Addresses in CSS in the CSS Online Help for removing these IP addresses. 4.4.5.7 NTP Server Settings in CSS Network Time Protocol (NTP) provides a clock synchronization mechanism for various network devices and computers, and allows the NTP server to provide the date and time synchronization for a particular device. The NTP server IP address must be entered on the Manager / NTP Definition screen. For security purposes, the base radio can restrict NTP messages from only the site controller. This restriction can be accomplished by configuring two site controller IP addresses into the NTP Server IP Address fields on the base radio. See Configuring the NTP Servers in the CSS Online Help for defining, editing, and removing these settings. 148 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 4.4.5.8 Setting the Local Password Configuration in CSS When and where to use: Use this procedure to set the complexity requirements and controls for the local service account password. The updated password criteria is enforced on the next password change for the device local service account. Password Configuration is an optional feature. For information, see Password Configuration" in the CSS Online Help. Procedure:

1 Connect to the device using Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet port link. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 In the navigation pane, click the Password Configuration element. The Password Configuration window appears. Figure 58: Password Configuration Window 3 Complete the following fields:

Minimum Password Length This field allows you to enter a value as the minimum length for the password. The minimum can be between 8 and 255 characters, with a default of 10 characters. Number of Required Special Characters This field allows you to enter a value for the required number of special characters which must be included in the password. The value can be between 0 and 255, with a default of 1. Number of Required Numeric Characters This field allows you to enter a value for the required number of numeric characters which must be included in the password. The value can be between 0 and 255, with a default of 2. Number of Required Uppercase Characters This field allows you to enter a value for the required number of uppercase alphabetic characters which must be included in the password. The value can be between 0 and 255, with a default of 2. Number of Required Lowercase Characters This field allows you to enter a value for the required number of lowercase alphabetic characters which must be included in the password. The value can be between 0 and 255, with a default of 2. Number of Consecutive Characters This field allows you to enter the maximum number of consecutive repeated characters permitted in the password. Set Values to Default This field returns all fields to their system default values. 149 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration Password Aging Time [days]

This field allows you to enter a value between 0 and 65535 for the maximum number of days a local password is valid. After the Password Aging Time has elapsed, the password must be changed. The default value is 0. Change Interval Limit [days]

This field allows you to enter a value between 0 and 65535 for the number of days which must elapse before a local password can be changed. The default value is 1. 4.4.6 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio

(Trunked Simulcast) Prerequisites:

Before proceeding with this process, complete the initial configuration of the device in CSS Initial Device Configuration on page 134. For configuration parameters on each field for a trunked simulcast GTR 8000 Base Radio, see Multi-

Site or Simulcast Subsystem in the CSS Online Help. Process:

1 Connect to the base radio through an Ethernet port link and then read the configuration file from the base radio. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 In the System tree, click System and complete the fields. 3 In the System tree, click Site and complete the fields. 4 In the System tree, click Channel and complete the fields. 5 In the System tree, click Subsite and complete the fields. 6 In the System tree, click Configuration and complete the fields on all four tabs. NOTICE: As part of Remote Multicoupler (RMC) configuration, set the DIP switches on the RMC/Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) modules. See Setting RMC System Gain on page 154. 7 In the System tree, click Network Services Configuration and complete the fields on the three tabs. NOTICE: For configuration details for DNS and RADIUS Services, see the Authentication Services manual. For configuration details for SYSLOG Services, see the Centralized Event Logging manual. 8 In the System tree, click Password Configuration and complete the fields. NOTICE: Password Configuration is only required if you have passwords entered for local accounts and sets the password complexity and controls. For details on password complexity and controls, see Password Configuration in CSS Online Help. 9 In the System tree, click Enhanced Data Configuration to view the fields. 10 From the menu, select File Save As to save the configuration data to a new archive file or select File Save to overwrite the existing archive file. IMPORTANT: Save any configuration changes to a local or network drive so that if the base radios transceiver module fails, you can load your settings to a replacement base radio transceiver. If the configuration file is not saved to a local or network drive, repeat the setup steps after replacing a transceiver module. 11 From the menu, select File Write Configuration to Device to write the configuration data to the base radio. 150 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 4.4.7 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio

(Trunked Repeater) Prerequisites:

Before proceeding with this process, complete the initial configuration of the device in CSS Initial Device Configuration on page 134. For configuration parameters for a trunked Repeater GTR 8000 Base Radio, see Repeater Site Subsystem in the CSS Online Help. Process:

1 Connect to the base radio through an Ethernet port link and then read the configuration file from the base radio. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 In the System tree, click System and complete the fields. 3 In the System tree, click Zone and complete the fields. 4 In the System tree, click Site and complete the fields. 5 In the System tree, click Channel and complete the fields. 6 In the System tree, click Configuration and complete the fields on all four tabs. NOTICE: As part of Remote Multicoupler (RMC) configuration, set the DIP switches on the RMC/Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) modules.. See Setting RMC System Gain on page 154. 7 In the System tree, click Network Services Configuration and complete the fields on the three tabs. NOTICE: For configuration details for DNS and RADIUS Services, see the Authentication Services manual. For configuration details for SYSLOG Services, see the Centralized Event Logging manual. 8 In the System tree, click Password Configuration and complete the fields. NOTICE: Password Configuration is only required if you have passwords entered for local accounts and sets the password complexity and controls. For details on password complexity and controls, see Password Configuration in CSS Online Help. 9 In the System tree, click Enhanced Data Configuration to view the fields. 10 From the menu, select File Save As to save the configuration data to a new archive file, or select File Save to overwrite the existing archive file. IMPORTANT: Be sure to save any configuration changes to a local or network drive so that if the base radios transceiver module fails, you can load your settings to a replacement base radio transceiver. If the configuration file is not saved to a local or network drive, you will need to repeat the setup steps after replacing a transceiver module. 11 From the menu, select File Write Configuration to Device to write the configuration data to the base radio. 4.4.8 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio

(HPD) Prerequisites:

Before proceeding with this process, complete the initial configuration of the device in CSS Initial Device Configuration on page 134. 151 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration For configuration parameters for an HPD GTR 8000 Base Radio, see HPD Remote/Expandable Site in the CSS Online Help. Process:

1 Connect to the base radio through an Ethernet port link and then read the configuration file from the base radio. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 In the System tree, click System and complete the field. 3 In the System tree, click Site and complete the fields. 4 In the System tree, click Channel and complete the fields. 5 In the System tree, click Configuration and complete the fields on all four tabs. NOTICE: As part of Remote Multicoupler (RMC) configuration, set the DIP switches on the RMC/Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) modules. See Setting RMC System Gain on page 154. 6 In the System tree, click Network Services Configuration and complete the fields on the three tabs. NOTICE: For configuration details for DNS and RADIUS Services, see the Authentication Services manual. For configuration details for SYSLOG Services, see the Centralized Event Logging manual. 7 In the System tree, click Password Configuration and complete the fields. NOTICE: Password Configuration is only required if you have passwords entered for local accounts and sets the password complexity and controls. For details on password complexity and controls, see Password Configuration in CSS Online Help. 8 From the menu, select File Save As to save the configuration data to a new archive file, or select File Save to overwrite the existing archive file. IMPORTANT: Be sure to save any configuration changes to a local or network drive so that if the base radio fails, you can load your settings to a replacement base radio. If the configuration file is not saved to a local or network drive, you will need to repeat the setup steps after replacing a base radio. 9 From the menu, select File Write Configuration to Device to write the configuration data to the base radio. 4.4.9 Setting CSS Configuration Parameters for the GTR 8000 Base Radio

(Conventional) Prerequisites:

The Ethernet Type field for a standalone conventional base radio must be set to 10 Mbit, half-duplex. Before proceeding with this process, complete the initial configuration of the device in CSS Initial Device Configuration on page 134. For configuration parameters for a conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio, see the following in the CSS Online Help:

Analog-only, Digital-only, or Mixed Mode GTR 8000 Base Radio: Conventional Site - ASTRO 1 Connect to the base radio through an Ethernet port link and then read the configuration file from the base radio. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 In the System tree, click Site and complete the fields. 7.12 and Later Process:

152 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 3 In the System tree, click Hardware Configuration and complete the fields on the two tabs. NOTICE: As part of Remote Multicoupler (RMC) configuration, you must set the DIP switches on the RMC/Low Noise Amplifier (LNA) modules. See Setting RMC System Gain on page 154. 4 In the System tree, click Options and complete the fields. 5 In the System tree, click Infrastructure Interface and complete the fields on the three tabs. 6 In the System tree, click Channel Configuration and complete the fields. 7 In the System tree, click Repeater Configuration in the System tree and complete the fields. 8 In the System tree, click Receiver Scan and complete the fields. 9 In the System tree, click Repeater Access and complete the fields. 10 In the System tree, click WildCard Tables and complete the fields on the three tabs. 11 In the System tree, click Network Services Configuration and complete the fields on the three tabs. NOTICE: For configuration details for RADIUS Services, see the Authentication Services manual. For configuration details for SYSLOG Services, see the Centralized Event Logging manual. 12 In the System tree, click Password Configuration and complete the fields. NOTICE: Password Configuration is only required if you have passwords entered for local accounts and sets the password complexity and controls. For details on password complexity and controls, see Password Configuration in CSS Online Help. 13 From the menu, select File Save As to save the configuration data to a new archive file, or select File Save to overwrite the existing archive file. IMPORTANT: Be sure to save any configuration changes to a local or network drive so that if the base radio fails, you can load your settings to a replacement base radio. If the configuration file is not saved to a local or network drive, you will need to repeat the setup steps after replacing a base radio. 14 From the menu, select File Write Configuration to Device to write the configuration data to the base radio. 4.4.10 Configuring Tx Power Values and Battery Type When and where to use: As part of the site configuration process, the Battery Type, Tx Power Level

(Battery Backup), and Tx Power Out on the Hardware Configuration tab in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) must be configured. Procedure:

1 Connect to the device through an Ethernet port link and read the configuration file from the device. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the navigation tree, select Configuration. The Configuration window appears. 3 Select the Hardware Configuration tab. 4 In the Tx Power Out (Watts) field, enter a value. 5 In the Tx Power Level Battery Backup (Watts) field, enter a value. 153 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 6 Select the Battery Type (manufacturer and model, or select the generic listing for the class of 7 From the menu, select File Save, or selectFile Save As to save the configuration to an archive on your local or network drive. 8 From the menu, select File Write Configuration to Device to write the configuration to the battery). device. 4.4.11 Setting RMC System Gain When and where to use:

The Receive Multicoupler (RMC) system gain must be set up according to your GTR 8000 Base Radio configuration. NOTICE: For base radios, calculate and enter a value for system gain. Calculate the system gain from the receiver multicoupler input to the base radios Rx input. If there is no multicoupler, enter zero. Procedure:

1 Open Configuration/Service Software (CSS). 2 Connect to the device through an Ethernet port link. Read the configuration file from the device. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 3 From the menu, select File Read Configuration from Device. 4 From the navigation tree, select Configuration. 5 Select the Receive Multicoupler (RMC) Configuration tab. 6 In the GTR 8000 Configuration field, select GTR 8000 Base Radio Standalone. 7 In the System Gain field, enter a dB value. 8 From the menu, select File Save or File Save As to save the RMC configuration to an archive on your local or network drive. 9 From the menu, select File Write Configuration to Device to write the configuration data to the base radios. The RMCs automatically use the resulting system gain. In addition, an appropriate transceiver attenuation is automatically calculated and saved in the configuration file. 4.5 Configuring Centralized Authentication on Devices in VoyenceControl When and where to use: This process provides the procedures for configuring centralized authentication on devices using the VoyenceControl component of the Unified Network Configurator

(UNC) application. NOTICE: VoyenceControl does not apply for a K core or non-networked site. 1 Configure Domain Name Service (DNS) on the device. See DNS Configuration on RF Site and VPM Devices with VoyenceControl in the Authentication Services manual. Process:

154 MN003286A01-E Chapter 4: GTR 8000 Base Radio Configuration 2 Configure Authentication Sources for the device. See Centralized Authentication Configuration on RF Site and VPM Devices with VoyenceControl" in the Authentication Services manual. 3 Configure RADIUS parameters for the device. See Configuring RADIUS on RF Site and VPM Devices with VoyenceControl in the Authentication Services manual. 4 Set the Local Cache Size for Centralized Authentication for the device. See Setting the Local Cache Size for Central Authentication on RF Site and VPM Devices with VoyenceControl in the Authentication Services manual. 5 Enable/Disable Centralized Authentication for the device. See Centralized Authentication Configuration on RF Site and VPM Devices with VoyenceControl in the Authentication Services manual. 6 Enable/Disable Centralized Event Logging for the device. See Enabling/Disabling Centralized Event Logging on RF Site Devices and VPMs with EMC Smarts in the Centralized Event Logging manual. 155 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Chapter 5 GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Your Motorola Solutions Field Representative or Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) can advise you on optimization activities required for your system, if any. See Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. This chapter contains optimization procedures and recommended settings relating to GTR 8000 Base Radio. 5.1 Aligning the Internal Frequency Reference Oscillator The transceiver option card within a base radio provides an internal 10 MHz frequency reference which can be used as the primary or backup frequency reference source for the device. For conventional base radio operation, it also provides the analog interfaces and wildcard I/Os. After a base radio is installed or after the transceiver option card is replaced, align the internal frequency reference oscillator. Align the transceiver option card internal frequency reference oscillator to within 1 ppb (parts per billion). The measuring equipment used to make this alignment must be accurate to within 1 ppb. This accuracy typically requires test equipment with a double oven or a Rubidium reference oscillator. NOTICE: The base radio must be turned on for at least one week before the internal frequency reference oscillator is aligned. Align the internal frequency reference oscillator for an Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator (OCXO) transceiver option card:

Upon installation of the base radio for all bands. Once every two years after installation for 700/800 MHz systems. Once every five years after installation for UHF systems. VHF systems do not require alignment after initial installation. Align the internal frequency reference oscillator for a Temperature Compensated Crystal Oscillator

(TCXO) transceiver option card:

Upon installation of the base radio for UHF. Every year after installation for UHF. The internal frequency reference oscillator can be aligned using two methods: manual alignment or auto alignment. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. 156 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.1.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Time and Frequency Inputs Various external time and frequency inputs can be provided to the base radio for normal operation or for Internal Frequency Reference Oscillator alignment. The following table provides a list of acceptable input signal types and levels for each input port. Table 46: Time and Frequency Inputs Input Port Frequency Waveform Level Ext Freq Ref 5 MHz Sine 2.65.3 Vpp Ext Freq Ref 5 MHz Square Ext Freq Ref 10 MHz Sine 2.65.3 Vpp Ext Freq Ref 10 MHz Square Ext Freq Ref 20 MHz Sine 2.65.3 Vpp Ext Freq Ref 20 MHz Square Ext Freq Ref Square 2.65.3 Vpp 5 MHz/

1PPS*

4555% duty cy-

cle 45-55% duty cy-

cle 4555% duty cy-

cle Impe-

dance 100k ohms 100k ohms 100k ohms 100k ohms 100k ohms 100k ohms 100k ohms 100k ohms Note AC coupled AC coupled AC coupled AC coupled AC coupled AC coupled AC coupled;

25% modula-

tion 1pps ar-

rives on 75%

duty cycle DC coupled 1PPS 1PPS Pulse 2.65.3 Vpp Front Panel Ext Freq Ref Front Panel Ext Freq Ref Front Panel Ext Freq Ref Front Panel Ext Freq Ref Front Panel Ext Freq Ref 5 MHz Sine 50 ohms AC coupled 5 MHz Square 50 ohms AC coupled 10 MHz Sine 50 ohms AC coupled 10 MHz Square 50 ohms AC coupled 25 Vpp; 1018 dBm 4555% duty cy-

cle 25 Vpp; 1018 dBm 4555% duty cy-

cle 5 MHz/

1PPS*

Square 2.65.3 Vpp 50 ohms

* 25% modulation, 1PPS arrives on 75% duty cycle. NOTICE: The Front Panel EXT FREQ REF connection is the Frequency Calibrator (BNC connector) on the transceiver module. AC coupled;

25% modula-

tion 1pps ar-

rives on 75%

duty cycle 157 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.2 Battery Equalization Battery Equalization configures the power supply to set the proper charge and capacity for the storage batteries connected to the base radio. Sites equipped with storage batteries that provide power in case of primary power failure require that the battery cells be equalized periodically. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. NOTICE: Some batteries do not require equalization. See the battery manufacturer recommendations. 5.3 ASTRO Simulcast Alignment (Trunked Operation) ASTRO 25 Simulcast Alignment is used to enter a Launch Time Offset value (range 0.0 to 1000.0 usec), store the value in the base radio, and initiate a simulcast test pattern. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. 5.4 ASTRO/Analog Simulcast Alignment (Conventional Operation) In an ASTRO 25 simulcast subsystem, all station transmitters are synchronized to a 1 pulse per second (1PPS) signal from a Global Navigation Satellite System (GNSS) receiver. The 1PPS signal provides a common time reference for each of the transmitters. The ASTRO 25 signaling information arriving at the station transmitter includes timestamps that specify the transmit offset delay for the voice and data transmissions. The ASTRO/Analog Alignment screen allows adjustment of the overlap coverage areas, and to specify a launch time offset value, with a 0.1 s resolution. This value is added to the arriving launch time value to provide an adjusted launch time. The specified ASTRO 25 simulcast transmit offset delay value applies only to ASTRO 25 simulcast subsystems and is considered optional. The default offset value is 0 (zero), causing no adjustment to the launch time specified by the arriving timestamp value. For Analog Simulcast, the Transmit Offset Delay merely delays the Analog Simulcast Audio to provide the adjustment in the overlap coverage areas. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. 5.5 Carrier Squelch Alignment A Carrier Squelch (CSQ) Alignment is typically performed at an RF level which corresponds to 12 dB SINAD, or an RF level which corresponds to 20 dB quieting, or any other RF level selected. The CSQ Alignment screen facilitates the measurement of 12 dB SINAD for the base radio under testing by allowing the Rx Qualifiers to be set to Open. When the Rx Qualifiers are set to Open, receive audio is gated to the WL2 wireline port or to the speaker, regardless of the RF input level. The preferred SINAD measurement port is the WL2 wireline port; however, the speaker can also be used. 158 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization When measuring SINAD, the pre-emphasis and high pass filters are set as they would be for analog voice operation. Because the channel characteristics are different, this procedure allows for CSQ Alignment and is done for both 12.5 kHz and 25 kHz channel bandwidth. If the station is configured for only one channel bandwidth, there is no need to perform a CSQ Alignment for the other bandwidth. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. 5.6 Tx Wireline Alignment Tx Wireline Alignment is used to set the levels to result in 60% system deviation for both Wireline Level Line 1(WL1) and Wireline Level Line 3 (WL3) and for setting the Wireline Squelch levels. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. 5.7 Rx Wireline Alignment Rx Wireline Alignment is used only for a base radio that processes analog receive audio and is connected with a 2- or 4-wire link to a console or a comparator in an analog only topology or an ASTRO 25 Analog/Mixed mode topology. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. The Metering Screen displays current values for power supply and transmitter metering points on multi-

site base radios, site repeater base radios, HPD base radios, and digital conventional base radios. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Metering Screen in the CSS Online Help for the procedures for testing the transmitter. 5.8 Transmitter Testing 5.9 Tuning a Preselector The optional VHF or UHF preselector assembly is mounted on the back of a base radio. The preselector assembly is a 3-pole (UHF) or a 5-pole (VHF) bandpass filter equipped with tuning slugs to adjust the passband corresponding to the operating frequencies of the base radio. If the preselector assembly is replaced in the field, or if the base radio operating frequencies are modified, the preselector must be field tuned. IMPORTANT: Tuning for best SINAD or Bit Error Rate (BER) response DOES NOT result in optimum tuning of the preselector assembly. Use this field tuning procedure to obtain optimum preselector performance. The following test equipment is required to properly tune the preselector assembly:

RF Signal Generator - Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor (or equivalent) Dip/peak Monitor - HP435B Powermeter (or equivalent) with an HP8484A sensitive power head, Boonton Model 92E with BNC input, or Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor using the spectrum analyzer function 159 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Torque driver capable of delivering 12 in-lb of torque and 10 mm deep well socket Tuning probe - Motorola Solutions Part No. 3082059X01, p/o TRN4083A tuning kit Flat-blade screwdriver NOTICE: An R2600 Communications Analyzer can both generate and measure simultaneously. A service monitor may be used for either the generator or the monitor function, but not both simultaneously. When using service monitor as the signal generator, RF signal must be taken from the antenna port. 5.9.1 VHF Tuning Procedures VHF tuning procedures include the following:

Calculating Proper VHF Alignment Frequency on page 160 Preparing the Equipment for VHF Alignment on page 161 Tuning The VHF Preselector on page 161 5.9.1.1 Calculating Proper VHF Alignment Frequency Use either Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 160 or Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies on page 161 to calculate the VHF alignment frequency generated by the signal generator. 5.9.1.1.1 Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency When and where to use: For a base radio with a single receive frequency, calculate the frequency of the alignment signal as follows:

Procedure:

receive frequency. frequency. 1 From the site documentation or the Configuration/Service Software (CSS), determine the 2 If the frequency is 148 MHz or 156 MHz, subtract 250 kHz. Otherwise, note the actual Step example: If the receive frequency is 138.575 MHz, subtract 250 kHz because the frequency is less than 148 MHz: 138.575 MHz 250 kHz =138.325 MHz. 3 If the preselector is Range 1 (136154 MHz), determine the alignment frequency as follows:

If frequency (from Step 2) is > 152 MHz, alignment frequency = 152 MHz. Otherwise, use actual frequency from Step 2. 4 If the preselector is Range 2 (150174 MHz), determine the alignment frequency as follows:

If the frequency (from Step 2) is < 152 MHz, alignment frequency = 151 0.75 MHz. If frequency (from Step 2) is > 172 MHz, alignment frequency =172 MHz. Otherwise, use actual frequency from Step 2. 160 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.9.1.1.2 Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies When and where to use: For base radio with multiple receive frequencies, calculate the frequency of the alignment signal as follows:

1 From the site documentation or the Configuration/Service Software (CSS), note the receive Procedure:

frequency for each channel. 2 Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows:

Fmid = (Fhighest + Flowest) 2 3 Using Fmid in place of the receive frequency, perform steps 3 and 4 from Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 160. 5.9.1.2 Preparing the Equipment for VHF Alignment Perform the following procedure to prepare the equipment for VHF alignment. 1 Ensure the base radio (with preselector assembly) is installed in a functional station cage Procedure:

equipped with a power supply module. 2 Detune the preselector as follows:

a If the alignment frequency (calculated in Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 160 or Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies on page 161) is greater than 148 MHz (Range 1) or 156 MHz

(Range 2), turn the five tuning screws clockwise until 1/8 inch protrudes past each of the tension nuts. b If the alignment frequency is less than or equal to 148 MHz (Range 1) or 156 MHz (Range 2), turn the five tuning screws counterclockwise until 3/4 inch protrudes past each of the tension nuts. 3 Using the torque driver and deep well socket, tighten the five tension nuts on the adjustment screws to 6 in-lb. 4 See Figure 59: Preselector Tuning VHF on page 162. 5.9.1.3 Tuning The VHF Preselector NOTICE: When tuning for peak or dip, turn the tuning screw 1/2 turn past the peak or dip to verify that you have obtained a true peak or dip. After you have found true peak or dip, turn the screw back to the location of the original peak or dip. See the figure for the location of the tuning screws and cavity probe holes. 161 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 59: Preselector Tuning VHF Procedure:

1 Turn the base radio power supply ON (to provide a 50 Ohm termination). 2 Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated in Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 160 or Calculating The VHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies on page 161. Set the level to +5 dBm. 3 Insert tuning probe into cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 1 for a PEAK. 4 Leave tuning probe in cavity H1 and adjust tuning screw 2 for a DIP. 5 Insert tuning probe into cavity H2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP. 6 Insert tuning probe into cavity H3 and adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP. 7 Insert tuning probe into cavity H4. Decrease output from the signal generator to 5 dBm. 8 Adjust tuning screw 5 for a DIP. Then turn tuning screw 5 an additional 1/4 turn counterclockwise. (DIP is not as sharp for screw 5 as it was for screws 2 through 4.) 5.9.2 UHF Tuning Procedures UHF tuning procedures include the following:

Calculating Proper UHF Alignment Frequency on page 163 Preparing the Equipment for UHF Alignment on page 164 Tuning The UHF Preselector on page 164 162 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.9.2.1 Calculating Proper UHF Alignment Frequency Use either Calculating The UHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 163 or Calculating the UHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies on page 163 to calculate the alignment frequency generated by the signal generator. 5.9.2.1.1 Calculating The UHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency When and where to use: For base radio with a single receive frequency, calculate the frequency of the alignment signal as follows:

Procedure:

1 From the site documentation or the Configuration/Service Software (CSS), determine the receive frequency. Add 200 kHz. 2 If the frequency is 380435 MHz, determine the alignment frequency as follows:

If frequency (from Step 1) is >431 MHz, alignment frequency = 431 MHz. If frequency (from Step 1) is <382 MHz, alignment frequency = 382 MHz. Otherwise, use actual frequency from Step 1. 3 If the frequency is 435470 MHz, determine the alignment frequency as follows:

If the frequency (from Step 1) is >468 MHz, alignment frequency = 468 MHz. If frequency (from Step 1) is <440 MHz, alignment frequency = 440 MHz. Otherwise, use actual frequency from Step 1. 4 If the frequency is 470524 MHz, determine the alignment frequency as follows:

If the frequency (from Step 1) is >518 MHz, alignment frequency = 518 MHz. If frequency (from Step 1) is <472 MHz, alignment frequency = 472 MHz. Otherwise, use actual frequency from Step 1. 5.9.2.1.2 Calculating the UHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies When and where to use: For base radio with multiple receive frequencies, calculate the frequency of the alignment signal as follows:

1 From the site documentation or the Configuration/Service Software (CSS), note the receive Procedure:

frequency for each channel. 2 Calculate a midpoint frequency as follows:

Fmid = (Fhighest + Flowest) 2 3 Using Fmid in place of the receive frequency, perform steps 1 through 4 from Calculating The UHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 163. 163 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.9.2.2 Preparing the Equipment for UHF Alignment Perform the following procedure to prepare the equipment for UHF alignment. Procedure:

screws. 1 Ensure the base radio (with preselector assembly) is installed in a functional station cage equipped with a power supply module. 2 Using the torque driver and deep well socket, loosen the three tension nuts on the adjustment 3 Detune the preselector by turning tuning screws 3 and 4 clockwise until they bottom out. Be careful not to apply more than 3 in-lb of torque to prevent warping preselector cover and housing. 4 See Figure 60: Preselector Tuning UHF on page 164. 5.9.2.3 Tuning The UHF Preselector NOTICE: When tuning for peak or dip, turn the tuning screw 1/2 turn past the peak or dip to verify that you have obtained a true peak or dip. After you have found true peak or dip, turn the screw back to the location of the original peak or dip. See the figure for the location of the tuning screws and cavity probe holes. Figure 60: Preselector Tuning UHF 1 Turn the power supply ON (to provide a 50 Ohm termination). 2 Adjust the signal generator to the frequency calculated in Calculating The UHF Alignment Frequency For a Single Receive Frequency on page 163 or Calculating the UHF Alignment Frequency for Multiple Receive Frequencies on page 163. Set the level to +5 dBm. 3 Insert the tuning probe into cavity U2 and adjust tuning screw 2 for a PEAK. Procedure:

164 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 4 Tighten the tension nut on tuning screw 2 to at least 12 in-lb and fine-tune tuning screw 2 for a 5 Keep the tuning probe in cavity U2 and adjust tuning screw 3 for a DIP. 6 Tighten the tension nut on tuning screw 3 to at least 12 in-lb and fine-tune tuning screw 2 for a 7 Insert tuning probe into cavity U3. Decrease output from the signal generator to 5 dBm. 8 Adjust tuning screw 4 for a DIP. 9 Tighten the tension nut on tuning screw 4 to at least 12 in-lb and fine-tune tuning screw 4 for a PEAK. DIP. DIP. Duplexer modules shipped with base radios are tuned at the factory. If a duplexer must be replaced in the field, the unit must be installed and tuned specifically to the transmit and receive frequency pair for the particular base radio. 5.10 Tuning a Duplexer 5.10.1 Field Tuning Overview NOTICE: These tuning procedures are valid for channels with a bandwidth of 200 kHz or less. If bandwidth is more than 200 kHz, the duplexer must be tuned by the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC). The duplexer module is composed of three low-pass/high-notch cavities and three high-pass/low-notch cavities. Each set of three cavities provides bandpass filtering for either the transmit RF signal or the receive RF signal. In general, the duplexer must be tuned so that the transmit cavity set passes the transmit signal and rejects the receive signal; concurrently, the receive cavity set must be tuned to pass the receive signal and reject the transmit signal. Tuning is performed by injecting RF signals and making tuning adjustments (using the tuning rods and trimmer screws) while monitoring for maximum or minimum readings on the RF millivoltmeter. Field tuning the duplexer module requires the following general adjustments:

Tune high-pass/low-notch cavities for maximum pass and reject response Tune low-pass/high-notch cavities for maximum pass and reject response Check high-pass/low-notch and low-pass/high-notch cavities for insertion loss Check high-pass/low-notch and low-pass/high-notch cavities for isolation 5.10.2 Required Test Equipment Tuning of the duplexer module requires the following test equipment:

RF Signal Generator - Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor (or equivalent) RF Millivoltmeter (Boonton 92E or equivalent) 50 Ohm N-type terminator Tuning tool (5/32-inch x 4-inch screwdriver) (UHF) Male-to-Females N-Type "T" connector (UG-107B/U or equivalent) (VHF) Slotted screwdriver (VHF) 3/32-inch Allen wrench (VHF) 165 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Tuning tool (thin blade) (VHF) N-to-N bullet connector (UG29A/U or equivalent) 7/16-inch Nutdriver (UHF) 7/16-inch Open End Wrench (UHF) N-to-BNC Adapter (UG349A/U) N-to-N Connector (UG57B/U) 5.10.3 Tuning a 700/800 MHz Duplexer No field tuning is needed on a 700 MHz or 800 MHz duplexer. The duplexers are pre-tuned to operate over the entire sub-band. 5.10.4 Tuning a VHF Duplexer The following procedures are most easily performed with the duplexer module removed from the rack or cabinet. Know the transmit and receive frequencies for the particular base radio before beginning. If the duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not meet specifications for return loss, insertion loss, and/or isolation, the duplexer must be returned to the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) for repair. 5.10.4.1 VHF Duplexer Tuning Setup Perform the tasks in Setting Up for VHF Duplexer Tuning on page 167 before tuning the VHF duplexer module. See Figure 61: VHF Duplexer Tuning Setup on page 167. 166 Figure 61: VHF Duplexer Tuning Setup MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.1.1 Setting Up for VHF Duplexer Tuning Procedure:

1 Disconnect the six N-type connectors from each cavity. 2 For each cavity, unscrew and remove trimmer screw dust covers (9). 3 Using an Allen wrench, loosen the tuning rod locking screws (6). 167 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.2 VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up Figure 62: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonator 5.10.4.2.1 Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 62: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonator on page 168. 2 Push or pull tuning rod for cavity #1 to obtain a PEAK reading on the millivoltmeter 3 Using the Allen wrench, tighten the locking screw. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cavities 2 and 3. 168 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.3 VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up Figure 63: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonator 5.10.4.3.1 Tuning VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 63: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer High Pass Resonator on page 169. 2 Push or pull tuning rod for cavity #4 to obtain a PEAK reading on the millivoltmeter 3 Using the Allen wrench, tighten the locking screw. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cavities 5 and 6. 169 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.4 VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up Figure 64: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies 5.10.4.4.1 Tuning VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 64: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies on page 170. 2 Using the tuning tool, adjust trimmer screws for cavity # 1 to obtain minimum reading on millivoltmeter. (Adjust trimmer screws equally to obtain minimum. Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading.) 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for cavities 2 and 3. 170 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.5 VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up Figure 65: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies 5.10.4.5.1 Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 65: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning VHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies on page 171. 2 Using the tuning tool, adjust trimmer screws for cavity # 4 to obtain minimum reading on millivoltmeter. (Adjust trimmer screw to obtain minimum. Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading.) 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 for cavities 5 and 6. 171 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.6 VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Verification Set Up Figure 66: Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Test Equipment 172 Figure 67: Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.6.1 Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Procedure:

1 Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 66: Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Test Equipment on page 172. 2 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter. 3 Connect the duplexer cable assembly and test equipment to the duplexer as shown in Figure 67:

Verifying VHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly on page 173. 4 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter. 5 Subtract the absolute number noted in step 2 from the number noted in step 4. The difference should be less than 1.3 dB to meet specification for insertion loss. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for Low-Pass/High-Notch cavities with the following exceptions:

a Set the service monitor to Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is lower. 173 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization b Connect service monitor to Low Pass duplexer input (cavity # 1). c Connect terminator to cavity #6. 5.10.4.7 VHF Duplexer Isolation Verification Set Up Figure 68: Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Test Equipment 174 Figure 69: Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.4.7.1 Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Procedure:

1 Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 68: Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Test Equipment on page 174. 2 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the service monitor. 3 Connect the test equipment to the duplexer as shown in Figure 69: Verifying VHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly on page 175. 4 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the service monitor. (If no number is displayed, consider isolation to be greater than 105 dB, which exceeds the specification.) 5 Subtract the absolute number noted in step 4 from the number noted in step 2. The difference should be less than 75 dB to meet specification for isolation. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for Low-Pass/High-Notch cavities with the following exceptions:

a Set service monitor for Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is higher. b Connect service monitor to Low Pass duplexer input (cavity #1). 175 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization c Connect terminator to cavity #6. 5.10.4.8 Checking VHF Duplexer After Tuning Procedure:

1 Ensure all locking screws are tight. 2 Ensure dust covers on all trimmer capacitors are installed. 3 Ensure all tuning rod locking screws (6) are tight. 5.10.5 Tuning a UHF Duplexer The following procedures are most easily performed with the duplexer module removed from the rack or cabinet. Be sure to note the transmit and receive frequencies for the particular base radio before beginning. If the duplexer module is tuned according to instructions and does not meet specifications for return loss, insertion loss, and/or isolation, the duplexer must be returned to the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) for repair. 5.10.5.1 UHF Duplexer Tuning Set Up Figure 70: UHF Duplexer Tuning Setup 5.10.5.1.1 Setting Up for UHF Duplexer Tuning Procedure:

1 Disconnect N-type connectors (12) and remove cables (6) from cavities. See Figure 70: UHF Duplexer Tuning Setup on page 176. 2 For each cavity (6), using an open-end wrench, loosen locknuts (2 per cavity). 176 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.2 UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up Figure 71: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonator 5.10.5.2.1 Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonators Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 71: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Pass Resonator on page 177. 2 Using a nut driver, adjust the pass adjustment screw for cavity # 1 to obtain a PEAK reading on 3 Using an open-end wrench, carefully tighten the lock nut ensuring the pass adjustment screw the millivoltmeter. does not shift position. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cavities 2 and 3. 177 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.3 UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators Tuning Set Up Figure 72: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonator 5.10.5.3.1 Tuning UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonators Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 72: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer High Pass Resonator on page 178. 2 Using a nut driver, adjust the pass adjustment screw for cavity #4 to obtain a PEAK reading on 3 Using an open-end wrench, carefully tighten the lock nut ensuring the pass adjustment screw the millivoltmeter. does not shift position. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cavities 5 and 6. 178 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.4 UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up Figure 73: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies 5.10.5.4.1 Tuning UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 73: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer High Notch Loop Assemblies on page 179. 2 Using a screwdriver, adjust the notch adjustment screw for cavity # 1 to obtain a minimum reading on the millivoltmeter. (Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading.) 3 Using an open-end wrench, carefully tighten the lock nut ensuring the notch adjustment screw does not shift position. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cavities 2 and 3. 179 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.5 UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies Tuning Set Up Figure 74: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies 5.10.5.5.1 Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies Procedure:

1 Set up test equipment as shown in Figure 74: Test Equipment Set Up for Tuning UHF Duplexer Low Notch Loop Assemblies on page 180. 2 Using a screwdriver, adjust the notch adjustment screw for cavity #4 to obtain a minimum reading on the millivoltmeter. (Reduce the range on the millivoltmeter as necessary to reach true minimum reading.) 3 Using an open-end wrench, carefully tighten the lock nut ensuring the notch adjustment screw does not shift position. 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for cavities 5 and 6. 180 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.6 UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Verification Set Up Figure 75: Verifying UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Test Equipment Figure 76: Verify UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly 181 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.6.1 Verifying UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Procedure:

1 Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 75: Verifying UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Test Equipment on page 181. 2 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter. 3 Connect the duplexer cable assembly and test equipment to the duplexer as shown in Figure 76:

Verify UHF Duplexer Insertion Loss Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly on page 181. 4 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the millivoltmeter. 5 Subtract the absolute number noted in step 2 from the number noted in step 4. The difference should be less than 1.3 dB to meet specification for Insertion Loss. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for Low-Pass/High-Notch cavities with the following exceptions:

a Set service monitor to Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is lower. b Connect millivoltmeter to Low Pass duplexer input (cavity #1). c Connect terminator to cavity #6. 5.10.5.7 UHF Duplexer Isolation Verification Set Up Figure 77: Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Test Equipment 182 Figure 78: Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.7.1 Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Procedure:

1 Connect test equipment as shown in Figure 77: Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Test Equipment on page 182. 2 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the service monitor. 3 Connect the test equipment to the duplexer as shown in Figure 78: Verifying UHF Duplexer Isolation Connecting Duplexer Cable Assembly on page 183. 4 Observe and note the level in dBm as shown on the service monitor. (If no number is displayed, consider isolation to be greater than 105 dB, which exceeds the specification.) 5 Subtract the absolute number noted in step 4 from the number noted in step 2. The difference should be higher than 100 dB to meet specification for isolation. 6 Repeat steps 1 through 5 for Low-Pass/High-Notch cavities with the following exceptions:

a Set service monitor for Rx or Tx frequency, whichever is higher. b Connect service monitor to Low Pass duplexer input (cavity #1). c Connect terminator to cavity #6. 183 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5.10.5.8 Checking UHF Duplexer After Tuning Procedure:

1 Ensure all notch adjustment lock nuts (6) are tight. 2 Ensure all pass adjustment lock nuts (6) are tight. 5.11 Testing the GTR 8000 Base Radio Performance with a Service Monitor for Integrated Voice and Data The service monitor is used to test and measure the transmitter and receiver characteristics of the base radio. The Service Monitor may be connected to a base radio to perform tests and measurements designed to determine whether the equipment is operating within specifications. The sections that follow contain procedures performed when you first set up your system, and can be scheduled on a regular basis as part of the maintenance policies of your organization. Topics covered include:

Deviation Standards (Digital Operation) on page 184 Monitoring the Power Supply Module on page 185 Verifying Receiver Performance for FDMA Operation on page 185 Verifying Receiver Performance (Analog Operation) on page 190 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-Test Method) (IV and D) on page 192 Monitoring the Transmitter Metering Points on page 193 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Digital Operation) on page 193 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Analog Operation) on page 195 5.11.1 Deviation Standards (Digital Operation) NOTICE: These specifications allow a tolerance of 10%. However, because the accuracy of the service monitor is only 5%, the allowable tolerance in the measured deviation is 5% and not 10%. Table 47: Deviation Standards for ASTRO 25 System Test Patterns Minimum Devia-

Nominal Devia-

Maximum Devia-

Signal low signal deviation tion 0.84 kHz 2.91 kHz 2.91 kHz sow signal wide pulse deviation undetermined standard deviation 2.55 kHz standard wide pulse deviation undetermined V.52 wide pulse deviation undetermined C4FM wide pulse deviation undetermined V.52 deviation C4FM deviation 184 tion 0.93 kHz 1.00 kHz 2.83 kHz 3.00 kHz 3.23 kHz 3.00 kHz 3.23 kHz 3.00 kHz tion 1.02 kHz undetermined 3.11 kHz undetermined 3.55 kHz undetermined 3.55 kHz undetermined MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Minimum Devia-

Nominal Devia-

Maximum Devia-

Signal tion GNSS test pattern - simulcast undetermined ASTRO 25 system voice 3.24 kHz ASTRO 25 system wide pulse undetermined tion 3.00 kHz 3.60 kHz 3.00 kHz tion undetermined 3.96 kHz undetermined 5.11.2 Monitoring the Power Supply Module Perform the following procedure to monitor the power supply. Procedure:

1 Connect to the base radio in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Metering Screens. The Metering Screen window opens on the Power Supply tab. Figure 79: Metering Screen Window 5.11.3 Verifying Receiver Performance for FDMA Operation When and where to use:

Use this procedure to verify receiver performance by measuring the Bit Error Rate (BER) and Received Signal Strength Indication (RSSI) for digital operation. Procedure:

1 Make the following connections to the base radio:

a Disconnect the BNC antenna cable (or N connector if preselector is present) from the receive antenna Port. 2 Set up the service monitor:

b Connect the service monitor GEN port to the base radio Antenna Port. a Set modulation to Project 25 (C4FM) with a Standard 1011 test pattern. b Set the service analyzer to generate at the receive frequency. c Set the RF level an initial value of -47 dBm. 185 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 3 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 4 From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. 5 Select the ASTRO BER RSSI Report tab. 6 If the base radio is not in service mode perform the following, otherwise go to step 7 a Click Change to Service Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen as described in step 4. 7 Set up the test in CSS:

a In the Pattern Type field, select 1011 Hz (FDMA). b In the Sampling Period (sec) list box, enter the number of required seconds. The time specifies the window over which the BER is calculated. c For BER measurement, in the Rx Branch for BER Test field, select the receive branch. The available selections for Rx Branch for BER Test are dependent on the set Pattern Type. 8 Measure the BER and RSSI:

a Click Start BER Measurement or Start RSSI Measurement. The Test And Measurement Screen dialog box displays the following results:

BER results in percentage RSSI results expressed in dBm. NOTICE: With the initial setting of the service monitor set for a carrier level of -47 dBm, you should expect a BER of 0.0 % and an RSSI level between -49 dBm and -45 dBm. Compensate for the loss of the cable connecting the service monitor to the base radio. NOTICE: If the receiver is inhibited, RSSI displays a meaningless value. b To create a log file for the BER and RSSI measurement, click Start Log. The Log Save As window appears. c Change the RF level and read the BER and RSSI again at the level appropriate for the base radio. The value should be less than 5%. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40 for the appropriate value. d Key the transmitter in the base radio and readjust the generator output level until 5% BER is indicated on the service monitor. Record this level. Less than 1 dB of degradation should occur due to the transmitters being keyed. e Dekey the transmitter. f Click Stop BER Measurement or Stop RSSI Measurement to stop the test. 9 If Rx B is used as a backup and the site is not TDMA:

a Disconnect the test cable from the generator to Rx A at the base radio and connect it to Rx B. 186 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization b Increase the generate level to -47 dBm. c Wait for Branch A to fail. Alarms may be generated during testing. 1 This can take up to two (2) minutes. 2 CSS Channel tab Time to Failure (sec) field controls the time to fail. d Repeat step 8. 10 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio into Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 11 Remove and restore the following connections to the base radio:

a Remove the service monitor GEN port connection from the base radio Antenna Port. b Restore the antenna connection to the Receive Antenna Port. 5.11.4 Verifying Receiver Performance in TTA Operation This procedure explains how to verify receiver performance in a system where a Tower Top Amplifier

(TTA) is present. Consult with any documentation that is specific to your system for the value of TTA Reserve Gain. If no information is available, use the following guidelines:

For most situations, the TTA Reserve Gain should be in the 5 dB to 10 dB range. In the absence of guidance specific to your system, 7.5 dB is a useable value for TTA Reserve Gain. NOTICE: This procedure for TTA testing is valid only for FDMA operation. An entirely different procedure for TTA testing is required for TDMA operation. Contact your system administrator for guidance, then contact your Motorola Solutions representative for assistance. The Receive path attenuators must be configured before performing this part of the procedure. The Rx path to the Rx antenna on the tower must be complete. When and where to use:

Use this procedure to verify receiver performance in a system where a Tower Top Amplifier (TTA) is present. Procedure:

1 Perform test setup:

a Configure the analyzer to generate an STD1011 pattern. b Connect the Analyzer Gen port (3900) or the RF Generator Out port (S412E) to the TTA Test Port using a TNC-m (3900) or N-m (S412E) to BNC-m test cable with known loss. Record the cable loss value on the T tab, Test Cable #4. c Configure the TTA so that the Antenna port is terminated in a 50 load. If the TTA controller has a time out feature for the termination, make sure you periodically reset the TTA termination as needed. 2 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 3 If the base radio is not in service mode perform the following, otherwise go to the next step. 187 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization a From the CSS menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Service Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. d Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen. 4 Initiate TTA testing:

a On the Test And Measurement Screen, select the ASTRO BER RSSI Report tab. b In the Pattern Type field, select Project 25. c In the Sampling Period (sec) list box, enter 1 for the required seconds. d Set the Analyzer Generate Frequency equal to the Base Radio Rx Frequency. 5 Test the Rx Noise Level with the TTA terminated:

a Turn the analyzer generator OFF. b In CSS, click Start RSSI Measurement. c Record the RSSI Value in the RSSI Level Terminated field of the FDMA Chan sheet. This Rx Noise Level is a relative value and used for future comparisons. 6 Test the Rx RSSI Test Port Reference Level with the TTA terminated:

a Turn the analyzer generator ON. b Establish an Analyzer Generate RF Level that produces an RSSI Level of -90.0 dBm. c Record the Analyzer Generate RF Level in the Gen Level Reference field of the FDMA Chan sheet. The sheet calculates the Actual Reference Level. d In CSS, click Stop RSSI Measurement. The Actual Reference Level is a relative value used for future comparisons to assist in troubleshooting. This test establishes a known reference that is about 30 dB above the typical noise floor, which minimizes the contribution of noise to the measurement and is a better indicator of the gain through the receive system. Testing at the sensitivity level is a function of the carrier to noise ratio. Noise has a much bigger impact when testing at the sensitivity level. The goal of this test is to give you the information to determine if you have a gain issue or a noise issue when troubleshooting a receive problem. 7 Test the Rx Sensitivity with the TTA terminated:

a In CSS, click Start BER Measurement. b Adjust the Analyzer Generate RF Level for a 5% 0.25% BER. c Record the Analyzer Generate RF Level in the Gen Level Terminated field of the FDMA Chan sheet. d In CSS, click Stop BER Measurement. e Click Start RSSI Measurement. f Record the RSSI (dBm) value in the RSSI Sensitivity field of the results sheet. 188 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization g Click Stop RSSI Measurement. The Test Result Sheet calculates the Actual Sensitivity Term using Sensitivity Terminated Test Cable Loss - TTA Test Port Cable Loss - TTA Test Port Coupling Loss. This result is the reference used to determine site degradation or de-sense in the following tests. 8 Test Rx De-sense for TTA Normal without other transmitters keyed. The degradation is < 2 dB

@ 700/800/900 MHz, < 6 dB @ 450 MHz, or < 10 dB @ 150 MHz. CAUTION: This test and the following Rx De-sense TTA Normal with Transmitters Keyed test cannot be performed accurately if the channel is in use within the coverage area of the site (for example, a legacy system waiting for cutover). a Configure the TTA so that the antenna port is connected to the antenna (normal operation). b In CSS, click Start BER Measurement. c If needed, readjust the Analyzer Generate RF Level for 5% 0.25% BER. Watch the CSS BER for about 1 minute. d Record the Analyzer Generate RF Level in the Gen Lvl Desense no Tx field of the result sheet. The difference between this generator RF level and the level recorded in the Rx Sensitivity with the TTA Terminated test is the site degradation/de-sense. NOTICE: If the BER reading is not stable, there is an external interference or a variable noise floor. Make a note on the Test Result Sheet that Channel X BER went to Y% while performing this test. The worksheet calculates the Degradation no Tx value. The degradation should be less than specified at the beginning of this step. If the degradation is higher than recommended, consult with your system administrator to determine what the impact could have on talk-in coverage. The Gen Lvl Desense no Tx level from this test becomes the benchmark for future PM checks. 9 Test Rx De-sense for TTA Normal with transmitters keyed. The degradation is < 2 dB @

700/800/900 MHz, < 6 dB @ 450 MHz, or < 10 dB @ 150 MHz. This test is optional for 700/800/900 MHz. CAUTION: This test cannot be performed if the RF channel under test OR any of the RF channels being keyed up are in use with an operating system in the same coverage area. a Key up the transmitters at the site. WARNING: Verify that you have removed the power sensor from the Tx path before keying up multiple transmitters. b If needed, readjust the Analyzer Generate RF Level for 5% 0.25% BER. c Record the Analyzer Generate RF Level in the Gen Lvl Desense w/Tx field of the FDMA Chan sheet. d De-key the transmitters at the site. e In CSS, click Stop RSSI Measurement. The result sheet calculates the Degradation with Tx value. If the degradation is higher than recommended, consult with the System Engineer to determine what the impact could have on talk-in coverage. 10 Test the Rx Noise Level with the TTA normal. This test establishes the noise floor of the receive system:

a Turn the analyzer generator OFF. 189 b In CSS, click Start RSSI Measurement. c Record the CSS RSSI Value in the RSSI Level Antenna field of the FDMA Chan sheet. 11 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio into Normal Mode, as follows:

The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization d Click Stop RSSI Measurement. This Rx Noise Level is a relative value. a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. 12 Disconnect the Analyzer from the TTA. 5.11.4.1 Effective Receiver Sensitivity The result sheet calculates the Effective Sensitivity (ERS) as the maximum of Gen Lvl Desense no Tx or Gen Lvl Desense w/Tx, Test Cable #4 loss - TTA Test Port Cable Loss - TTA Test Port Coupling Loss. Be sure to discuss this actual value with your system administrator to verify that there are no impacts to the system talk-in coverage. Channel-to-channel variations should be within 2 dB. If this site is utilizing two Rx antennas in a fallback (not diversity) configuration, perform all the steps in Verifying Receiver Performance in TTA Operation on page 187 to verify that Rx B is functional. If using a second TTA, connect to the second TTA test port. Leave the 1st TTA test port disconnected. For a Dual Diversity TTA, disconnect the A side from the receive distribution system so that no signal is present at the Rx A connection on the rear of the GTR 8000 Base Radio or the junction panel of the GTR 8000 Expandable Site Subsystem. Fail Branch A by applying a high-level signal to Branch B and wait for Branch A to fail. Create a second Chan Result sheet by copying the original and labeling it Chan x x Fallback Rx. Ensure that the ERS for Rx B meets the coverage requirements too. 5.11.5 Verify Receiver Performance for APCO TDMA Operation See chapter 5 in the Dynamic Dual Mode for TDMA Operation Feature Guide manual for TDMA testing using the Aeroflex service monitor. To perform a self-test of the receivers sensitivity, see Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-Test Method) (IV and D) on page 192. 5.11.6 Verifying Receiver Performance (Analog Operation) When and where to use:

Use this procedure to verify receiver performance by measuring the receiver sensitivity (SINAD) for an analog base radio. 190 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization NOTICE: This procedure uses an internal SINAD in the base radio. If a field technician chooses to use a service monitor as an external SINAD meter, see SINAD Measurement Procedure

(measured by Service Monitor) within Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens Carrier Squelch Alignment tab in the CSS Online Help. Procedure:

1 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Alignment Screens. 3 Optional: If the base radio is not already in Service Mode, place in Service Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Service Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Alignment Screen as described in step 2. 4 Select the Carrier Squelch Alignment tab. 5 Make the following connections to the base radio:

a Disconnect the BNC antenna cable or N connector if a preselector is present from the b Connect the service monitor GEN port to the base radios Antenna Port with a BNC Receive Antenna Port. connector. 6 Set up the service monitor. a For 25 kHz channels, set the modulation to 1 kHz tone at 3 kHz deviation. b For 12.5 kHz channels, set the modulation to 1 kHz tone at 1.5 kHz deviation. c Set the service monitor to generate at the receive frequency. d Set the RF level an initial value of 80 dBm. 7 To measure 25 kHz channel SINAD, click 25 kHz. To measure 12.5 kHz channel SINAD, click 12.5 kHz. 8 Select the SINAD measurement box. 9 Click Start SINAD Measurement. The SINAD Measurement Value box displays wait, and after 10 seconds starts to display the SINAD results in dB. NOTICE: With the initial setting of the service monitor, set for a carrier level of 80 dBm, expect a SINAD of >26 dB. Compensate for the loss of the cable connecting the service monitor to the base radio. If the receiver is inhibited, SINAD displays a meaningless value. 10 Change the service monitor RF level and read the SINAD again until the value is 12 dB. NOTICE: When the SINAD value is close to 12 dB, wait 10 seconds after changing the RF signal generator level. The base radio needs 10 seconds to stabilize the SINAD measurement. Compensate for the loss of the cable connecting the service monitor to the base radio. 11 Record the signal generator RF level. Compare this value to the sensitivity specifications. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40 for the appropriate value. 191 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization a Key the transmitter in the base radio and readjust the generator output level until 12 dB SINAD is indicated on the service monitor. Record this level. Less than 1 dB of degradation should occur due to the transmitters being keyed. b Dekey the transmitter. 12 Click Stop SINAD measurement to stop the measurement. 13 Unselect the SINAD measurement box. 14 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 15 Remove and restore the following connections to the base radio:

a Remove the service monitor GEN port connection from the base radio Antenna Port. b Restore the antenna connection to the Receive Antenna Port. 5.11.7 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-Test Method) (IV and D) When and where to use:

Use this procedure to check the receiver sensitivity for the station without any test equipment. The receiver uses a factory calibrated low-level noise source at the receiver input to check performance. This procedure can be performed remotely. Procedure:

1 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. Select the ASTRO BER 3 If the base radio is not already in Service Mode perform the following substeps, otherwise go to RSSI Report tab. step 4. a Click Change to Service Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen as described in step 2. 4 Click Start Receiver Test. A confirmation dialog box appears indicating test progress. After a few seconds, the test concludes with a pass or fail message. 5 Click OK. 6 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. 192 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 5.11.8 Monitoring the Transmitter Metering Points Procedure:

1 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Metering Screens. The Metering Screen dialog box appears. 3 Select the Transmitter tab. 4 Click Transmitter Test to briefly key up the transmitter. The status bar on the window confirms if the transmitter is operating properly or if it has failed. 5 The Current column displays the values read for the following:

NOTICE: When the base radio is transmitting, the VSWR field on the screen displays a value of 1 or greater; when the base radio is not keyed, 1 is displayed. Item Measure Current Measured Forward Power (Watts) Forward power of the base radio Current Measured Reflected Power (Watts) Reflected power of the base radio Current Measured VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio (VSWR) of the base radio The following readings are for a conventional base radio:

Current Stored Forward Power (Watts) Current Stored Reflected Power (Watts) Forward power of the base radio at the last key up Reflected power of the base radio at the last key up Current Stored VSWR VSWR of the base radio at the last key up 5.11.9 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Digital Operation) When and where to use: Use this procedure to test the transmitter signaling patterns and verify that the base radio transmitter meets the ASTRO 25 system standards by forcing the base radio to transmit a V.52 standard test pattern. Procedure:

Pattern tab. 1 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. Select the ASTRO Test 193 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 3 If the base radio is not already in Service Mode, place in Service Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Service Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen, as described in step 2. 4 Connect the service monitor to the base radio:

a Remove the N-Type connector from the Transmitter Antenna Port. b Connect an N-to-N cable from the Transmitter Antenna Port to the T/R port of the service monitor c Make the following settings on the service analyzer:

Click Receiver (TX Test). Enter the frequency to match that of the base radio TX channel selected. Click INPUT PORT and set to T/R. Click ATTEN and set to 20 dB. Click DEMOD and set to P25. Click IF BW and set to 12.5 kHz Click RF GEN to turn OFF the Signal Generator Output. d Click Options. Enable and make the following selections in the Spectrum Analyzer, EVM Data, Power Meter, and Modulation Plot, as follows:

Expand the Power Meter and set to AR (Autorange). If necessary, change to 0. Press RETURN. Verify that Cable Loss is 0. If cable loss is anticipated, expand the Power Meter and enter the cable loss factor. Set the RF Error Meters to AR (Autorange). Set the Modulation Meter to AR (Autorange). 5 Set up the test in CSS by selecting V.52 in the Pattern Type field. 6 Click Start Pattern Transmission. The service monitor displays:

The test pattern on the modulation scope. The amount of deviation of the carrier. The modulation fidelity as a percentage. The transmitters carrier frequency error. 194 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 80: Configuration for Modulation Fidelity Measurement (Aeroflex 2975 Series Service Monitor or Equivalent Analyzer) 7 Record the Bit Error Rate (BER), Modulation Fidelity Error, Symbol Deviation, and Carrier Error and FREQ readings from the P25 Uplink Data (in the Options menu) for use in digital Receiver Testing. 8 Click Stop Pattern Transmission to turn off the test tone. 9 Disconnect the service monitor and reconnect the transmit antenna. 10 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 5.11.10 Verifying Transmitter Performance (Analog Operation) When and where to use:

To verify that the base radio transmitter meets the ASTRO 25 system standards, the base radio must be forced to transmit a 1 kHz tone. Procedure:

1 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. The Test and Measurement Screen appears. 3 Select the ASTRO Test Pattern tab. step 5. a Click Change to Service Mode. 4 If the base radio is not already in service mode perform the follows substeps, otherwise go to 195 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen, as described in step 2 5 Connect the service monitor to the base radio:

a Remove the N-Type connector from the Transmitter Antenna Port. b Connect an N-to-N cable from the Transmitter Antenna Port to the T/R port of the service monitor. 6 Make the following settings on the service analyzer:

a Configure the service monitor for Analog Duplex. b Enter the frequency to match that of the base radio TX channel selected. e Click IF BW and set to 12.5 kHz for narrow channels. Select 25 kHz or 30 kHz for wide c Click INPUT PORT and set to T/R. d Click ATTEN and set to 20 dB. channels. f Click DEMOD and set to FM. g Click RF GEN to turn OFF the Signal Generator Output. h For the power meter, select W and BB (Broadband). i Select 0.33 kHz for the audio filtering bandwidth. 7 Set up the test in CSS:

From the Pattern to Transmit field, select 1 kHz Tone at 60% deviation without PL/DPL. 8 Click Start Pattern Transmission. The service monitor displays:

The transmit output power (make sure to account for any cable loss). The amount of FM deviation of the carrier. The Tx SINAD (measure of Tx distortion) in dB. The transmitters carrier frequency error. 196 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 81: Configuration for Modulation Fidelity Measurement (Aeroflex 2975 Series Service Monitor or Equivalent) 9 Click Stop Pattern Transmission to turn off the test tone. 10 Disconnect the service monitor and reconnect the transmit antenna. 11 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 5.12 Testing the GTR 8000 Base Radio Performance with a Service Monitor for HPD The High Performance Data (HPD) Service Monitor is a diagnostic tool that may be used with an HPD base radio or HPD modem to test and measure the transmitter and receiver characteristics. The HPD Service Monitor generates HPD signaling and provides diagnostic information for received signaling. 197 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 82: HPD Service Monitor Test Screen (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) The HPD Service Monitor is connected with an HPD base radio to perform the following diagnostic tests (for additional tests, see the HPD service monitor manual). These tests determine whether the equipment is operating within specification. If the HPD base radio fails to meet specification, service may be required. Topics covered include:

Measuring HPD Base Radio Tx Power, Frequency Accuracy, and Tx EVM on page 200. Measuring HPD Base Radio Rx Sensitivity and Rx BER on page 203. Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-test Method) (HPD) on page 206 For additional information about using the service monitor, see the HPD Service Monitor manual or online help (accessed through the Help button on the front of the service monitor). 5.12.1 Setting Up the HPD Service Monitor for Testing the Base Radio Prerequisites: The test procedures require that the Rx and Tx cables of the base radio to be connected to the HPD Service Monitor. Any calls present on the channel associated with the base radio are dropped from that channel. The channel must be placed in Service Mode before performing the test procedures so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Procedure:

monitor. 1 Plug a power cable into the AC port at the rear of the High Performance Data (HPD) service 2 Connect a USB mouse to one of the two USB ports in the rear of the service monitor. NOTICE: The following procedures assume that a USB mouse is connected. If not, for instructions to click or select you can use the TAB key and arrow buttons on the front of the service monitor. For instructions to select a soft key on the right side of the screen, use the unlabeled buttons on the front of the service monitor, pressing the button located next to the soft key on the screen. 3 Configure the Speed/Duplex setting in the PCs Ethernet interface to 10 Mb Half Duplex. 4 Connect to the base radio in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 198 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 5 From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. The Test And Measurement Screen dialog box appears. 6 If the base radio is not already in service mode, perform the follows substeps, otherwise go to step 7. a Click Change to Service Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen, as described in step 5. 7 If measuring the base radio transmit signal, connect the Tx connector at the rear of the base radio to the T/R (Transmit/Receive) port on the front of the service monitor. (Both are N-type RF connectors.) 8 If measuring the base radio receive signal, using a splitter, connect the RX-A and RX-B ports at the rear of the base radio to the GEN port on the front of the service monitor. 9 Press the green power button on the front of the service monitor. 10 If the Test Screen is not displayed (see Figure 82: HPD Service Monitor Test Screen (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) on page 198), press the Test button on the front of the service monitor. 11 Locate the specifications for the GTR 8000 Base Radio configuration being tested. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. 12 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 5.12.2 Performing In-band Power Meter User Calibration When and where to use:

The Aeroflex 3900 series High Performance Data (HPD) service monitor has two forms of power measurement:

Broadband is similar to the working of an in-line wattmeter. In-band is performed after the RF signal is down converted to baseband by a Digital Signal Processor (DSP). If the HPD service monitor runs continuously, it requires periodic calibration. Re-calibration is required only if the User Calibration Threshold is exceeded. The service monitor displays a flag at the bottom indicating to re-calibrate to maintain the accuracy indicated in the User Calibration Threshold. For an HPD signal, only the in-band power meter is available. The in-band power measurement accuracy without a user calibration is 1 dB. User calibration improves the accuracy at a specific 199 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization frequency, bandwidth, and temperature by using the broadband power meter to correct the in-band power measurement. This correction occurs when an in-band user calibration is performed. Procedure:

1 Press the UTILS button on the service monitor twice. NOTICE: Wait for approximately 1 second or more before pressing the UTILS button the second time. The Utility Menu screen appears. 2 From the menu, select User Calibration. The User Calibration screen appears. 3 Click Run User Calibration in the upper right corner of the User Calibration screen. NOTICE: The default user calibration setting is 1.0 dB. This setting means that a user re-

calibration is not indicated on the HPD service monitor until the in-band power measurement has a potential of 1.0 dB error in the measurement (same as the basic in-

band power meter accuracy). For HPD, a 0.5 dB value or lower is more appropriate. This value may require more frequent re-calibrations, but it provides better performance. A User Calibration message box appears instructing you to remove all connectors from the ports. 4 Remove all connectors from the ports. Click Continue. A progress bar appears showing the progress of the calibration process. The calibration completes in approximately 2 min. NOTICE: Failure to remove all connectors and cables from the ports causes an inaccurate user calibration. Any connectors present causes a variation on the impedance seen by the instrument during calibration. 5.12.3 Measuring HPD Base Radio Tx Power, Frequency Accuracy, and Tx EVM Procedure:

1 Perform the High Performance Data (HPD) service monitor setup steps in Setting Up the HPD Service Monitor for Testing the Base Radio on page 198. 2 Configure the service monitor T/R port to receive transmissions from the base radio, as follows:

Click the T/R soft key under RF In on the right side of the screen. 3 Maximize the RF Control Settings window, by clicking the upper left corner of the window. 200 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 83: HPD Service Monitor - RF Control Settings Window (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) 4 Set RF receiver frequency, as follows:

a Click the RF Rcvr Freq field in the upper right quadrant of the RF Control Settings window. b Press the number buttons on the front of the service monitor to enter a value in the RF Rcvr Freq field. c If MHz is not displayed to the right of the RF receiver frequency value you entered, press the unlabeled button on the front of the service monitor next to the MHz soft key. NOTICE: The value entered should be within the Frequency Range specification for the GTR 8000 Base Radio configuration being tested. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. 5 Select 1 from the drop-down list for Pilot Sync Code (PSC) in the upper right quadrant of the RF 6 Make the following selections in the Receive (Expected) quadrant of the RF Control Settings Control Settings window. window:

a Select Manual from the drop-down list for Receive Mode. b Select Outbound from the drop-down list for Burst Type. c Select 16-QAM from the drop-down list for Modulation. d Select Free Run from the drop-down list for Sync Mode. 7 Minimize the RF Control Settings window by clicking the upper left corner of the window. The minimized RF Control Settings window is visible at the top of the screen as long as all subscreens are minimized. (See Figure 82: HPD Service Monitor Test Screen (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) on page 198.) Modulation Type is not visible in the minimized RF Control Settings window but displays with Burst Type and PSC at the bottom of the screen. 8 Set-up the test in on the Test and Measurement Screen. a In the Select Pattern to Transmit field, key up the base radio for 16-QAM modulation by selecting 16-QAM. b Click Start Pattern Transmission. 201 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 84: CSS Test And Measurement Screen 9 Display the base radios transmission readings on the service monitors Rx Meter subscreen, as follows: A panel of soft keys displays on the right side of the screen, including two Reset keys. a Click the Rx Meter subscreen. A panel of soft keys displays on the right side of the screen, including two Reset keys. b Click the Reset Acquire soft key on the right side of the screen. This action re-synchronizes the test set with the incoming signal. c Click the Reset Meters soft key on the right side of the screen. This stops, clears, and restarts the acquisition of data for the data display fields. Figure 85: HPD Service Monitor - Rx Meter Subscreen, Reset Soft Keys (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) 10 Compare the value displayed in the Signal Power field to the base radio Tx Power Out specification that matches your base radio configuration. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. NOTICE: Account for cable loss in this comparison. The output power reference plane is the output connector of the power amplifier. The loss of the transmitter output cable (PA output to the back of the base radio) is 4% at 700/800 MHz. However, the base radio software allows the transmitter output power to be set at 10% above rated value. 11 Note the value that displays in the Freq. Error field. Tolerance should be +/- 50 Hz. 12 Note the Error Vector Magnitude (EVM) value that displays in the EVM avg field. The value should be less than or equal to 10%. 202 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 13 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 5.12.4 Measuring HPD Base Radio Rx Sensitivity and Rx BER When and where to use:

Follow this procedure to test:

Rx Sensitivity: Does the 1% Bit Error Rate (BER) meet specifications for your High Performance Data (HPD) GTR 8000 Base Radio configuration?

Rx BER: Does -70 dBm produce a 0.01% BER or better, as expected?

Procedure:

Base Radio on page 198. 1 Perform the service monitor setup steps in Setting Up the HPD Service Monitor for Testing the 2 Using the soft keys on the right side of the screen, configure the service monitor GEN port to generate inbound signaling to the base radio, as follows:

a Click the ON soft key under RF Gen. b Click the GEN soft key under RF Out. c Click the ENABLE soft key under Transmit. 3 Maximize the RF Control Settings window by clicking the upper left corner of the window. All RF Control Settings fields display. 203 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 86: HPD Service Monitor - RF Control Settings Window (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) 4 Select the following values in the Transmit quadrant of the RF Control Settings window:

a Select Inbound Reserved for the Burst Type. b Select a Modulation Type. NOTICE: The selection should be a modulation type from HPD Receive Sensitivity 1% BER specifications, which include:

64 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (QAM) 16 QAM Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (QPSK) See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. c Select TDO for the Sync Mode. d Select 0.153 Std for the Pattern. Settings window. enter a value. 5 Select Free Run for the Sync Mode in the Receive (Expected) quadrant of the RF Control 6 Select the following values in the upper left quadrant of the RF Control Settings window:

a Click the RF Gen Freq field and use the number buttons on the front of the service monitor to NOTICE: The value entered should be within the Frequency Range specification for the HPD base radio configuration being tested. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. b Click the RF Gen Level field and enter a dBm value, depending on the length of cable between the service monitor and the base radio. NOTICE: The value entered should match the receive sensitivity 1% BER specifications for your HPD base radios configuration, for the Modulation Type you selected. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. c Select 1 from the drop-down list for Pilot Sync Code (PSC). 204 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 7 Minimize the RF Control Settings window by clicking the upper left corner of the window. The minimized RF Control Settings window is visible at the top of the screen as long as all subscreens are minimized. See Figure 82: HPD Service Monitor Test Screen (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) on page 198. Modulation Type is not visible in the minimized RF Control Settings window but displays with Burst Type and PSC at the bottom of the screen. 8 Connect to the transceiver module in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 9 From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. Figure 87: Test And Measurement Screen 10 Set up the Test And Measurement Screen to display received Bit Error Rate (BER) as follows:

a Select a pattern that matches the Modulation Type selection for the RF Control Settings in the service monitor. NOTICE: To match the QPSK Modulation Type on the service monitor screen, select the 4 QAM pattern in CSS. b Click Start Pattern Transmission. c Click Start BER Measurement. follows:

a Click the Rx Meter subscreen. 11 Display the base radio transmission readings on the service monitor Rx Meter subscreen, as A panel of soft keys displays on the right side of the screen, including two Reset keys. b Click the Reset Acquire soft key on the right side of the screen to re-synchronize the test set with the incoming signal. c Click the Reset Meters soft key on the right side of the screen. This action stops, clears, and restarts the acquisition of data for the data display fields. 205 MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization Figure 88: HPD Service Monitor - Rx Meter Subscreen and Soft Keys (Aeroflex 3900 Series Service Monitor) 12 On the RF Control Settings window of the service monitor, enter lower values in the RF Gen Level field until 1% BER is displayed on the CSS Test And Measurement Screen. Compare the value in the RF Gen Level field to the Receive Sensitivity 1% BER specifications for your HPD base radio configuration. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Specifications on page 40. NOTICE: Take the cable and splitter loss into account. 13 Enter 70 dBm in the RF Gen Level field. NOTICE: This input value should produce a 0.01% or better BER on the Test And Measurement Screen in CSS. If it does not, contact Motorola Solutions Support Center

(SSC). See Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. 14 When finished testing, perform the following steps on the CSS Test And Measurement Screen:

15 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a Click Stop BER Measurement. b Click Stop Pattern Transmission. a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 5.12.5 Checking Receiver Sensitivity (Self-test Method) (HPD) When and where to use:

Use this procedure to check the High Performance Data (HPD) receiver sensitivity for the base radio without any test equipment. The base radio uses a factory calibrated low-level noise source at the receiver input to check performance. This procedure can be performed remotely. Procedure:

1 Connect to the base radio in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) through an Ethernet connection. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. 206 Figure 89: CSS Test And Measurement Screen MN003286A01-E Chapter 5: GTR 8000 Base Radio Optimization 3 If the base radio is not in service mode perform the follows substeps, otherwise go to step 4. a Click Change to Service Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. c Re-open the Test And Measurement Screen as described in step 2. 4 Select Start Receiver Test. A confirmation dialog box appears indicating the test progress. After a few seconds, the test concludes with a pass or fail message. 5 Click OK. 6 If no further testing is needed, place the base radio in Normal Mode. a Click Change to Normal Mode. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 207 MN003286A01-E Chapter 6: GTR 8000 Base Radio Maintenance Chapter 6 GTR 8000 Base Radio Maintenance This chapter describes periodic maintenance procedures relating to the GTR 8000 Base Radio. 6.1 Fan Grill Cleaning Instructions If the station equipment is installed in a dusty environment, take precautions to filter the air used for a forced cooling of the station. Excessive dust drawn across and into the device circuit modules by the cooling fans can adversely affect heat dissipation and circuit operation. In such installation, be sure to clean or replace external filtering devices periodically. If dust has accumulated on the fan grills, cleaning the fan grills is recommended. When cleaning, take care to prevent dust from being pulled into the modules. Use a damp cloth to wipe the front of the fan grills. When removing the power supply, turn off the unit before proceeding. 6.2 Aligning the Internal Frequency Reference Oscillator NOTICE: The base radio must be turned on for at least one week before the internal frequency reference oscillator is aligned. See Base Radio Service Help Service Screens Alignment Screens in the CSS Online Help for the alignment procedures. 208 MN003286A01-E GTR 8000 Base Radio Operation Chapter 7 Standby Idle Assigned Isolated Standby Idle Assigned Isolated GTR 8000 Base Radio Operation This chapter details tasks performed once the GTR 8000 Base Radio is installed and operational on your system. 7.1 Base Radio Operational States for Trunked Simulcast GTR 8000 Base Radio modules can be in any one of the following four operational states:

During initialization, the base radio powers up into the standby state and waits for a status packet from the comparator. When initial contact with the comparator has been made, the base radio enters idle mode. The base radio sends a status message back to the comparator indicating that it is ready for the assignment. After a base radio has been assigned, it can begin to handle inbound/outbound traffic. In the case where the base radio fails to receive status packets from the comparator, the base radio enters isolated mode and dekeys. This isolated mode is reported in the Unified Event Manager (UEM). If the base radio becomes operational again, and receives the status packets from the comparator, it again replies with a channel status message. The base radio returns to the idle state and is ready for an assignment from the comparator. Adjacent Site Search Holdoff For IP simulcast subsystems with 16 to 32 subsite capacity and geographically redundant prime sites with 1 to 32 subsite capacity, the Transport Network requires longer than 1 second to recover following a failure. To compensate for the subscriber unit scatter, the subscriber units are required to remain on the site for a longer duration following a control channel loss. A message is used to instruct the subscriber units to remain on the site for 10 seconds following the loss of a control channel. The base radio automatically transmits this message upon loss of packets from the prime site. 7.2 Base Radio Operational States for Trunked Repeater and HPD A GTR 8000 Base Radio can be in one of four operational states:

During initialization, the base radio powers up into the standby state and waits for a status packet from the site controller. After initial contact with the site controller has been made, the base radio enters idle mode and sends a status message back to the site controller indicating that it is ready for assignment. 209 MN003286A01-E Chapter 7: GTR 8000 Base Radio Operation The site controller responds with a channel grant message, and the base radio enables for service. If the base radio has a greater home channel preference setting than other base radios at the site, then the zone controller assigns the base radio as the home channel at the site. After a base radio has been assigned, it can begin to handle inbound/outbound traffic. In the case where the base radio fails to receive a number of consecutive status packets from the site controller, the base radio enters isolated mode and dekeys. This isolated mode is reported in the Unified Event Manager. If the base radio becomes operational again and receives status packets from the site controller, it replies with a channel status message. The site controller may then respond with a channel grant, and the base radio becomes enabled for service again. 7.3 Base Radio Operational States for Conventional A GTR 8000 Base Radio can be in one of two operational states:

Standby/Receiving Transmit During initialization, the base radio powers up into the standby/receiving state and is enabled for service. The base radio listens for any received transmissions. After the base radio has received a transmission, it can then key-up and transmit. 7.3.1 Packet Data interactions with Multiple NACs If a base radio supports multiple NACs, such as when using the community base radio feature (F7F/

F7E), in addition to a default NAC, inbound data can be received on any incoming NAC and is forwarded to its destination. Outbound data is only transmitted to the default NAC. Outbound data cannot be routed to a selected NAC, it is always sent on the default NAC. Repeated data is only transmitted on the default NAC and does not follow the inbound NAC when community repeater (F7F) is being used. 7.3.2 Supplementary Signaling interactions with Multiple NACs If a base radio supports multiple NACs, such as when using the community base radio feature (F7F/

F7E), in addition to a default NAC, inbound supplementary signaling can be received on any incoming NAC and is forwarded to its destination. If using F7F/F7E, the same that voice would be transmitted, the outbound supplementary signaling is transmitted on either the default NAC or the currently selected NAC. Outbound supplementary signaling cannot be routed to a selected NAC, it is always sent using either the default NAC or the same NAC that voice would be transmitted on according to F7F/F7E functionality. 7.4 Illegal Carrier Determination Feature (Trunked) The Illegal Carrier Determination feature allows base radio channels to continue operating with system-

configurable levels of channel interference. In an ASTRO 25 system, the base radio uses Received 210 MN003286A01-E Chapter 7: GTR 8000 Base Radio Operation Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI), an RF Threshold Value, and the Malfunction Timer Value to implement this feature. Table 48: Illegal Carrier Determination If the channel receives a... and is assigned:

and is not assigned:

Valid Network Access Code (NAC) The base radio does not change since the carrier is considered valid. If the RF Threshold Value is ex-

ceeded, the base radio enters the Illegal Carrier state and generates an Illegal Carrier message to Uni-

fied Event Manager (UEM). Invalid Network Access Code

(NAC) OR Carrier activity without NAC If the RF Threshold Value level is exceeded, the Malfunction Timer is acti-

vated. After the timer expires, the base radio enters the Illegal Carrier state and generates an Illegal Carrier message to UEM. While in the ille-

gal carrier state, calls are not assigned to this channel. If the illegal carrier disappears or drops below the RF Threshold Value for 12.5% of the time period defined by the Malfunction Timer Value (or 10 seconds, whichever is greater), an event is sent to UEM clearing the illegal carrier state, the base radio exits the illegal carrier state and the channel is again included in the available channel resource pool for call assignment. If the illegal carrier disappears or drops below the RF Threshold Value for 12.5%, but not less than 10 seconds of the time period defined by the Malfunction Timer Value, an event is sent to UEM. 7.5 RF Channel Interference Determination Feature (Conventional) The RF Channel Interference Determination Feature allows radio channels to detect RF interference and log it to the station log. RF Channel Interference is declared when the Carrier Squelch level is exceeded and none of the receive qualifiers are met. Receive qualifiers are the programmed Private Line (PL), Digital Private Line (DPL), or receive Network Access Code (NAC) for the currently active channel. 211 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Chapter 8 GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting GTR 8000 Base Radio troubleshooting requires an understanding of hardware-based and software-

based diagnostics, as well as testing tools. Support is available from Motorola Solutions to assist with all steps in the troubleshooting process. This chapter provides fault management and troubleshooting information relating to GTR 8000 Base Radio. 8.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio General Troubleshooting Table 49: GTR 8000 Base Radio General Troubleshooting Problem General connectivity problems Troubleshooting 1 If you have access to the equipment, check the LEDs to verify that each piece of equipment is connected and operational. See GTR 8000 Base Radio LEDs on page 264. 2 In Configuration/Service Software (CSS), check the condition of the base radio and all associated devices and links. 3 Verify the base radio configuration through CSS. Verify that the IP ad-

dress for the base radio is correct. In CSS, send a diagnostic com-

mand to enable the base radio. 4 For a Conventional Base Radio, Conventional Receiver, Site Repeat-

er (if present in a Tsub), or an HPD Base Radio (if present in a Tsub), verify that the DNS Hostname is correct. If the DNS Hostname was in-

correct and then corrected, further corrections may be needed on the DNS server, UNC, and UEM. See the Troubleshooting chapter in the Authentication Services manual. 5 Verify that the physical cabling is firmly connected and in good condi-

tion. Check for any sharp bends or kinks in cabling. Test suspected cabling for noise, continuity, attenuation, and crosstalk. Replace the cabling if necessary. 6 Run ping, traceroute, pathping, and other network administration com-

mands to identify any link or intermediate devices (switch or routers) with high latency or connection problems. 7 If the connection fails to operate normally, send a restart command to the base radio through CSS. Consider cycling power to the base radio if necessary. 8 If it still fails to operate properly, create a backup of the current config-

uration, then reinstall the software and reconfigure the base radio. 9 Replace the base radio if necessary. 212 Problem Device does not pow-

er up Device is in a continu-

ous reset state Exciter Failure Analog (4-wire) Por-

tion of V.24 Hybrid Link Failure MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Troubleshooting 1 If you have access to the equipment, check the LEDs to determine which equipment is connected and operational. See GTR 8000 Base Radio LEDs on page 264. 2 In CSS, check the alarms for the base radio. 3 Check the power cabling and verify that the power source for the base radio is supplying the appropriate voltage. Try connecting the base ra-

dio to another power source or replace the power cabling if necessa-

ry. NOTICE: Check all power sources as there may be more than one. 4 Check for any physical damage to the modules and check whether the modules were properly grounded. 5 Replace any defective modules. Assure reference inputs are connected to the appropriate input. Verify that an antenna relay Enabled either in the UNC or CSS may have been disconnected. This disconnect causes the base radio to generate an exciter failure because the antenna relay is controlled and monitored through the exciter module. However, the exciter failure should be ignor-

ed until after the antenna relay failure is corrected. In a mixed mode configuration, with hybrid links, and when analog link monitor tone is enabled (Analog Link Idle Check is enabled in the CSS), the base radio detects a link failure when the analog link monitor tone and call activity are absent on the receive line (WL1). Disable Analog Idle Link Check in the CSS when the comparator type is ASTRO-TAC with DIGITAC or ASTRO-TAC with MLC 8000. When these failure conditions are met, the base radio:

1 Logs an occurrence of the failure in the local event log. This log is re-

trievable through the configuration interface. 2 If connected to centralized fault management equipment (optional), transmits an alarm indication to the fault manager to alert the system administrator of the failure. 3 A local visual indication is active due to this failure. Recovery of the link failure results in a similar set of actions to indicate that the failure event cleared. NOTICE: A failure of the transport line or a failure of the oppos-

ing host on the wireline link both appear to the base radio as a link failure. The base radio cannot distinguish between these two cases. V.24 Portion of Hybrid Link Fails In a mixed-mode configuration, with hybrid links, the base radio detects a V.24 link failure when packet activity is absent for a time on the outbound transmit line. When these failure conditions are met, the base radio:

1 Logs an occurrence of the failure in the local event log. This log is re-

trievable through the configuration interface. 213 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Problem Troubleshooting Front Fan Malfunction In the event the fan assembly malfunctions, the base radio:

2 If connected to centralized fault management equipment (optional), transmits an alarm indication to the fault manager to alert the system administrator of the failure. 3 A local visual indication is active due to this failure. 4 Invokes a failure announcement for the 4-wire link because control signaling on the V.24 link drives activity on the 4-wire link. A 4-wire link cannot be used when the V.24 link is down. Recovery of the link failure results in a similar set of actions to indicate that the failure event cleared. NOTICE: A failure of the transport line or a failure of the oppos-

ing host on the wireline link both appear to the base radio as a link failure. The base radio cannot distinguish between these two cases. In the event the base radio detects a hardware issue with the transceiver option card, when used for analog and mixed mode operation, it:

1 Logs an occurrence of the failure in the local event log. This log is re-

trievable through the configuration interface. 2 If connected to centralized fault management equipment (optional), transmits an alarm indication to the fault manager to alert the system administrator of the failure. The alarm is associated with the base ra-

dio control module. 3 A local visual indication is active due to this failure. 1 Logs an occurrence of the failure in the local event log. This log is re-

trievable through the configuration interface. 2 If connected to centralized fault management equipment (optional), transmits an alarm indication of warning severity to the fault manag-

er to alert the system administrator of the failure. The alarm is associ-

ated with the base radio control module. 3 Provides a local visual indication associated with the failure. 4 If the base radio detects the maximum operable temperature has been exceeded, it transitions to a critical malfunction state, logs the state change, and generates a fault indication if connected to the UEM. The following conditions must be met to obtain a power consumption of less than or equal to 35 W:

DC source only card) Speaker turned OFF (if equipped with a transceiver option card) No activation of Aux Out Relays (if equipped with a transceiver option No 29 V AUX loads. For example, active draws by a site controller CSS configured for applications not requiring receiver diversity CSS Fan Holdover configured to short (length of time the fan stays ON after transmission) Transceiver Option Card Hardware Mal-

function Power Consumption is greater than 35 W with power efficiency pack-

age 214 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Problem Troubleshooting Ambient temperature of 104 F (40 C) or less (single fan operation disabling one of the fans within the fan module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 for instructions on how to disable the fan.) NOTICE: To validate the 35 W standby power consumption specification, wait for the main fans to turn off after the transmitter dekeys. The fan holdover configuration in the CSS controls the turn-off delay of the main fans. Single-fan operation requires the Tx Power Out in the CSS to be limit-

ed to 50 W. Transceiver, power amplifier,power supply, fan, and optional TCXO transceiver option card are all power efficiency package versions If the device module has been replaced and serial port access is not available to configure the IP address, the device may have the account locked out or the backplane slot has passwords enabled. Connect to the front-panel local Ethernet service port using a fixed IP address and per-

form the password reset. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140 and Setting the Local Password Configuration in CSS on page 149. Unable to perform a password reset 8.2 GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Tools Several tools are available for viewing and monitoring equipment and troubleshooting suspecting problems:

LEDs Unified Event Manager (UEM) to monitor links and components Unified Network Configurator (UNC) Configuration/Service Software (CSS) MOSCAD Network Fault Management (NFM) NOTICE: The Unified Event Manager (UEM) can be established as a more centralized fault management solution replacing the MOSCAD GMC. See the Unified Event Manger and the UEM/GMC Transition Setup Guide for details. In addition, see Quick Connect RF Coaxial Adapters for GTR 8000 Base Radio Support on page 121 for testing system performance. 8.2.1 Links and Components Monitoring in Unified Event Manager The Unified Event Manager (UEM) monitors critical links and components in the system. Monitoring may take place remotely from a central operations center. Two types of monitoring include:

Real-time monitoring of UEM Topology Maps, which alert faults as they occur. Evaluation of UEM Active Alarms Window on a regularly scheduled basis. 215 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting 8.2.1.1 Unified Event Manager Active Alarm Window Analyzation The Unified Event Manager (UEM) Active Alarms Window is useful for troubleshooting because it captures alarms that may occur intermittently or during off-hours. For example, you can review the Active Alarms Window to correlate reported loss of service with patterns of critical alarms for links and equipment. When analyzing the Active Alarms Window, look for the following patterns:

Failures sent with time stamps on or about the same time Failures from related equipment:

- Cards in the same device

- Equipment part of the same subsystem Many devices send out events that report both critical and non-critical events. Learn to distinguish between critical and non-critical events. See the Unified Event Manager manual or UEM Online Help for further details. 8.2.1.2 Diagnostic Options in Unified Event Manager This table summarizes the base radio diagnostic options in the Unified Event Manager (UEM). Table 50: Base Radio Diagnostic Options in UEM Description Requests that the base radio performs a reset. Requests that the base radio enters service mode, allowing a tech-

nician to make alignment adjustments and run other tests while the base radio is offline. Requests that the base radio enters the enabled mode and handle traffic. 8.2.2 MOSCAD Network Fault Management If MOSCAD Network Fault Management (NFM) equipment is supported at the site, additional status, and alarm information for a device can be viewed through the MOSCAD NFM. Option Restart Service Enabled 216 Figure 90: MOSCAD Network Fault Management Example MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting When an alarm condition occurs, the alarm device for one of the modules begins to flash red. Selecting the LED box opens an alarm pop-up window indicating details of the alarm. To view the status of all alarms for a particular module within the device, select the alarm LED box corresponding to the particular module. Alarms can be acknowledged by pressing the Acknowledge button on the screen. See the MOSCAD Network Fault Management Feature Guide for details. NOTICE: The Unified Event Manager (UEM) can be established as a more centralized fault management solution replacing the MOSCAD GMC. See the Unified Event Manger manual and the UEM/GMC Transition Setup Guide for details. 8.2.3 Device Troubleshooting in Unified Network Configurator Use the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) to verify configuration data during system commissioning and later when you maintain or expand the system. Use UNC to do the following to the device:

Verify configuration Correct configuration errors See the Unified Network Configurator manual for further details. 8.2.4 GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting in Configuration/Service Software The GTR 8000 Base Radio can be locally or remotely configured or serviced through Configuration/

Service Software (CSS). CSS provides access to alarms, status information, and configuration settings for the base radio. Use CSS for the following tasks which may be useful when troubleshooting the base radio. See the CSS Online Help for specific details and instructions when performing these tasks. Enable and disable channels and services View and save a log of alarms 217 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Verify the configuration 8.2.4.1 Internal Diagnostic Test Alarm Log Gather troubleshooting information that can be escalated to Motorola Solutions for evaluation The base radio has been designed with internal diagnostic tests that occur on power up and reset. Diagnostic tests are available for the control module and power supply. If a problem occurs during operation, it is reported as an alarm. All alarms are stored in the Alarm Log, accessible with Configuration/Service Software (CSS). The alarm log contains the name of the diagnostic test that failed and the time since the last power up. 8.2.4.2 Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting The password reset mechanism in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) application can be enabled/disabled. See Secure Remote Access Configuration > Device Security Configuration -

Security Services (Serial) in the CSS Online Help for information. To obtain the keys for resetting either password or SNMPv3 passphrases for the device, contact Motorola Solutions Support Center

(SSC). NOTICE: The default values for the local passwords and SNMPv3 passphrases, as well as the keys for the local password reset procedure, may vary by system release. These default values and keys are treated as sensitive information and are provided to your organization through secured communication. Table 51: Local Password and SNMPv3 Passphrase Troubleshooting SNMPv3 Passphrase Known Local Pass-

word Known To Reset SNMPv3 To Reset Local Log-

Passphrase in Password See the CSS Online Help SNMPv3 User Configuration. See the CSS Online Help Resetting De-

vice Passwords. See the CSS Online Help Reset SNMPv3 Configuration (Seri-

al). See the CSS Online Help SNMPv3 User Configuration. See the CSS Online Help Device Security Configuration Se-

curity Services (Seri-

al). See the CSS Online Help Device Security Configuration Se-

curity Services (Seri-

al). Contact Motorola Sol-

utions SSC. Contact Motorola Solutions SSC. Scenario User is locked out of the local login, but knows SNMPv3 pass-

phrases User knows the lo-

cal login, but not the SNMPv3 pass-

phrases User knows both passphrases and local service pass-

word User does not know SNMPv3 passphrase nor service account password 218 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting 8.3 Site Controller Failure Impact on GTR 8000 Base Radio for Trunked Operation If the link fails between the base radio and the site controller, the base radio dekeys and does not handle any MSU traffic. MSUs attempt to operate on another channel at the site. If another channel is not available, the MSUs attempt to register at another site. For HPD and repeater site operation, the base radio receives external frequency reference and network time synchronization from the active site controller over the Ethernet link. If there is a loss of the external time and frequency reference source, the base radio continues to maintain its own time and frequency stability to continue operations for a specified amount of time without degradation. Afterwards, operation continues with minimal degradation. 8.4 Conventional Site Controller Failure - Impact on GTR 8000 Base Radio for Conventional Operation For IP interfaced conventional base radios, a conventional site controller provides support for dispatch consoles to manage and control the conventional base radios in K core and M core type systems, the conventional site controller only provides support for the console to manage and control the conventional base radios when the primary (and optional secondary) zone controllers are not reachable. If the conventional site controller fails when it is the active call controller in either type system, the dispatch console loses its ability to manage and control the channel resources. However, subscriber radios may still be able to maintain communications using repeat functionality of the base radios or when the base radios are connected to a comparator. The comparators repeat functionality enables wide area repeat for subscribers. 8.5 Motorola Solutions Support Center Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) can help technicians and engineers resolve system problems, and ensure that warranty requirements are met. Check your contract for specific warranty information. Motorola Solutions assigns a tracking ticket number that identifies each support call. This ticket number allows Motorola Solutions to track problems, resolutions, and activities for the call, and if possible, communicate the resolution and a status of call so that the SSC can note the resolution and close the ticket. 8.5.1 Information Necessary to Contact Motorola Solutions Support Center Before calling the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC), log all steps taken to troubleshoot the problem and any results of those steps. The SSC can use this information to determine the appropriate support actions. Listed is the following information to collect before calling the SSC:

System ID number (such as 2CB5). Each zone in the system has a unique system ID number Location of the system 219

- Are there any other circumstances contributing to the problem (for example, loss of power)?

- Reload of software from a backup disk, CD, or DVD with the version and date Billing information (If not being billed under contract) Name or model number of product causing the issue (Helps get you over to proper tech support MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting Date the system was put into service Software and firmware versions Symptom or observation of the problem, such as:

- When did it first appear?

- Can it be reproduced?

Maintenance action preceding the problem, such as:

- Upgrade of software or equipment

- Changes to hardware or software configuration Dispatch Support:

Site ID Description of problem Severity of issue Tech Support:

Site ID group) Return Authorization:

Site ID Part Number and/or description of part How being billed Where it is being billed Where it is being shipped 8.5.2 Where to Call for Service After collecting the required information and writing a detailed problem report, contact the Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) to help with the problem. 8.5.2.1 Motorola Solutions Support Center The Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) is the primary Motorola Solutions contact. Call Motorola Solutions SSC:

Before any software reload To confirm troubleshooting results and analysis before removing and replacing a Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) or Field Replaceable Equipment (FRE) to repair the system Motorola Solutions SSC contact information:

Phone: (800) 221-7144 for domestic calls and (302) 4449800 for international calls Fax: (847) 725-4073 220 MN003286A01-E Chapter 8: GTR 8000 Base Radio Troubleshooting 8.5.3 Subcontractors The Motorola Solutions Service Subcontractor Assessment program ensures that service people Motorola Solutions contracts meet strict minimum requirements before they can work on any system. For more information on this program, contact the Motorola Solutions representative. 221 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Chapter 9 GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures GTR 8000 Base Radios are composed of numerous Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and field replaceable parts. If you must replace a FRU or part, it is essential to obtain the precise FRU Kit Number or part number, and to review the replacement procedures provided, including all safety precautions and system impact information. This chapter lists the FRUs and Field Replaceable Entities (FREs), and includes replacement procedures applicable to GTR 8000 Base Radio. 9.1 Field Replaceable Units (FRUs) and Parts When ordering Field Replaceable Units (FRUs), provide the FRU Kit Number. When ordering field replaceable parts, provide the part number. Contact Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) as needed for numbers not provided here (for cables internal to a GTR 8000 Base Radio, the part numbers are not listed in this documentation, but you can locate the part number on the cable before contacting Motorola Solutions SSC). See Motorola Solutions Support Center on page 219. WARNING: To guard against personal injury and/or damage to equipment, place the trunked base radio in Service Mode when performing service. The GTR 8000 Base Radio periodically keys up to pseudo train its linear transmitter autonomously when not assigned by the zone controller. Tx Inhibiting the base radio also prevents the transmitter from keying. Remember to place the base radio back in Normal Mode when service is complete. Table 52: GTR 8000 Base Radio Field Replaceable Units Component Type FRU Kit Number Replacement Procedure Transceiver Module (700/800 MHz)**

Transceiver Module (UHF R1, 380 435 MHz)**

Transceiver Module (UHF R2, 435 524 MHz)**

Transceiver Module (VHF, 136174 MHz)**

Transceiver Module w/OCXO Trans-

ceiver Option Card (700/800 MHz)**

Transceiver Module w/OCXO Trans-

ceiver Option Card (UHF R1, 380 435 MHz)**

Transceiver Module w/OCXO Trans-

ceiver Option Card (UHF R2, 435 524 MHz)**

DLN6885A DLN6888A DLN6884A DLN6892A DLN6883A DLN6889A DLN6886A 222 Replacing a Transceiver Module on page 231 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Component Type FRU Kit Number Replacement Procedure Transceiver Module w/OCXO Trans-

ceiver Option Card (VHF 136174 MHz)**

Power Efficiency Transceiver Mod-

ule w/TCXO* Transceiver Option Card (UHF R1, 380435 MHz)**

Power Efficiency Transceiver Mod-

ule w/TCXO* Transceiver Option Card (UHF R2, 435524 MHz)**

Fan Module AC/48 V DC Power Supply Power Efficiency AC/48 V DC Power Supply Power Amplifier Module (Low-Pow-

er/30W, 700/800 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (700/800 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (High-Pow-

er/150W, 800 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (High-Pow-

er UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (Low-Pow-

er/30W UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (UHF R2, 435524 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (VHF, 136 174 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (High-Pow-

er/100W VHF, 136174 MHz) DLN6893A DLN6890A DLN6887A DLN6781A

(0182516W14) DLN6805A

(0182516W20) DLN6998A DLN6895A DLN6935A DLN6891A DLN7026A DLN6896A DLN6897A TBD DLN6898A Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 Replacing a Power Supply on page 238 Replacing a Power Amplifier on page 242 Power Amplifier Module (900 MHz) DLN6894A

* Available only for non-simulcast conventional systems.

** The transceiver field replacement units are not compatible with ASTRO 25 base radio software distributed before July 2013. BEFORE installing the replacement transceiver, ensure that all base radios at the site meet the minimum software version requirements listed. Contact Motorola Solutions SSC at 800-422-4210 if you do not have access to compatible software. See Transceiver Software and Feature Compatibilities on page 226 for details. Table 53: GTR 8000 Base Radio Field Replaceable Parts Component Type Part Number Replacement Procedure Power Supply Fan Module 5985167Y02 Replacing a Power Supply Fan on page 240 223 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Component Type Part Number Replacement Procedure GTR 8000 Base Radio Backplane 0180706K30 Replacing a GTR 8000 Base Radio Backplane on page 245 Preselector Mini UHF BNC Cable 3085664Y03 Replacing a Preselector Filter on page 250 0185171Y02 0185171Y01 0785024Y01 3085664Y01 3085665Y01 3085664Y02 CFX1075A TLE5992A TLE5993A TFD6511A TFD6512A 9184680Y01 9184680Y02 DLN1317A CLE6203A 9184718Y01 9184718Y02 0185417U10 0185417U04 0185417U05 0185417U06 0185417U07 0185417U01 0185417U02 0185417U03 40009272002 3084848Y01 HSN1006A GMMN4063B Preselector 700 MHz Preselector 700/800 MHz Preselector Mounting Bracket Preselector QMA Cable End Preselector BNC to QMA Cable Preselector Mini UHF N-Bulkhead Cable Preselector UHF 380433 MHz Preselector UHF 435470 MHz Preselector UHF 470524 MHz Preselector VHF 136154 MHz Preselector VHF 150174 MHz Transmit Post Filter 700 MHz Transmit Post Filter 800 MHz External Dual Circulator Tray External Dual Circulator Tray UHF 380435 Duplexer 700 MHz Duplexer 800 MHz Duplexer UHF 380403 MHz Duplexer UHF 403435 MHz Duplexer UHF 435470 MHz Duplexer UHF 470494 MHz Duplexer UHF 494512 MHz Duplexer VHF 136146 MHz Duplexer VHF 144160 MHz Duplexer VHF 158174 MHz Antenna Relay External Speaker Kit Microphone Kit 224 Replacing Transmit Filters (700/800 MHz) on page 251 Replacing the Dual Circulator/Isola-

tor Modules on page 253 Replacing a Duplexer (700/800 MHz) on page 257 Replacing a Duplexer (UHF) on page 259 Replacing a Duplexer (VHF) on page 261 Antenna Relay and Circuit Load Temperature Cable Replacing an Antenna Relay on page 262 Antenna Relay Machine Screws (2) 0310909A54 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Table 54: GTR 8000 Base Radio Cabinet Field Replacement Parts Replacement Procedure Component Type Static Rail Bracket Cabinet, 15 RU, 600D, EIA 19 in. Rodent Proof Grommet for 3.5 in. Hole Cabinet, 24 RU, 600D EIA 19 in. Part Number 07009411001 15009721001 15009729001 15009721002 Cabinet Door, 15 RU 15009728001 Removing/Replacing a Cabi-

net Door on page 98 Cabinet Door, 24 RU 15009728003 Removing/Replacing a Cabi-

net Door on page 98 M6 Cage Nut 0285504U05 Table 55: Individual Replaceable Parts on External Dual Circulator Tray Component Type Part Number Replacement Procedure Dual Circulator 700/800 MHz 0185172Y01 Dual Circulator UHF 380435 MHz 0185416U09 Dual Circulator UHF 435470 MHz 0185416U05 Dual Circulator UHF 470524 MHz 0185416U06 Dual Circulator VHF 136146 MHz 0185416U01 Dual Circulator VHF 144160 MHz 0185416U02 Dual Circulator VHF 158174 MHz 0185416U03 Circulator Load 700/800 MHz Circulator Load UHF/VHF Low Pass/Harmonic Filter 700/800 MHz Low Pass/Harmonic Filter UHF Low Pass/Harmonic Filter VHF TLN3391A TLN3391A 9185202U04 9185856Y01 9185856Y03 Table 56: GTR 8000 Base Radio Cables Component Type System Connector Cable SCSI2 Base Radio to Champ Antenna Relay Control Cable Antenna Relay Mini UHF Cable Antenna Relay QMA Cable Antenna Relay BNC Cable Antenna Relay 75 CM Cable Antenna Relay 32 CM Cable Replacing the Dual Circulator/Isola-

tor Modules on page 253 Part Number 30009466002 30009475001 3085664Y04 3085664Y05 3013943J08 3013942M23 3013942M11 225 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Component Type Antenna Relay 25 CM Cable External Speaker Cable Cable DC Red/Black 2806mm Cable DC Black/Blue 2806mm Battery Temp Sensor 3000mm Cable Battery Temp Extension 15500mm Analog Simulcast Cable V.24 or Wireline Cable Analog Simulcast Cable Assembly Dongle Adapter Telco to Trunking Control and DSM Compact Base Cable Kit Compact Expansion Cable Kit 9.2 Transceiver Hardware Generations Part Number 3013943E08 0185180U01 30009459002 30009459004 30009478001 30009461003 30009398002 30009455002 30009467001 30009468001 DLN7013A DLN7014A As of July 2013, the GTR 8000 Base Radio is shipped with a new generation of transceiver hardware

(referred to in this manual as GEN 2). The hardware updates are intended to extend the life of the device as seamlessly as possible. This section details relevant differences and compatibility requirements for GEN 1 and GEN 2 hardware. 9.2.1 Transceiver Software and Feature Compatibilities The GEN 2 transceiver hardware is backwards compatible and interchangeable with GEN 1 transceiver hardware on ASTRO 25 7.7 and later systems. GEN 1 transceivers can no longer be ordered; however, spare inventory of GEN 1 transceivers can be used as Field Replaceable Unit

(FRU) replacements. All ASTRO 25 system features are supported on GEN 1 and GEN 2 transceivers, with the following exceptions. Table 57: System Feature Exceptions Feature X2 TDMA 3600 Operation GEN 1 Transceiver GEN 2 Transceiver Supported Not Supported Not Supported Supported GEN 2 transceiver hardware is not compatible with ASTRO 25 GTR 8000 Base Radio software distributed before July 2013. The transfer operation fails if you perform a software download using a SWDL application released before July 2013. BEFORE installing a FRU replacement or expansion channel at an existing site, ensure that you are using the latest available SWDL application, and that all base radios and receivers at the site meet the minimum software version requirements listed. Contact Motorola Solutions Support Center (SSC) at 800-422-4210 if you do not have access to compatible software. 226 Table 58: Minimum Software Download Version Requirements ASTRO 25 Sys-

tem Release 7.6 and earlier MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures HPD Site Repeater Multi-Site Conventional 3600 Not Supported HPDBR_ R07.7X.023 SiteRptrBR_ R07.7X.031 HPDBR_ R07.8X.033 SiteRptrBR_ R07.8X.038 HPDBR_ R07.9X.049 SiteRptrBR_ R07.9X.050 MsBR_ R07.7X.033 MsBR_ R07.8X.038 MsBR_ R07.9X.051 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A ConvRptrBR_ R07.9X.051 Any Version Any Version HPDBR_ R07.BX.098 SiteRptrBR_ R07.BX.102_P2 MsBR_ R07.BX.102_X2 ConvBR_ R07.BX.100 SiteRptrBR_ R07.BX.102_P2 MsBR_ R07.BX.102_P2 HPDBR_ R07.CX.051 SiteRptrBR_ R07.CX.051_X2 MsBR_ R07.CX.051_X2 ConvBR_ R07.CX.057 Any Version HPDBR_ R07.DX.073 SiteRptrBR_ R07.DX.079_X2 MsBR_ R07.DX.079_X2 ConvBR_ R07.DX.074 Any Version SiteRptrBR_ R07.CX.051_P2 MsBR_ R07.CX.051_P2 SiteRptrBR_ R07.DX.079_P2 MsBR_ R07.DX.079_P2 7.7 7.8 7.9 7.11 7.12 7.13 7.14 and later Any Version CAUTION: It is crucial that a site software download is performed at a trunked ASTRO 25 site to ensure that all devices are on the same software version, VLAN, and active bank. Failure to perform this step, results in the replacement transceiver or expansion channel to have a mismatch in software versions. If a mismatch in software versions occurs, the transceiver may go into a configuration mode of operation with a reason of Invalid Software Version. A site software download is not available for conventional or trunked 3600 devices. 9.2.2 Identifying Transceiver Hardware Generation Label GEN 1 and GEN 2 transceiver modules can be identified by examining the physical hardware label. GEN 2 modules have a light blue label with GEN 2 clearly noted on it, while GEN 1 modules have a white label with no GEN identification. 227 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 91: GEN 1 Transceiver Module Figure 92: GEN 2 Transceiver Module Configuration/Service Software GEN 1 and GEN 2 transceiver modules already installed in a system can be identified through the Hardware Version screen of the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). 9.2.3 Transceiver FRU Number Mappings Table 59: Transceiver FRU Number Mappings GEN 1 (Shipped before Nov GEN 2 (Shipped starting Ju-

2013) DLN6566A DLN1430A DLN1346A DLN6789A ly 2013) DLN6885A DLN6883A DLN6923A DLN6884A DLN1433A DLN6886A Transceiver FRU Number Transceiver Module (700/800 MHz) Transceiver Module w/OCXO Transceiver Option Card

(700/800 MHz) Transceiver Module w/OCXO Transceiver Option Card (900 MHz) Transceiver Module (UHF R2, 435524 MHz) Power Efficiency Transceiver Module (UHF R2, 435524 MHz) Transceiver Module w/OCXO Transceiver Option Card (UHF R2, 435524 MHz) 228 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures GEN 1 (Shipped before Nov GEN 2 (Shipped starting Ju-

Transceiver FRU Number Power Efficiency Transceiver Module w/TCXO Transceiver Option Card (UHF R2, 435 524 MHz) Transceiver Module (UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Efficiency Transceiver Module (UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Transceiver Module w/OCXO Transceiver Option Card (UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Efficiency Transceiver Module w/TCXO Transceiver Option Card (UHF R1, 380 435 MHz) Transceiver Module (VHF, 136174 MHz) Transceiver Module w/OCXO Transceiver Option Card (VHF 136174 MHz) 2013) DLN6790A DLN1395A DLN6786A ly 2013) DLN6887A DLN6888A DLN1432A DLN6889A DLN6787A DLN6890A DLN1376A DLN1431A DLN6892A DLN6893A 9.3 Power Amplifier Hardware Generations Starting in July 2013, the GTR 8000 Base Radio is shipped with a new generation of power amplifier hardware (referred to in this manual as GEN 2). The hardware updates extend the life of the base radio as seamlessly as possible. This section details relevant differences and compatibility requirements for GEN 1 and GEN 2 hardware. 9.3.1 Power Amplifier Software and Feature Compatibilities The GEN 2 power amplifier hardware is fully backwards compatible and completely interchangeable with GEN 1 power amplifier hardware. GEN 1 power amplifiers can no longer be ordered; however, spare inventory of GEN 1 power amplifiers can be used as Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) replacements. All ASTRO 25 system features are supported on GEN 1 and GEN 2 power amplifiers. All ASTRO 25 system release software is supported on GEN 1 and GEN 2 power amplifiers. 229 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 9.3.2 Identifying Power Amplifier Hardware Generation Label GEN 1 and GEN 2 power amplifier modules can be identified by examining the physical hardware label. GEN 2 modules have a light blue label with GEN 2 clearly noted on it, while GEN 1 modules have a white label with no GEN identification. Figure 93: GEN 1 Power Amplifier Module Figure 94: GEN 2 Power Amplifier Module GEN 1 and GEN 2 power amplifier modules already installed in a system can be identified through the Hardware Version screen of the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Power Amplifier FRU Num-

GEN 1 (Shipped before Nov GEN 2 (Shipped starting Ju-

9.3.3 Power Amplifier FRU Number Mappings Table 60: Power Amplifier FRU Number Mappings ber Power Amplifier Module (Low-

Power/30W, 700/800 MHz) Power Amplifier Module

(700/800 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (High-

Power/150W, 800 MHz) 2013) N/A DLN6567A N/A ly 2013) DLN6998A DLN6895A DLN6935A CSS 230 Power Amplifier FRU Num-

GEN 1 (Shipped before Nov GEN 2 (Shipped starting Ju-

MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures ber Power Amplifier Module (High-

Power UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Efficiency Power Ampli-

fier Module (High-Power UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (Low-

Power/30W UHF R1, 380435 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (UHF R2, 435524 MHz) Power Efficiency Power Ampli-

fier Module (UHF R2, 435524 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (VHF, 136174 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (High-

Power/100W VHF, 136174 MHz) Power Amplifier Module (900 MHz) 2013) DLN1396A ly 2013) DLN6891A DLN6788A DLN6891A N/A DLN7026A DLN1347A DLN6792A DLN1377A DLN6725A DLN6896A DLN6896A DLN6897A TBD DLN6779A DLN6894A 9.4 Replacing a Transceiver Module Figure 96: GTR 8000 Base Radio Modules on page 232 shows the captive screws that secure the transceiver module to the chassis in the standalone base radio configuration. Figure 95: Transceiver Module 231 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 96: GTR 8000 Base Radio Modules NOTICE: The IP address for the device is available through a serial port connection in Configuration/Service Software (CSS) in the Tools menu. Prerequisites: Before replacing the transceiver, pull configuration and hardware information from the transceiver into the Unified Network Configurator (UNC) by performing a Pull All procedure from the UNC. See the Scheduling the Pull of Device Configurations section in the Unified Network Configurator manual. This step may not be possible if communication is severed between the transceiver and the UNC, or if the transceiver is within a K core or non-networked site. Procedure:

1 Wear an electrostatic discharge (ESD) strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Locate the transceiver module being replaced. 3 If the transceiver module is not operational, go to step 9. 4 Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 5 Save the base radio configuration to the service computer/laptop as follows:

a From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. b At the confirmation screen, click OK. c When the Progress Monitor screen is complete, click OK. d From the menu, select File Save As. e On the Properties Screen, enter the IP address of the base radio. Click OK. f On the Save window, select the directory where you want to save the configuration file, type a meaningful name for the file (use .cpl as the extension or do not type an extension). Press ENTER. The base radio configuration is saved to the location indicated. The configuration file is reloaded later to the replacement transceiver. 6 For a trunked base radio, place the base radio into Service Mode so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. The Test and Measurement Screen appears. b Click Change to Service Mode. 232 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 7 Optional: If you choose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the Off (O) position. NOTICE:

It is not necessary to turn off the power supply for the transceiver module being replaced, as the modules can be swapped out with the power on. 8 Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the service port on the transceiver being replaced. 9 Remove the fan assembly to gain access to the transceiver module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237. IMPORTANT: Although the transceiver module can be swapped out without shutting the power off, minimize the amount of time the fan assembly is removed so the circuitry that remains powered on does not overheat and shut down. 10 Label and disconnect all cables from the ports on the transceiver. 11 Using a T20 bit, loosen the two captive screws on the front of the transceiver module to disengage them from the chassis. 12 Using the handle, gently pull the transceiver module straight out along the guides on which it sits. 13 Slide in the replacement transceiver module along the guiding rails until it is engaged. A slight push may be needed to securely engage the module. IMPORTANT: If the transceiver module stops well before it is engaged, it is in an incorrect position. Either it is in the wrong slot or it is rotated 180. The module has a keying feature that prevents it from going all the way into an incorrect slot, or going into the correct slot but rotated 180. Do not try to force the module. LEDs on the transceiver turn on when it is engaged. 14 Using a T20 bit, tighten the two captive screws on the front of the module to secure the transceiver module to the chassis. 15 Reconnect all cables to the ports on the transceiver. 16 Reinstall the fan assembly. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237. 17 Optional: If you chose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the On (I) position. Serial Port Link on page 135. 18 Perform basic device configuration in CSS using the serial port. See Connecting Through a a Set the IP Address and BR_CM Pairing Number for the device. See Setting the Device IP Address and Pairing Number in CSS on page 137. b Set the Serial Security Services. See Setting the Serial Security Services in CSS on page 138. 19 On systems with MAC Port Lockdown implemented, disable MAC Port Lockdown if the device being replaced is a colocated base radio, at a repeater site or simulcast site. The switch port where the colocated replacement device is connected to needs to be Unlocked before connecting with CSS or performing a software download. See the MAC Port Lockdown manual for instructions on how to disable MAC Port Lockdown. 20 Open Software Download Manager application, and perform the following:

233 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures CAUTION: Load the correct version of the software. A mismatch in software versions may occur when replacing the transceiver module with an on-hand spare. A mismatch in software versions may cause all base radios to go into a configuration mode of operation with a reason of Invalid Software Version. To exit the base radio from the configuration mode, see CSS Procedures Changing from Configuration to Normal Mode in the CSS Online Help. a From the Advanced Options menu, select the transfer type. b From the menu, select File File Manager. The Software Depot File Manager opens. c From the menu, select Component Operations Import Fileset. The Import a Fileset Into the Software Depot dialog box appears. d Click Browse and search for the swdlv3.cfg file, or follow path: E:\swdl\swdlv1.cfg or swdlv3.cfg. Click Open. e Click Generate. Click OK. The file appears in the Configuration File Path field of the dialog box. The Import a Fileset Into the Software Depot dialog box closes and the software component appears in the Components In the Software Depot list of the Software Depot File Manager window. f Exit the Software Depot File Manager. 21 For a conventional or trunked 3600 device, perform a single device software download to transfer and install the latest base radio software using Software Download Manager as follows:

a Click Open Single Device Mode. b Enter the <IP address> of the device. Click Connect. If the device supports SNMPv3, a Security Level screen appears. c Enter the Authentication Password and Encryption Password, if the chosen security level required inserting these credentials. Click OK. d In the Select an option drop down list, select Upgrade. e In the Operation Type field, select Transfer and Install. f In the Application Type drop down list, select the application to install. g In the Software Version drop down list, select the appropriate software version. h In the Bank Selection drop down list, select the bank to receive the software. Select Automatic to store the software in the bank that is more suitable for the device. i Select Start Operation. j In the window that appears, click Proceed. If the transfer was successful, the progress bar in the Operation Status tab displays green. If the transfer failed, the progress bar displays red. 22 Perform a site software download and installation for a trunked ASTRO 25 base radio. NOTICE: A site software download is not available for conventional or trunked 3600 devices. 234 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures CAUTION: It is crucial that a site software download is performed at the site to ensure that all devices are on the same software version, VLAN, and active bank. Failure to perform this step results in the replacement transceiver or expansion channel to have a mismatch in software versions. If a mismatch in software versions occurs, the transceiver may go into a configuration mode of operation with a reason of Invalid Software Version. See one of the following procedures:

For GTR 8000 Base Radios with PSC 9600 Site Controller: Performing a Site Download With PSC 9600 Site Controllers on page 276. For GTR 8000 Base Radios with GCP 8000 Site Controller: Performing a Site Software Download With GCP 8000 Site Controllers on page 278. 23 Disconnect the service computer/laptop from the transceivers DB-9 serial port. 24 Perform basic device configuration using the Ethernet port in CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. a Set the current date and time. See Setting the Date and Time in CSS on page 143. b Set up the local Password Configuration (optional). See Setting the Local Password Configuration in CSS on page 149. NOTICE: An IP address must be configured to set up the local password. If the serial port access is not available to configure the IP address, the transceiver may have the account locked out or the backplane slot has passwords enabled. Connect to the front-panel local Ethernet service port using a fixed IP address to perform the password reset. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 25 Complete the configuration of the Information Assurance features using CSS, as follows:

a Change the SNMPv3 configuration and user credentials. See Changing SNMPv3 Configuration and User Credentials in CSS on page 143. b Create, update, or delete an SNMPv3 user. See Adding or Modifying an SNMPv3 User in CSS on page 146. on page 146. Mode in CSS on page 147. Authentication Services manual. c Verify the SNMPv3 credentials. See Performing an SNMPv3 Connection Verification in CSS d Set the Software Download Manager (SWDL) transfer mode. See Setting the SWDL Transfer e Configure Domain Name Services (DNS). See Chapter 7, Configuring DNS with CSS in the f Configure for Secure SHell (SSH). See Chapter 4, Configuring SSH for Devices in an RF Site in the Securing Protocols with SSH manual or see Device Security Configuration Remote Access/Login Banner (Ethernet) in the CSS Online Help. NOTICE: Restore the Clear Protocols parameters. g Enable RADIUS Authentication. See Chapter 7, Configuring RADIUS Sources and Parameters with CSS in the Authentication Services manual. h Enable Centralized Authentication. See Chapter 7, Enabling/Disabling Centralized Authentication with CSS in the Authentication Services manual. i Set the Local Cache Size for Centralized Authentication. See Chapter 7, Setting the Local Cache Size for Central Authentication in CSS in the Authentication Services manual. j Enable Centralized Event Logging (if required by your organization). See Chapter 6, Enabling/Disabling Centralized Event Logging on Devices with CSS and Chapter 1, Event Logging Client Configuration for proper hostnames in the Centralized Event Logging manual. 235 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures k Set the Network Time Protocol (NTP) Server Settings. See NTP Server Settings in CSS on page 148. 26 From CSS, restore the Codeplug Archive from backup. Reload the configuration file onto the new device, as follows:

a From the menu, select File Open. b Locate and open the previously saved configuration file for the base radio. NOTICE: If you were not able to back up the base radio configuration from the previous base radio, use the configuration from your system build book or use the default base radio configuration file. Specific settings for the base radio must still be configured. See the CSS Online Help for detailed configuration instructions. If the base radio is part of a Power Efficiency Package, ensure that the base radio Tx Power Out in the CSS is limited to 50 W. c On the Properties window, click OK. d When the Progress Monitor screen is complete, click OK. e From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. Click OK. f On the Ethernet connection confirmation screen, click OK. g On the Connection screen, enter the <IP Address> and click Connect. h On the SNMPv3 PassPhrase Prompt dialog box, enter the User Information and Passphrase Information. Click OK. If Authentication Services are not enabled on a device, click OK when the dialog box appears. i On the confirmation screen, click OK. j When the Progress Monitor screen is complete, click OK. The configuration from the file selected is loaded into the base radio. Communication with the base radio is not available until the reset is complete. 27 Read the base radio, as follows:

a From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. b On the confirmation screen, click OK. c When the Progress Monitor screen is complete, click OK. 28 Place the base radio into Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Mode Screen. The Mode Screen appears. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 29 On systems with MAC Port locking, disable the locking and then re-enable the locking with the MAC address of the base radio. The device being replaced may be connected to an Ethernet port on a switch which implements MAC Port locking (HP switch or site controller). If so, the Ethernet switch port must be unlocked and relocked to the MAC address of the replacement device. See the MAC Port Lockdown manual for instructions on how to disable and enable MAC Port locking. NOTICE: Following device restoration, if it was connected to an HP switch port, the HP switch port may have been disabled due to an unexpected MAC address. If so, re-enable the port on the HP switch. 236 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 30 Replace the base radio in the Unified Network Configurator (UNC). See Chapter 4, Replacing a Device in the Unified Network Configurator manual. 31 Discover the base radio in the Unified Event Manager (UEM). See the Unified Event Manager manual. 32 Verify that the base radio is operating properly:

The Status LED on the front of the transceiver is green. Proper operation is confirmed using software tools, such as UEM, and the Transmitter Metering Screen in CSS. 9.5 Replacing the Fan Assembly WARNING: When removing a fan module, avoid contacting moving fan blades before and after removal with tools, hands, or other objects. If removing the fan module to access or replace the modules behind it, turn off the equipment power and allow the modules to cool before performing any work as the surfaces of the modules can be hot. CAUTION: To prevent overheating, this fan must be in place at all times, except during servicing. IMPORTANT: The fan assembly can be swapped out without shutting the power off. The replacement fan assembly must be in place within a reasonable amount of time so that the device module does not overheat and shut down. Figure 97: Fan Assembly Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Using a T20 bit, loosen the three captive screws on the front of the fan assembly to disengage them from the chassis. 3 Using the handle on one end and the edge on the other side, gently pull the fan assembly straight out to disengage the connector. 237 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 4 NOTICE: All fan modules are delivered from the factory for dual-fan operation. If the base radio is part of a power efficiency package configuration, the DLN6898A fan module must be used and converted for single fan operation. Also, ensure the Tx Power Out in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) is limited to 50 W. Convert for single-fan operation as follows:

a Lift the connector harness out of the rubber retainer. b Disconnect the connector harness. c Place each connector end into the individual pockets of the rubber retainer. NOTICE: The DLN6898A fan module can be used in a non-power efficiency package configuration. However, the fan module must be configured for dual-fan operation. 5 Using the guide pins and the connector on the back of the new fan assembly, push the fan assembly into place until it feels secure. 6 Using a T20 bit, tighten the three captive screws on the front of the fan assembly. Torque to 172 in-lb. 7 Verify that the fan assembly is operating properly, and the fan Alarm LED is off. You can also use software tools, such as Unified Event Manager (UEM) or CSS to verify the status of the equipment. 9.6 Replacing a Power Supply WARNING: The power supply module contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage equipment. NOTICE: The power supply output is directly mapped to a Power Amplifier (PA)/transceiver combination. Removal of a power supply results in a loss of the associated transmit channel until the replacement power supply is inserted and turned ON. For a trunked device, place the channel in Service Mode before replacing the module so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Placing a channel into Service Mode is performed using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). 238 Figure 98: Power Supply MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear The ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 For a trunked base radio, place in Service Mode before replacing the module being replaced so the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Push the power rocker switch to Off (O) on the power supply unit. 4 Using a T20 bit, loosen the two captive screws on the front of the power supply to disengage them from the chassis. WARNING: Let the power supply module cool before performing the following step which exposes surfaces of the module that can be hot. 5 Pull on the metal handle to disengage the power supply from the backplane, and remove it completely from the chassis. 6 Slide the replacement power supply into place, pushing gently until it seats. 7 Using a T20 bit, tighten the two captive screws on the front of the power supply. 8 Turn the power button to On (I), and verify that the power supply is operating properly:

The power supply Status LED is green. The power supply Alarm LED is off. 239 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures The power supply Fan LED is off. Confirm proper operation using software tools, such as the UEM, and the Power Supply Metering Screen in CSS. 9 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9.7 Replacing a Power Supply Fan WARNING: The power supply module contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage equipment. NOTICE:

Replacing the power supply fan requires removing the power supply module. The power supply output is directly mapped to a Power Amplifier (PA)/transceiver combination. Removal of a power supply results in a loss of the associated channel until the replacement power supply is inserted and turned ON. Place a trunked device in Service Mode before replacing the module so that the system does not attribute the loss of a channel to a failure. Placing the device in Service Mode is performed using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or Configuration/Service Software (CSS). 240 Figure 99: Power Supply Fan MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 For a trunked device, place the base radio associated with the power supply fan being replaced in Service Mode. a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to Off (O). 4 Using a T20 bit, loosen the two captive screws on the front of the power supply module to disengage them from the chassis. WARNING: Let the power supply module cool before performing the next step, which exposes surfaces of the module that can be hot. 241 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 5 Pull on the metal handle to disengage the power supply from the backplane, and remove it completely from the chassis. 6 Remove the fan cover from the power supply module:

a Using a T15 bit, remove the four screws that connect the cover to the sides of the power b Slide the cover off (tilting the top edge out and lifting the bottom edge above the power supply module. supply handle). 7 Disconnect the power cable located above the fan. 8 Remove the two screws that secure the fan to the power supply. 9 Remove the fan and insert the new fan. 10 Secure the fan to the power supply with the two screws removed in step 8. 11 Attach the power cable for the fan to the connection on the power supply. 12 Replace the fan cover:

a Slide the cover on, tilting the bottom edge in, past the power supply handle. b Using a T15 bit, insert and tighten the four screws that connect the cover to the sides of the power supply module. 13 Slide the power supply into place, pushing gently until it seats. 14 Using a T20 bit, tighten the two captive screws on the front of the power supply module. 15 Turn the power button to On (I), and verify that the power supply is operating properly:

The power supply Status LED is green. The power supply Alarm LED is off. The power supply Fan LED is off and the fan is operating. Proper operation is confirmed using software tools, such as the UEM, and the Power Supply Metering Screen in CSS. 16 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9.8 Replacing a Power Amplifier The following figure shows the captive screws that secure the power amplifier module to the chassis in the GTR 8000 Base Radio. 242 Figure 100: Power Amplifier Module MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 101: Captive Screws Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 If the base radio is not operational, go to step 5. 3 Place the base radio associated with the power amplifier module being replaced in Service Mode, so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using Configuration/Service Software (CSS). See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. 243 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 4 If you choose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the Off (O) position. NOTICE:

It is not necessary to turn off the power supply for the power amplifier module you are replacing, as the power amplifier modules can be swapped out with the power on. 5 Remove the fan assembly to gain access to the power amplifier module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 for instructions on removing the fan assembly. IMPORTANT: The power amplifier module can be swapped out without shutting the power off. However, minimize the amount of time that the fan is removed, so the circuitry that remains powered on does not overheat and shut down. CAUTION: Let the power amplifier module cool before performing the following step which exposes surfaces of the module that can be extremely hot. 6 Using a T20 bit, loosen the two captive screws on the front of the power amplifier module to disengage them from the chassis. 7 Remove the RF output QN connector from the front of the power amplifier module, as follows:

a Pull the power amplifier out of the chassis far enough so that the QN (quick-N) RF output connector is accessible. b Disconnect the cable from the power amplifier. Figure 102: GTR 8000 Power Amplifier RF Cable (Front) 8 Using the handle, gently pull the power amplifier module straight out, along the guides on which 9 Reconnect the RF cable to the RF output QN connector on the front of the power amplifier it sits. module, as follows:

a While holding the RF cable, slide in the replacement power amplifier module along the guiding rails until the RF cable connector can reach the RF connection on the front of the module. b Push the RF cables connector on to the module connector until it snaps securely into place. 244 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 10 Slide in the replacement power amplifier module until it engages with the backplane. A slight push may be needed to securely engage the module. IMPORTANT: If the power amplifier module stops well before it is engaged, it is in an incorrect position. Either it is in the wrong slot or it is rotated 180 . 11 Using a T20 bit, tighten the two captive screws on the front of the module to secure the power amplifier module to the chassis. 12 Reinstall the fan unit. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237. NOTICE: If you chose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the On (I) position. 13 Verify that the power amplifier is operating properly:

The power amplifier Status and Transmit LEDs are green. The Alarm LED is off. Proper operation is confirmed using software tools, such as Unified Event Manager (UEM) or the Transmitter Metering Screen in CSS. 14 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9.9 Replacing a GTR 8000 Base Radio Backplane In a GTR 8000 Base Radio, the backplane is the circuit board at the rear of the card cage which connects the power supply, transceiver, and power amplifier. Figure 103: GTR 8000 Base Radio Showing Connections to Backplane Through Backplane Cover on page 245 shows the metal cover that must be removed to access the backplane. See GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections

(Integrated Voice and Data) on page 105 and GTR 8000 Base Radio Rear Connections (HPD) on page 108 for the ports and cables that must be disconnected to remove the cover. Figure 103: GTR 8000 Base Radio Showing Connections to Backplane Through Backplane Cover Prerequisites: The procedure assumes the following service access clearances:

245 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures At least 60.96 cm (2 ft) access at the rear of the rack, or At least 60.96 cm (2 ft) access on one side of the rack, and at least 6 inches at the rear of the rack Procedure:

1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 If the base radio is not operational, go to step 4. 3 Place the base radio in Service Mode, so the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure:

a Connect to the transceiver Ethernet service port using Configuration/Service Software (CSS). See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 4 Push the power rocker switch power supply unit to Off (O). 5 Label and disconnect all cables from the base radio backplane. NOTICE: An RF output cable from the power amplifier connects through a metal bulkhead to the left of the backplane. This cable does not need to be disconnected. However, to access the backplane screw behind the metal bulkhead, using a T20 bit, remove the two screws securing the bulkhead to the inner chassis at the left of the backplane. 6 Label then disconnect all cables from the front ports on the transceiver. 7 Remove the power supply module from the chassis as follows:

a Using a T20 bit, loosen the two captive screws on the front of the power supply to disengage them from the chassis. WARNING: Let the power supply module cool before performing the following step which exposes surfaces of the module that can be extremely hot. b Pull on the metal handle to disengage the power supply module from the backplane, and remove it completely from the chassis. 8 Remove the fan assembly to gain access to the transceiver and power amplifier modules. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237. 9 Disengage the transceiver module and the power amplifier from the backplane as follows:

a Using a T20 bit, loosen the two captive screws on the front of each module, so they disengage from the chassis. WARNING: Let the power amplifier module cool before performing the following step which exposes surfaces of the module that can be extremely hot. b Using the handles, gently pull the modules until the modules disengage from the backplane. 10 Using a T20 bit, remove the screw that secures the tab on the right Electromagnetic Interference

(EMI) spring panel. See Figure 105: EMI Spring Panel Guide Rail Alignment on page 249. NOTICE: Removing the left EMI spring panel is operational. 246 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 11 Carefully slide the EMI spring panel forward, noting how the panel is affixed onto the power supply guide rail. The panel does not need to be completely removed. 12 Remove the fan cable from the backplane, from the front of the chassis, with the backplane still secured to the chassis, as follows:

a Follow the fan cable with your hand from its connector at the front of the chassis to its connection to the backplane, through the card cage section from where the power supply module was removed. b Remove the fan cable multi-pin connector from the backplane by squeezing the top and bottom of the connector and pulling the connector straight out from the backplane. 13 Using a T20 bit, remove the five screws that secure the metal backplane cover and the backplane circuit board to the rear of the chassis. 14 Remove the metal backplane cover and the backplane circuit board. 15 Place the new backplane circuit board in the same location and orientation as the one removed. 16 IMPORTANT: Start threading all five screws into the backplane circuit board and backplane cover before they are fully seated and secured. Secure the new backplane circuit board and the backplane cover to the rear of the base radio chassis with the five screws removed in step 13. Torque to 18+/-2 in-lb. 17 Reinstall the metal bulkhead that holds the RF output cable from the power amplifier, using the two screws removed in step 5 to secure it to the inner chassis at the left of the backplane. 18 Connect the fan cable to the new backplane, from the front of the chassis, with the backplane secured to the chassis, as follows:

a Locate the port in the new backplane for the fan cable multi-pin connector. b Follow the fan cable with your hand from its connector at the front of the chassis to the connector at the other end of the cable. c Push the fan cables multi-pin connector, with the tab up, into the correct location in the backplane. 247 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 104: Fan Cable Connector 248 19 Slide the EMI spring panel back into the cabinet. Ensure that the offset tabs on the panel are to the right (inside) of the power supply guide rail, so that the panel does not catch on the fan cable. Figure 105: EMI Spring Panel Guide Rail Alignment MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 20 Using a T20 bit, reinstall the screw into the EMI spring panel tab. 21 Slide the transceiver and power amplifier modules into the new backplane. A slight push may be needed to fully engage the modules. 22 Reconnect all cables to the front ports on the transceiver, if applicable. 23 Using a T20 bit, secure the transceiver and power amplifier modules to the chassis with the two captive screws on the front of each module. 24 Reinstall the fan assembly. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237. 25 Slide the power supply into the chassis, pushing gently until it securely seats in the new backplane. NOTICE: If the power supply does not seat properly, remove it and adjust the EMI spring panel properly against the mounting flange. 26 Using a T20 bit, tighten the two captive screws on the front of the power supply. 27 Reconnect all cables at the rear of the base radio. 28 Set the power supply rocker switch to On (I). 29 Verify that the LEDs indicate the modules you removed and reinstalled are operational:

249 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures The Status LEDs are green. The Alarm LEDs are off. The power supply Fan LED is off. 30 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 31 Re-configure the Security Settings into the Backplane. See Setting the Serial Security Services in CSS on page 138. 32 Verify proper operation using software tools, including:

Unified Event Manager (UEM) CSS 9.10 Replacing a Preselector Filter Figure 106: Preselector Filter (700/800 MHz) Figure 107: Preselector Filter (UHF) 250 Figure 108: Preselector Filter (VHF) MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures IMPORTANT: You can replace a preselector filter without shutting the power down. Procedure:

1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Remove the preselector from the base radio as follows:

a Using T20 bit, remove the two screws which secure the preselector to the flange of the base b Label and disconnect the left and right QMA cables from the front of the preselector. 3 Install the preselector to the base radio as follows:

a Using T20 bit, secure the slide rail to the base radio flange using the two screws removed in radio . step 2a. b Reconnect the left and right QMA cables to the preselector. c Tune the preselector. See Tuning a Preselector on page 159. 4 Verify that the system is operating properly using fault management software, including:

Unified Event Manager (UEM). Transmitter Metering Screen in Configuration/Service Software (CSS). 9.11 Replacing Transmit Filters (700/800 MHz) The following figure shows the transmit filter installed on a tray. 251 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 109: Transmit Filter (700/800 MHz) WARNING: Shock hazard. The GTR 8000 Base Radio contains dangerous voltages which can cause severe electrical shock to personnel or damage to equipment. Set the rocker switches on the front of the associated power supplies to the off position before servicing this component in the base radio. IMPORTANT: When using this procedure to replace or remove the transmit filter, the preceding WARNING applies and the site must be powered down before starting the replacement procedure if the entire site is connected to the transmit filter being removed. Powering down the site causes any affiliated subscribers to relocate to another channel at an adjacent site. Disable the channels before powering down so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Disable a channel using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or Configuration/

Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 At the site, place all base radios in Service Mode that are using the transmit filter module being replaced. Port Link on page 140. a Connect to transceiver module Ethernet service port. See Connecting Through an Ethernet b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switches on the front of the power supplies to the OFF (O) position. 4 Remove the transmit filter tray from the rack as follows:

a Label and disconnect the Tx input, antenna output, and ground cables from the transmit filter. b Using a T30 bit, remove the two screws which secure the tray to the rack. c Slide the tray out the front of the rack. 252 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 5 Using a T20 bit, remove the transmit filter from the tray by removing the screws that attach it to the tray. 6 Install the new transmit filter in the tray as follows:

a Place the new transmit filter in the tray in the same location and orientation as the module b Using a T20 bit, secure the replacement transmit filter to the tray using the screws removed that you removed. in step 5. 7 Re-install the transmit filter tray in the rack as follows:

a Slide the tray in the front of the rack. b Using a T30 bit, secure the tray to the rack with the two screws removed in step 4b. c Reconnect the Tx input, Antenna output, and ground cables to the transmit filter. 8 Set the rocker switches on the front of the power supplies to the ON (I) position. 9 Place each base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9.12 Replacing the Dual Circulator/Isolator Modules For a GTR 8000 Base Radio, the following Radio Frequency Distribution System (RFDS) modules are assembled in a tray:

External Dual Circulator/Isolator Low Pass/Harmonic Filter Circulator Load (a module connected directly to the External Dual Circulator module) Figure 110: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz) on page 254 and Figure 111:

External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF) on page 255 show these modules installed on a tray. 253 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 110: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (700/800 MHz) 254 Figure 111: External Dual Circulator/Isolator Tray (UHF) MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures These modules can be replaced individually, or if ordered together, you may receive the modules already secured to a tray. WARNING: Shock hazard. The GTR 8000 Base Radio contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage to equipment. Set the power supply switches for the affected equipment to the Off (O) position when servicing this component in the system. IMPORTANT: Powering down the base radio causes any affiliated subscribers to relocate to another channel at the site or another channel at an adjacent site. Place the base radios in Service Mode before powering down so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Placing a base radio in Service Mode is performed using either Unified Event Manager

(UEM) or Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) strap and connect its cable to a verified good ground. CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Place the base radio in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. 255 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the Off (O) position. 4 Remove the filter tray from the rack as follows:

a Label and disconnect the RF input, RF output, and ground cables from the tray. b Disconnect the Circulator Load temperature cable at the inline connector (which disconnects it from the cable leading to the RF Peripherals port on the base radio backplane). c Using a T30 bit, remove the two screws which secure the tray to the rack. d Slide the tray out the front of the rack. 5 Perform one of the following actions:

If Then If you are replac-

ing an individual External Dual Circulator/Isola-

tor module, perform the following actions:

a Label and disconnect the RF input and RF output cables from the External Dual Circulator module. b Unscrew the connector that secures the Circulator Load to the Ex-

ternal Dual Circulator module. c Remove the screws that secure the circulator baseplate to the tray. d Remove the circulator module including the circulator load module that extends beyond the baseplate. e Place the new External Dual Circulator module in the tray in the same location and orientation as the module you are replacing. f Secure the new External Dual Circulator module baseplate to the tray using the screws previously removed. g Connect the RF input and RF output cables to the new External Dual Circulator module. h Connect the Circulator Load to the External Dual Circulator mod-

If you are replac-

ing an individual Circulator Load, ule. i Go to step 6 using the existing tray. perform the following actions:

ternal Dual Circulator module. b Remove the Circulator Load module. a Unscrew the connector that secures the Circulator Load to the Ex-

c Place the new Circulator Load module on the tray in the same posi-

tion and orientation as the module you removed. d Secure the new Circulator Load to the External Dual Circulator module by tightening the connector. e Connect the Circulator load cable to the RF Peripherals port on the base radio backplane. f Go to step 6 using the existing tray. If you are replac-

ing an individual perform the following actions:

256 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures If Then Low Pass/

Harmonic Filter module, a Label and disconnect the RF input and RF output cables from the Low Pass/Harmonic Filter module. b Pull up firmly to release the Low Pass Filter module from the two semi-circular clips holding it in place. c Insert the new Low Pass Filter module into the semi-circular clips using the same orientation as the module you are replacing. d Connect the RF input and RF output cables to the new Low Pass/

Harmonic Filter module. e Go to step 6 using the existing tray. go to step 6 using the replacement tray. If you are replac-

ing the entire tray including all of its modules, 6 Install the tray in the rack as follows:

a Slide the tray into the appropriate location through the front of the rack. b Using a T30 bit, secure the slide rail to the rack using the two screws removed in step 4 c. c Reconnect the RF input, RF output, and ground cables. d Reconnect the Circulator Load temperature cable at the inline connector (which connects it to the cable leading to the RF Peripherals port on the base radio backplane). 7 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the On (I) position. 8 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9 Verify that the base radio is operating properly using fault management software, including:

UEM The Transmitter Metering Screen in CSS 9.13 Replacing a Duplexer (700/800 MHz) The following figure shows the duplexer installed on a tray. 257 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures Figure 112: Duplexer Module (700/800 MHz) WARNING: Shock hazard. The GTR 8000 Base Radio contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage to equipment. Set the power supply switches for the affected equipment to the Off (O) position when servicing this component in the base radio. IMPORTANT: Powering down the base radio causes any affiliated subscribers to relocate to another channel at the site or another channel at an adjacent site. Place the base radio in Service Mode before powering down so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Placing a base radio in Service Mode is performed using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Place the base radio with the duplexer module being replaced in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the device modules Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the Off (O) position. 4 Remove the duplexer tray from the rack as follows:

a Label and disconnect the Rx output, Tx input, antenna output, and ground cables from the b Using a T30 bit, remove the two screws which secure the tray to the rack. c Slide the tray out the front of the rack. 5 Using a T20 bit, remove the duplexer from the tray by removing the screws that attach it to the 6 Install the new duplexer in the tray, as follows:

a Place the new duplexer in the tray in the same location and orientation as the module that duplexer. tray. you removed. 258 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures b Using the T20 bit, secure the replacement duplexer to the tray using the screws removed in step 5. 7 Re-install the duplexer tray in the rack as follows:

a Slide the tray in the front of the rack. b Using a T30 bit, secure the tray to the rack with the two screws removed in step 4 b. c Reconnect the Rx output, Tx input, Antenna output, and ground cables to the duplexer. 8 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the On (I) position. 9 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9.14 Replacing a Duplexer (UHF) Figure 113: Duplexer Module (UHF) WARNING: Shock hazard. The GTR 8000 Base Radio contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage to equipment. Set the power supply switches for the affected equipment to the Off (O) position when servicing this component in the base radio. 259 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures IMPORTANT: Powering down the base radio causes any affiliated subscribers to relocate to another channel at the site or another channel at an adjacent site. Place the base radio in Service Mode before powering down, so that the system does not attribute the loss of a channel to a failure. Placing a base radio in Service Mode is performed using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Place the base radio with the duplexer module being replaced in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the device modules Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the Off (O) position. 4 Remove the duplexer from the base radio, as follows:

a Label and disconnect the LO Side Frequency, High Side Frequency, antenna output, and ground cables from the duplexer. b Using a T20 bit, remove the four screws which secure the duplexer to the rack. 5 Install the duplexer to the rack as follows:

a Using a T20 bit, secure the duplexer to the rack using the four screws removed in step 4b. b Reconnect the LO Side Frequency, High Side Frequency, antenna output, and ground cables from the duplexer. 6 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the On (I) position. 7 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 260 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures 9.15 Replacing a Duplexer (VHF) Figure 114: Duplexer Module for IVD (VHF) WARNING: Shock hazard. The GTR 8000 Base Radio contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage to equipment. Set the power supply switches for the affected equipment to the Off (O) position when servicing this component in the base radio. IMPORTANT: Powering down the base radio causes any affiliated subscribers to relocate to another channel at the site or another channel at an adjacent site. Place the base radio in Service Mode before powering down so the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Placing a base radio in Service Mode is performed using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Place the base radio with the duplexer module being replaced in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the Off (O) position. 4 Remove the duplexer from the base radio as follows:

261 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures a Label and disconnect the Rx output, Tx input, antenna output, and ground cables from the b Using a T20 bit, remove the four screws which secure the duplexer to the rack. 5 Install the duplexer to the rack as follows:

a Using a T20 bit, secure the duplexer to the rack using the four screws removed in step step 4 duplexer. b. b Reconnect the Rx output, Tx input, antenna output, and ground cables from the duplexer. 6 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the On (I) position. 7 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 9.16 Replacing an Antenna Relay WARNING: Shock hazard. The GTR 8000 Base Radio contains dangerous voltages which can cause electrical shock to personnel or damage to equipment. Set the power supply switches for the affected equipment to the Off (O) position when servicing this component in the base radio. IMPORTANT: Powering down the base radio causes any affiliated subscribers to relocate to another channel at the site or another channel at an adjacent site. Place the base radio in Service Mode before powering down so that the system does not attribute the loss of channel to a failure. Placing a base radio in Service Mode is performed using either the Unified Event Manager (UEM) or Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

ground. 1 Wear an Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) wrist strap and connect its cable to a verified good CAUTION: Wear the ESD strap throughout this procedure to prevent ESD damage to any components. 2 Place the base radio in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the device modules Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. c Click Change to Service Mode. d At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 3 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the Off (O) position. 4 Remove the antenna relay from the base radio, as follows:

a Mark all cables and remove. RX (NC) position, TX (NO) position, Antenna (C) connection position, and power connection position. 262 MN003286A01-E Chapter 9: GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU Procedures b Using a T15 bit, remove the two screws holding the antenna relay to the backplane cover and remove the antenna relay. 5 Replace the antenna relay to the base radio, as follows:

a Using a T15 bit, attach the new antenna relay using the screws removed in step 4b, and torque to 15 in-lb. b Attach all cables and tighten the coax connectors. 6 Set the rocker switch on the front of the power supply to the On (I) position. 7 Place the base radio in Normal Mode, as follows:

a From the menu, select Service Test and Measurement Screen. b Click Change to Normal Mode. c At the confirmation screen, click OK. The base radio halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 263 MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference Chapter 10 GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference Reference information for GTR 8000 Base Radios and subsystems includes LED states and specifications for individual GTR 8000 Base Radio RFDS modules. This chapter contains supplemental reference information relating to GTR 8000 Base Radio. 10.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio LEDs Many of the LEDs on the GTR 8000 Base Radio provide an indication for one or more the following conditions:

The Lamp Test state verifies that the indicators are operational. For Lamp Test, the LEDs stay in this state for a second or less. A failure has occurred that can be fixed only through replacement. If a reason other than a hardware fault is causing the state, Impaired is noted. The device is not fully operational due to internal or external causes. Some corrective action must be taken to get back to 100% operation. The device is not in service due to running of diagnostics or initializing. Lamp Test Failure Impaired Booting Up Online The device is fully operational. The LEDs for the transceiver and power amplifier modules can be viewed through the door next to the fans with the door opened or closed. 10.1.1 GTR 8000 Base Radio Transceiver LEDs Figure 115: Transceiver LEDs (viewable through a drop-down door) 264 MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference 10.1.1.1 Transceiver Status and Alarm LEDs The Status LED is green, and the Alarm LED is red. These LEDs are either off, on, or blinking depending on the condition of the transceiver. Table 61: Transceiver Status and Alarm LEDs Green (Status LED) Red (Alarm LED) Condition No Power Lamp Test (During Test) Impaired Operation Critical Failure Booting Up Operational Off On On Off On Blinking Blinking Off On On Off Off For detailed information on current operation and fault status, use the Configuration/Service Software

(CSS) Status Panel screen. 10.1.1.2 Transceiver Ethernet Link Status LEDs The following LEDs indicate Ethernet link and status connections between the transceiver, LAN, and the front panel service port. Table 62: Transceiver Ethernet Link Status LEDs LED Name Indication LED Status ENET SC-A (external con-

nection to SITE CTRL A on the rear of the chassis) Ethernet link inactive (Remote PHY/MAC not de-

tected.) Ethernet link established (Remote PHY/MAC de-

tected and auto-negotiation completed.) GTR 8000 Base Radio Ethernet link active (Ac-

tively transmitting or receiving data.) Amber (blink-

ENET SCB (external con-

nection to SITE CTRL B on the rear of the chassis) Ethernet link inactive (Remote PHY/MAC not de-

tected.) Ethernet link established (Remote PHY/MAC de-

tected and auto-negotiation completed.) GTR 8000 Base Radio Ethernet link active (Ac-

tively transmitting or receiving data.) Amber (blink-

ENET SVC (front panel service port) Ethernet link inactive (Remote PHY/MAC not de-

tected.) Off Green ing) Off Green ing) Off Green Ethernet link established (Remote PHY/MAC de-

tected and auto-negotiation completed.) GTR 8000 Base Radio Ethernet link active (Ac-

tively transmitting or receiving data.) Amber (blink-

ing) 265 MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference 10.1.1.3 Transceiver Application-Controlled LEDs The application-controlled LEDs can be green, red, or amber depending on the conditions. Table 63: Transceiver Application-Controlled LEDs LED 2 Control Channel Status Green Amber LED 3 Tx/

Service Sta-

tus Green Amber LED 4 Infra-

structure Pay-

load Link Sta-

tus Green Amber RF Channel Interference Red (blink-

LED 1 Re-

ceive Sta-

tus Green Amber Amber

(blinking) Green ing) Green Red (blink-

ing) Condition Booting Up*

Lamp Test Receiver Inhibited Receiver Active Monitor Before Data Transmit Illegal Carrier Control Channel (Operating) Control Channel (Failsoft) Service Mode Transmitter Inhibited Infrastructure Link Connected

(V.24, IP, and 4wire/V.24) Partial Infrastructure Link Es-

tablished (V.24 link established, 4wire link not established) Infrastructure Link Disconnect-

ed (V.24, IP, and 4wire/V-24) 266 Green Green

(blinking) Amber Amber (blink-

ing) Green Amber Green (blinking)

* During a normal boot up sequence, LEDs 1 through 4 blink from left to right and from right to left continuously for several seconds. MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference 10.1.1.4 Transceiver Services-Controlled LEDs For the service-controlled LEDs, the color of all LEDs must be observed to interpret the condition of the transceiver. Table 64: Transceiver Services-Controlled LEDs LED 7 Amber Condition Lamp Test Receiver Inhibited Receiver Reference Failure Transmitter Inhibited SWDL (Software Download transfer in progress) Warning Minor Hardware Failure Major Hardware Failure Critical Hardware Failure VSWR Fault LED 5 SWDL/

VLAN Amber Green LED 6 Fault Amber Red Red Red Amber Amber (blinking) Red (blinking) Red Red 10.1.2 Transceiver Option Card Intercom LED The Transceiver Option Card has a single Intercom LED that indicates the intercom function between the ON (amber) and OFF (green) states. Figure 116: Transceiver Option Card Intercom LED (viewable behind the fan module) 267 MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference 10.1.3 Power Amplifier LEDs Figure 117: Power Amplifier LEDs, viewable through a drop-down door The power amplifier LED color must be observed to interpret the power amplifiers condition. For example:

If the Alarm LED is red and the Transmit and Status LEDs are not lit, the condition is PA Failure and the power amplifier module should be replaced. Condition Transmit (XMIT) Alarm Table 65: Power Amplifier LEDs Power Off Lamp Test Not Transmitting Transmitting at Full Requested Output Power Transmitting at Less Than Re-

quested Power PA Failure Receive Only Transmitter Inhibited 10.1.4 Fan Module LED Amber Off Off Green Amber Red Off Off Status Off Green Green Green Green Off Off Off Red Off Off Red Red Off Green Red (blinking) The fan module has one Fan Alarm LED visible on the lower right corner of its front panel. The Alarm is red during Lamp Test (for 1 second or less), and remains red if the fan failures. A fan failure alarm occurs if the built-in speed sensor detects if either fan drops 30% below rated speed. A red Fan Alarm indicates that the fan module must be replaced. 268 Figure 118: Fan Module-Alarm LED (lower right corner) MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference NOTICE: The fan operates at full capability for at least seven days after the fan alarm first occurs, allowing normal operation without requiring an immediate service call. 10.1.5 Power Supply LEDs The power supply has three LEDs visible from the front panel. To interpret its condition, observe the color of all the power supply LEDs. For example:

If the Alarm and Fan LEDs are red and the Status LED is green, the condition is "Lamp Test"

If the Alarm LED is red and the Fan and Status LEDs are not lit, the condition is "Power Supply Failure"

Figure 119: Power Supply Module 269 MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference Table 66: Power Supply LEDs Condition Power Off Lamp Test Online Impaired Power Supply Failure Power Supply Fan Failure Fan Off Red Off Off Off Red Status Off Green Green Green Off Off Alarm Off Red Off Red Red Red (blinking) 10.2 RFDS Equipment Specifications This section provides specifications for all the RFDS equipment. IMPORTANT: Specifications are subject to change without notice. 10.2.1 Transmit Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz) Table 67: Transmit Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz) 800 MHz Typical Notes Tx Filter Spec Limit

(700/800 MHz) 764776 MHz, 851870 MHz 0.3 dB 1.12:1 40 dB Frequency range Insertion loss VSWR max. Rx selectivity Input Connector Output Connector Peak instantaneous power 32000 W Passive Intermodulation 135 dBc Power monitor connector Dsub-9 Male Forward power range Reverse power range 0-500 W 0-500 W 0.7 dB 1.5:1 35 dB 7/16 7/16 2 x 43 dBm 0-5V DC out 0-5V DC out 270 MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference 10.2.2 Preselector Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz) Table 68: Preselector Filter Specifications (700/800 MHz) Frequency range Insertion loss VSWR max. Tx selectivity Input Connector Output Connector Tuning range Bandwidth Insertion loss VSWR max. Input Connector Output Connector Preselector Spec Limit

(700/800 MHz) 792806 MHz 792825 MHz 1 dB 1.5:1 15 dB QMA QMA 380433 MHz, 435470 MHz, 470524 MHz 4 MHz 2 dB 1.9:1 Mini-UHF Mini-UHF 10.2.3 Preselector Filter Specifications (UHF) Table 69: Preselector Filter Specifications (UHF) Preselector Spec Limit

(UHF) Typical Typical 0.7 dB 1.3:1 18 dB 1.3 dB 1.5:1 10.2.4 Preselector Filter Specifications (VHF) Table 70: Preselector Filter Specifications (VHF) Tuning range Bandwidth Insertion loss 136154 MHz, 150174 MHz 4 MHz 1.3 dB Preselector Spec Limit

(VHF) Typical 1.1 dB 271 Typical Notes Preselector Spec Limit

(VHF) Typical MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference VSWR max. Input Connector Output Connector 1.9:1 Mini-UHF Mini-UHF 10.2.5 Duplexer Specifications (700/800 MHz) Table 71: Duplexer Specifications (700/800 MHz) Duplexer Spec Limit

(700/800 MHz) 764776 MHz, 851870 MHz 792806 MHz, 806825 MHz Tx Frequency range Rx Frequency range Insertion loss Tx Insertion loss Rx VSWR max. Rx isolation Tx isolation Antenna Connector Rx/Tx Output Connector 1 dB 1 dB 1.5:1 80 dB 80 dB QN QN 10.2.6 Duplexer Specifications (UHF) Table 72: Duplexer Specifications (UHF) 380403 MHz, 403435 MHz, 435470 MHz, 470494 MHz, 494512 MHz 1.3 dB 1.3 dB 1.3:1 Frequency range Insertion loss Tx*

Insertion loss Rx*

VSWR max. Rx isolation*

272 0.5 dB 0.6 dB 1.23:1 85 dB 85 dB 1.1 dB 1.1 dB 1.2:1 Duplexer Spec Limit

(UHF) Typical Notes Passive Intermodulation

-120 dBc 2 x 43 dBm MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference Duplexer Spec Limit

(UHF) Typical Notes R/T 5 MHz R/T 3 MHz R/T 5 MHz R/T 3 MHz

* For <470 MHz R/T can be as low as 3 MHz and for >470 MHz R/T can be a low as 2 MHz; however, insertion loss or isolation specs may not be met.

<470 MHz

>470 MHz Tx isolation*

<470 MHz

>470 MHz 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB 100 dB Antenna Connector N female Rx/Tx Output Connector N Female 10.2.7 Duplexer Specifications (VHF) Table 73: Duplexer Specifications (VHF) Frequency range Insertion loss Tx*

Insertion loss Rx*

VSWR max. Rx isolation*

Tx isolation*

Minimum Tx-Rx Frequency Spacing Antenna Connector Rx/Tx Output Connector Duplexer Spec Limit (VHF) 136146 MHz, 144160 MHz, 158174 MHz 1.3 dB 1.3 dB 1.5:1 75 dB 75 dB 1.5 MHz N female N Female Typical Notes 0.7 dB 0.7 dB 1.2:1 80 dB 77 dB

* Minimum Tx-Rx spacing may be as low as 1.0 MHz; however, insertion loss of isolation may not be met. 10.2.8 External Dual Circulator Specifications (700/800 MHz) Table 74: External Dual Circulator Specifications (700/800 MHz) Operating Frequency Range External Dual Circulator Spec Limit Typical

(700/800 MHz) 762870 MHz 273 External Dual Circulator Spec Limit (UHF) Typical MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference External Dual Circulator Spec Limit

(700/800 MHz) Insertion Loss Input Return Loss Reverse Isolation Power (continuous) Harmonic Attenuation Intermodulation (2 tone, 100 W each) Input Connector Output Connector 1.6 dB 18 dB 40 dB 200 W 60 dB 75 dBc RF cable with N male N female 10.2.9 External Dual Circulator Specifications (UHF) Table 75: External Dual Circulator Specifications (UHF) Operating Frequency Range Insertion Loss Input Return Loss Reverse Isolation Power (continuous) Input Connector Output Connector Harmonic Attenuation <10 GHz) 380435 MHz, 435470 MHz, 470524 MHz 1.6 dB 18 dB 40 dB 200 W 55 dB RF cable with N male N female 10.2.10 External Dual Circulator Specifications (VHF) Table 76: External Dual Circulator Specifications (VHF) Operating Frequency Range Insertion Loss Input Return Loss Reverse Isolation 274 136146 MHz, 144160 MHz, 158174 MHz 1.6 dB 18 dB 40 dB Typical 1.2 dB 42 dB 1.2 dB 24 dB 50 dB 0.7 dB 25 dB 50 dB External Dual Circulator Spec Limit (VHF) Typical MN003286A01-E Chapter 10: GTR 8000 Base Radio Reference External Dual Circulator Spec Limit (VHF) Typical Power (continuous) Harmonic Attenuation <10 GHz) 200 W 50 dB Input Connector Output Connector RF cable with N male N female 10.2.11 Antenna Relay Specifications Table 77: Antenna Relay Specifications Operating Frequency Range Maximum Input Power Coil Specifications Pull-in Voltage:

Drop-out Voltage:

Resistance:

Contact Specifications Type:

Actuation:

Pull-in time:

Drop-out Time and Remake NC Contacts:

Insertion Loss Isolation VSWR Maximum Temperature Range Terminations Input and Output Impedance Antenna Relay Spec Limit DC to 4 GHz @ 20 C 300 W @ 1-4 GHz 21.0 V min. 2.0 V max. 430 10% @ +20 C SPDT Failsafe (break before make) 20 ms max. @20 C 20 ms max. @20 C 0.30 dB max. 70 dB min. 1.3 : 1

-30 C to +80 C Female N-type 50 Ohms Typical 275 MN003286A01-E Chapter 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery Chapter 11 GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery This chapter provides references and information that assist in the recovery of a GTR 8000 Base Radio in the event of failure. 11.1 Recovering the GTR 8000 Base Radio Perform the following procedure to recover the GTR 8000 Base Radio. Process:

1 To replace, install, connect power, and cable the base radio, see GTR 8000 Base Radio Hardware Installation on page 94. 2 To replace the transceiver module, see Replacing a Transceiver Module on page 231 and follow steps 1 through 17. Procedures on page 222. 3 To replace other hardware devices within or on the chassis, see GTR 8000 Base Radio FRU 4 To perform basic device configuration and SWDL download, see Replacing a Transceiver Module on page 231 and follow steps 18 through 32. 11.2 Performing a Site Download With PSC 9600 Site Controllers When and where to use:

NOTICE: The following procedure does not apply to a site with a GCP 8000 Site Controller. To perform the download for a site with a GCP 8000 Site Controller, see Performing a Site Software Download With GCP 8000 Site Controllers on page 278. Procedure:

1 Transfer and install the latest software, using Software Download Manager with SNMPv1 package to the site controller and base radios, as follows:

a Connect an Ethernet straight through cable between the Ethernet port on the service computer/laptop and the Ethernet LAN switch. The laptop IP address must be set to an address on the subnet of the local site, which varies depending on the site and zone numbers. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. 2 Open the CSS application. 3 From the menu, select Tools Connection Configuration. The Connection Screen appears. 4 Verify that Ethernet is selected in the Connection Type area. 5 Specify the IP address for the device in the Ethernet Settings area. Perform one of the following actions:

276 MN003286A01-E Chapter 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery If Then If you know the IP ad-

dress of the device, perform the following actions:

a In the Device IP Address field, enter the IP address of If you do not know the IP address of the device, but know the system identifi-

cation of the device (the zone, physical site, sub-

site and device ID of the device), the device. b Go to step 6. perform the following actions:

a Click Device Name Wizard to open the Device Name Wizard dialog box. b From the Device list box, select the desired device type. c In the Zone, Physical Site, Subsite, and Device ID fields, enter the proper values. The DNS information of the device automatically appears in the Device IP Address field. d Click OK. e Go to step 6. 6 Click Connect to make the connection. 7 From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. The parameters download from the device to the service computer/laptop. When the download is complete, the CSS Main window opens. 8 Open the Software Download Manager application. CAUTION:

Make sure to load the correct version of the software. There is a possibility of a mismatch in software versions when replacing the transceiver module with an on-hand spare. If a mismatch in software versions occurs, this mismatch may cause the transceiver to go into a configuration mode of operation with a reason of Invalid Software Version. To exit the base radio out of configuration mode, see CSS Procedures > Changing from Configuration to Normal Mode in the CSS Online Help. 9 Download and install the necessary software onto the site controllers and base radio as follows:

a From the menu, select File File Manager. The Software Depot File Manager opens. b From the menu, select Component Operations Import Fileset. The Import a Fileset Into the Software Depot dialog box appears. c Click Browse and search for the swdlv1.cfg file, or use path E:\swdl\swdlv1.cfg. Click Open. d Click Generate to add the file to the Components In the Software Depot list. Click OK. e Exit the Software Depot File Manager. f From Software Download Manager, select the appropriate ASTRO 25 System Site Type. g Select the Zone, Site, and if applicable, the Subsite. h Click Connect. i For the Operations Type, select Transfer and Install. 277 MN003286A01-E Chapter 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery j For the Application Type, select both Repeater Site Controller and Site Repeater. k Select a Software Component from the drop-down list. l Click Start Operation to download and install the software. NOTICE: The Software Download Manager client software may display a warning that all device types must be upgraded at the same time and that Site Controller-only or Channel-only installs are prohibited. If that warning is displayed, ensure that you are performing a site software download rather than a single device software download. The site controllers and the base radios are all loaded with the new software. 11.3 Performing a Site Software Download With GCP 8000 Site Controllers Use the following procedure to perform a site software download with GCP 8000 site controllers. Procedure:

1 Connect an Ethernet straight through cable between the Ethernet port on the service computer/

laptop and the Ethernet service port on the site controller. The service computer/laptop IP address must be set to an address on the subnet of the local site, which varies depending on the site and zone numbers. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. NOTICE: If 802.1x services are enabled on the site controller, an 802.1x login account to connect to the Ethernet port is needed. An 802.1x account is a centrally managed account. See Chapter 6, 802.1x Service Port Procedures for GCP 8000 Site Controller in the 802.1x Service Ports on Switches manual. 2 Open the Software Download Manager application. CAUTION: Load the correct version of the software. There is a possibility of a mismatch in software versions when replacing the transceiver module with an on-hand spare. If a mismatch in software versions occurs, the transceiver may go into a configuration mode of operation with a reason of Invalid Software Version. To exit out of configuration mode, see CSS Procedures > Changing from Configuration to Normal Mode in the CSS Online Help. 3 From the Advanced Options menu, select the transfer type. 4 Download and install the necessary software onto the site controllers and base radios as follows:

a From the menu, select Action and choose one of the following:

Use DNS Server: This is the default option and is recommended for most cases. Use Standard ASTRO IPs (non-Tsub): Legacy option which relies upon a built-in IP Plan rather than the DNS Server. This option is not supported for Trunking Subsystems

(Tsubs). DNS Override: Use when running the Software Download Manager from a server that is not joined to the ASTRO 25 system domain. In order to use a DNS server in the ASTRO 25 system domain, the Override DNS Server dialog box is used to specify the DNS server IP address (defaults to the ASTRO 25 system level DNS server). Load DNS File: Use only in situations where a custom DNS configuration file has been provided. Typically, this option is selected when the site IP addresses are not configured to be part of an ASTRO 25 system. b From the menu, select File File Manager. 278 MN003286A01-E Chapter 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery c From the Software Depot File Manager menu, select Component Operations Import Fileset. d From the Import a Fileset Into the Software Depot dialog box, click Browse and search for the swdlv3.cfg file, or follow path E:\swdl\swdlv1.cfg or swdlv3.cfg. Click Open. NOTICE: Choose the swdlv1.cfg file if PSC 9600, QUANTAR, and ASTRO-TAC 9600 devices are mixed with G-Series devices at a site. The file appears in the Configuration File Path field of the Import a Fileset Into the Software Depot dialog box. e Click Generate. Click OK. the Import a Fileset Into the Software Depot dialog box closes and the software component appears in the Components In the Software Depot list of the Software Depot File Manager window. f Exit the Software Depot File Manager. g From Software Download Manager, click Open Site Mode. h Select the ASTRO 25 Site Type:Repeater, HPD, or Simulcast. i Select the Zone, Site, and if applicable, the Subsite. The Subsite ID is only available when the Site ID is between 1-64. j Click Connect. k If the device supports SNMPv3 protocol, a pop-up window appears with the security level option. Choose the required security level. Click OK. NOTICE: Depending on the size of the system, the window takes a few minutes to update. If the Ethernet connection to the site uses the Site Controller Service Port, you might need to enter an 802.1x login account to connect to the SC Service Port. An 802.1x account is a centrally managed account. The system connects to the specified zone and site. l If this is a simulcast site, from the Site View tab, click the icon in front of the Prime LAN folder, and Subsite folders. The entries under the Running Version column display the current version. The VLAN column displays the VLANs for all devices. m In the Operation Type, select Transfer and Install. n In the Application Type:

For an HPD site: select both HPD Site Controller and HPD Base Radio. For a repeater site: select both Repeater Site Controller and Site Repeater. For a trunked simulcast site: select Multisite Site Controller and Multisite Base Radio. o In the Software Component drop-down list, select the version for each site device. NOTICE: Both device software must be chosen as part of the site software download. p In the Simultaneous Channels Install drop down list, select the number of the channels to install simultaneously. Software Download Manager always installs all channels. For example: setting the Simultaneous Channels Install field to a specific number value means that those amounts of channels are installed simultaneously. 279 MN003286A01-E Chapter 11: GTR 8000 Base Radio Disaster Recovery NOTICE: The Simultaneous Channels Install field decreases the installation time. A warning is displayed if the site goes into failsoft, due to this setting. q Click Start Operation. NOTICE: If the Start Operation button is grayed out, SWDL has determined that there is a problem performing this operation to the selected devices. The button becomes active, when the appropriate operation set details are selected. If a fileset is damaged, the Transfer operation stops. Import a correct fileset and repeat the operation. r In the window that appears, click Proceed. The Transfer operation begins first. After the transfer is successfully completed, SWDL begins the Install operation. If the install was successful, the Operation Status bar displays green. If the install failed, the Operation Status bar displays red. s Disconnect and reconnect to verify that the selected devices have installed the desired version of the software. NOTICE: After installation, the new software version is present in the Running Version column. If the new version is not present, it indicates a problem. For more information, consult the Fixing a Transfer Failure section of the Software Download Manager manual. In many cases, a second attempt at transferring the software corrects the failure. If further attempts continue to fail, contact Motorola Solutions Support (MSS). 280 MN003286A01-E Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Appendix A Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits The required hardware and cables for the CA01958AA T2-2R Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. This appendix covers the option kits that are available for the conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio. Each section provides the necessary information to order, install, and configure each option kit. A.1 T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits The required hardware and cables for the CA01958AA T2-2R Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. These option kits add the capability of simplex operation, while expanding the receive capability over two or more separate RF channels through a single antenna. The option kits allow a single GTR 8000 Base Radio to be interfaced with up to three GPW 8000 Receivers. The GTR 8000 Base Radio provides both transmit and receive functionality. The GPW 8000 Receivers are used as additional receive channels. Four different Receiver Mute option kits are available:

T2-2R Receiver Mute Option CA01958AA (ADD: 2 GPW 8000 Receiver Hardware Kit - 4-Wire T3-3R Receiver Mute Option CA01959AA (ADD: 3 GPW 8000 Receiver Hardware Kit - 4-Wire T4-4R Receiver Mute Option CA01960AA (ADD: 4 GPW 8000 Receiver Hardware Kit - 4-Wire Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option CA01961AA (ADD: GPW 8000 Receiver Hardware No Splitter Kit - 4-

NOTICE: All Field Replaceable Unit (FRU), kit, and part numbers for all required components in each kit are listed in the parts list section for each receiver mute kit. A single standalone T7039A GTR 8000 Base Radio is required for each option kit. The option kit name determines the number of GPW 8000 Receivers. For example, a T2-2R option kit requires one GTR 8000 Base Radio and one GPW 8000 Receiver. A T3-3R requires one base radio and two receivers, and so on. The number defines the total number of G-series devices. Analog) Analog) Analog) Wire Analog) A.1.1 T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit The required hardware and cables for the CA01958AA T2-2R Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. The CA01958AA T2-2R Receiver Mute option kit is used with a standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio and one GPW 8000 Receiver. All option kit hardware and cables required are included in Table 78: T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List on page 282. NOTICE: The illustrations show a GPW 8000 Receiver with one chassis and one transceiver. A dual-slot chassis with two transceivers is available. 281 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 120: T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram NOTICE: See System Connector Ports (Conventional) on page 112 for a detailed description of the system connector pinouts. NOTICE: See Figure 122: T4-4R Receiver Mute Configuration on page 286 for an example of a Receiver Mute configuration. However, the T2-2R Receiver Mute configuration only has one GPW 8000 Receiver. A.1.1.1 T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List The required hardware and cables for the CA01958AA T2-2R Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. Table 78: T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List FRU Kit Part Number Description DLN6795 A CLN8788 A T2-2R RECEIVER MUTE HARDWARE, T2-2R RECEIVER MUTE 0182017V14 SPLITTER, 2 WAY 0285854Y01 NUT, M6-GROUND WIRE TO STUDS ON TRAY 0310909E32 SCRMCH M3X0.5X8 SPLTR MTG Quanti-

ty 1 1 1 2 4 282 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits FRU Kit Part Number Description Quanti-

ty 2 12 0310909A54 SCREW 3.5X30MM ANT RELAY MTG 0310909E46 0312016A49 0312016A54 SCRMCH M3.5X0.6X8 ANT CONN &

SIDE BRKTS SCREW FRONT PANEL TO CHASSIS

(blk) SCRTPG M6 X 1 X 10 (blk) TRAY TO RACK 07009370001 BRACKET CHASSIS SUPPORT 27009304001 CHASSIS, PERIPHERAL 40009272002 RELAY, COAXIAL 29V 5682347B20 BAG FOR SCREWS 64009317001 PANEL, FRONT 0285504U05 CAGE NUT, M6 FOR CABINET MTG 0310909C91 SCREW M6-GROUND CABLE TO BUS BAR AND TRAY TO CABINET CAGE NUTS CABLES, T2-2R RECEIVER MUTE 30009380001 CABLE, SAC 3013942M23 CBL N-N M-M 75 CM 3013942P19 CBL N-N M-F PNL 55 CM 3013943E20 CBL N-BNC M-M 60 CM 3013943N29 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 110 CM 3013943N30 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 120 CM 3084848Y01 CABLE RELAY W/TEMP 3071488H08 CABLE, GROUND TRAY TO BUS BAR 58009291001 Adapter, N Plug to BNC Jack 4210217A04 STRAP TIE .184X7.31 NYL BLK 10 5682347B21 BAG, PLASTIC 584 X 431 MM SVCWARR12 12 MONTH STANDARD WARRANTY 4 4 2 1 1 1 1 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 CKN6941 A A.1.2 T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit The CA01959AA T3-3R Receiver Mute option kit is used with a standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio and two GPW 8000 Receivers. All option kit hardware and cables required are included in Table 79: T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List on page 284. NOTICE: The illustrations show a GPW 8000 Receiver with one chassis and one transceiver. A dual-slot chassis with two transceivers is available. 283 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 121: T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram NOTICE: See System Connector Ports (Conventional) on page 112 for a detailed description of system connector pinouts. NOTICE: See Figure 122: T4-4R Receiver Mute Configuration on page 286 for an example of a Receiver Mute configuration. However, the T3-3R Receiver Mute configuration only has two GPW 8000 Receivers. A.1.2.1 T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List The required hardware and cables for the CA01959AA T3-3R Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. Table 79: T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List FRU Kit Part Number Description DLN6796 A CLN8789 A T3-3R RECEIVER MUTE HARDWARE, T3-3R RECEIVER MUTE 0182017V15 SPLITTER, 3WAY Quanti-

ty 1 1 1 284 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits FRU Kit Part Number Description Quanti-

ty 0285854Y01 NUT, M6-GROUND WIRE TO STUDS ON TRAY 0310909E32 SCRMCH M3X0.5X8 SPLTR MTG 0310909A54 SCREW 3.5X30MM ANT RELAY MTG 0310909E46 0312016A49 0312016A54 SCRMCH M3.5X0.6X8 ANT CONN &

SIDE BRKTS 12 SCREW FRONT PANEL TO CHASSIS

(blk) SCRTPG M6 X 1 X 10 (blk) TRAY TO RACK 07009370001 BRACKET CHASSIS SUPPORT 27009304001 CHASSIS, PERIPHERAL 40009272002 RELAY, COAXIAL 29V 5682347B20 BAG FOR SCREWS 64009317001 PANEL, FRONT 0285504U05 CAGE NUT, M6 FOR CABINET MTG 0310909C91 SCREW M6-GROUND CABLE TO BUS BAR AND TRAY TO CABINET CAGE NUTS CABLES, T3-3R RECEIVER MUTE CKN694 2A 30009380001 CABLE, SAC 3013942M23 CBL N-N M-M 75 CM 3013942P19 CBL N-N M-F PNL 55 CM 3013943E20 CBL N-BNC M-M 60 CM 3013943N29 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 110 CM 3013943N30 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 120 CM 3013943N31 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 130 CM 3084848Y01 CABLE RELAY W/TEMP 3071488H08 CABLE, GROUND TRAY TO BUS BAR 58009291001 Adapter, N Plug to BNC Jack 4210217A04 STRAP TIE .184X7.31 NYL BLK 10 5682347B21 BAG, PLASTIC 584 X 431 MM SVCWARR12 12 MONTH STANDARD WARRANTY 2 4 2 4 4 2 1 1 1 1 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3 1 1 A.1.3 T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit The CA01960AA T4-4R Receiver Mute option kit is used with a standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio and three GPW 8000 Receivers. All option kit hardware and cables required are included in Table 80:

T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List on page 287. 285 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits NOTICE: The photos and illustrations show a GPW 8000 Receiver with one chassis and one transceiver. A dual-slot chassis with two transceivers is available. Figure 122: T4-4R Receiver Mute Configuration Figure 123: T4-4R Splitter and Antenna Relay Tray The wiring diagram for the T4-4R Receiver Mute option kit outlines the connections for all cables and provides part numbers for each type. 286 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 124: T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram NOTICE: See System Connector Ports (Conventional) on page 112 for a detailed description of system connector pinouts. A.1.3.1 T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List The required hardware and cables for the CA01960AA T4-4R Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. Table 80: T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List FRU Kit Part Number Description DLN6797 A CLN8790 A T4-4R RECEIVER MUTE HARDWARE, T4-4R RECEIVER MUTE 0182017V16 SPLITTER, 4WAY Quanti-

ty 1 1 1 287 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits FRU Kit Part Number Description Quanti-

ty 0285854Y01 NUT, M6-GROUND WIRE TO STUDS ON TRAY 0310909E32 SCRMCH M3X0.5X8 SPLTR MTG 0310909A54 SCREW 3.5X30MM ANT RELAY MTG 0310909E46 0312016A49 0312016A54 SCRMCH M3.5X0.6X8 ANT CONN &

SIDE BRKTS 12 SCREW FRONT PANEL TO CHASSIS

(blk) SCRTPG M6 X 1 X 10 (blk) TRAY TO RACK 07009370001 BRACKET CHASSIS SUPPORT 27009304001 CHASSIS, PERIPHERAL 40009272002 RELAY, COAXIAL 29V 5682347B20 BAG FOR SCREWS 64009317001 PANEL, FRONT 0285504U05 CAGE NUT, M6 FOR CABINET MTG 0310909C91 SCREW M6-GROUND CABLE TO BUS BAR AND TRAY TO CABINET CAGE NUTS CABLES, T4-4R RECEIVER MUTE CKN694 3A 30009380001 CABLE, SAC 3013942M23 CBL N-N M-M 75 CM 3013942P19 CBL N-N M-F PNL 55 CM 3013943E20 CBL N-BNC M-M 60 CM 3013943N29 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 110 CM 3013943N30 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 120 CM 3013943N31 CBL BNC-BNC M-M 130 CM 3084848Y01 CABLE RELAY W/TEMP 3071488H08 CABLE, GROUND TRAY TO BUS BAR 58009291001 Adapter, N Plug to BNC Jack 4210217A04 STRAP TIE .184X7.31 NYL BLK 10 5682347B21 BAG, PLASTIC 584 X 431 MM SVCWARR12 12 MONTH STANDARD WARRANTY 2 4 2 4 4 2 1 1 1 1 4 5 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 4 1 1 288 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits A.1.4 Expected Site Performance for T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute The additional cables, splitter, and relay affect receiver sensitivity and transmitter output power. Use the attenuation values found in this section to determine the expected site performance. Other base radio and receiver specifications are not affected. Table 81: Total Transmit and Receive Attenuation for T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Band Type Attenuation CA01958AA: T2-2R CA01959AA: T3-3R CA019860AA: T4-4R 3.7 dB typical 4.0 dB maximum 5.6 dB typical 5.9 dB maximum 7.0 dB typical 7.3 dB maximum VHF Rx Port to Port Isolation 32 dB typical 27 dB typical 30 dB typical VHF Receive (Rx) VHF Transmit (Tx) UHF Rx UHF Tx 800 MHz Rx 800 MHz Rx Port to Port Isola-

tion 800 MHz Tx 0.3 dB typical 0.4 dB maximum 0.3 dB typical 0.4 dB maximum 0.3 dB typical 0.4 dB maximum 4.2 dB typical 4.4 dB maximum 6.3 dB typical 6.5 dB maximum 7.5 dB typical 7.8 dB maximum 0.5 dB typical 0.6 dB maximum 0.5 dB typical 0.6 dB maximum 0.5 dB typical 0.6 dB maximum 5.1 dB typical 5.4 dB maximum 7.2 dB typical 7.5 dB maximum 8.5 dB typical 8.8 dB maximum 28 dB typical 25 dB typical 25 dB typical 0.8 dB typical 1.0 dB maximum 0.8 dB typical 1.0 dB maximum 0.8 dB typical 1.0 dB maximum UHF Rx Port to Port Isolation 28 dB typical 21 dB typical 25 dB typical A.1.5 Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit The CA01961AA Tn-nR Receiver Mute option kit is used with a standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio and up to three GPW 8000 Receivers. NOTICE: The illustrations show a GPW 8000 Receiver with one chassis and one transceiver. A dual-slot chassis with two transceivers is available. 289 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 125: Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram NOTICE: See System Connector Ports (Conventional) on page 112 for a detailed description of system connector pinouts. NOTICE: The antenna relay is mounted on the backplane of the GTR 8000 Base Radio. The only cable used with the Tn-nR Receiver Mute option kit is the control cable. All other required option kit hardware is included in Table 82: Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List on page 290. A.1.5.1 Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List The required hardware and cable for the CA01961AA Tn-nR Receiver Mute option kit are listed in this section. Table 82: Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Parts List FRU Kit Part Number Description DLN6798 A CKN6944 A RCVR SOFT NO SPLITTER CABLES, RCVR SOFT NO SPLITTER 30009380001 CABLE, SAC 4210217A04 STRAP TIE .184X7.31 NYL BLK Quanti-

ty 1 1 1 10 290 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits FRU Kit Part Number Description 5682347B21 BAG, PLASTIC 584 X 431 MM SVCWARR12 12 MONTH STANDARD WARRANTY Quanti-

ty 1 1 A.1.6 Installing the T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits Procedure:

1 Install the standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio and GPW 8000 Receivers according to the processes and procedures in the Base Radio or Receiver Installation chapter. WARNING: To guard against personal injury and/or damage to equipment, place the base radio to Service Mode when performing service. Transmit inhibiting the base radio within the Station Status screen in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) also prevents the transmitter from keying. Place the base radio back to Normal Mode when service is complete. NOTICE: See Figure 122: T4-4R Receiver Mute Configuration on page 286 for an example of the GTR 8000 Base Radio and GPW 8000 Receivers installed in a rack. Leave no spaces between the devices in a rack or cabinet installation. Leave enough space above the splitter and antenna relay tray to allow room for connecting cables. 2 If the devices are in Normal Mode, ensure that each device is placed in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. c From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. d Click Change to Service Mode. e At the confirmation screen, click OK. The device halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. NOTICE: If you choose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the Off (O) position. f Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the transceiver module Ethernet service port. g Repeat for each device in the configuration. 3 Remove the fan module to gain access to the Transceiver Option Card (TOC) on the transceiver module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 for details. 4 Connect cables to each device according to its relevant wiring diagram. For a T2-2R Receiver Mute configuration, see Figure 120: T2-2R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram on page 282 for details. For a T3-3R Receiver Mute configuration, see Figure 121: T3-3R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram on page 284 for details. For a T4-4R Receiver Mute configuration, see Figure 124: T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram on page 287 for details. For a Tn-nR Receiver Mute configuration, see Figure 125: Tn-nR Receiver Mute Option Kit Wiring Diagram on page 290 for details. 291 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits NOTICE: When the GTR 8000 Base Radio or GPW 8000 Receiver is ordered with the preselector option, the type N to BNC adaptor (58009291001) must be used on the receiver end of RF cables. See Figure 122: T4-4R Receiver Mute Configuration on page 286 for an example of how to route cables. 5 Replace the fan modules for the base radio and receivers. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237. NOTICE: If you chose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the On (I) position. 6 Place each device to Normal Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. c From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. d Click Change to Normal Mode. e At the confirmation screen, click OK. The device halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. f Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the transceiver module Ethernet service port. g Repeat for each device in the configuration. A.1.7 Configuring the T2-2R, T3-3R, and T4-4R Receiver Mute Option Kits Prerequisites: Ensure that all required installation procedures have been performed for the base radio and receiver and that the devices have been powered up. When and where to use: This procedure is used to configure the WildCard Tables for a Receiver Mute configuration using the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

1 If necessary, perform the initial configuration for the base radio and receiver. See Device Configuration in CSS on page 134 for details. 2 Connect to the Ethernet port on the device. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140 for details. Only. 3 From the menu, select File Read Configuration From the Device. 4 From the navigation pane, select Hardware Configuration. Set Station Type [R] to Analog NOTICE: When configuring GPW 8000 Receivers, the Hardware Platform [R]

parameter is set to GPW 8000 Satellite Receiver. The Antenna Relay [R] parameter is not configurable for GPW 8000 Receivers. 5 Set Antenna Relay [R] to Enabled. NOTICE: Use the default value of 30 ms for the Antenna Relay Delay. This step is not required for GPW 8000 Receivers. 6 From the navigation pane, select WildCard Tables. Click Set to Default to add default WildCard tables. 292 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 126: CSS - WildCard Tables Example 7 Click Yes to reset the WildCard Tables to their default structure. The following default WildCard Tables are created:

NOTICE: WildCard Table numbers are arbitrary and shown for illustration purposes. Memory size and the number of States and Commands in each table limit the maximum number of WildCard tables. Wild-

Card Table Descrip-

tion tion States and Condi-

Actions Inactions State Value Value Value 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 In-cabi-

net RPT Rx In-

hibit External PTT RD STAT-

RX ACT Tx In-

hibit Input 6 n/a Input 7 n/a Input 5 n/a n/a RX Qualifi-

ers Met Input 3 n/a 1 2 TRC Function Tone

(1..17) TRC Function

(1..17) Com-

mand In-cabi-

net Re-

peat ON RX IN-

HIBIT Key from Wi-

deband Set Out-

put

(1..12) TX IN-

HIBIT Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline n/a n/a n/a 7 n/a 1 n/a Monitor n/a Com-

mand In-Cabi-

net Re-

peat OFF RX EN-

ABLE Dekey from Wi-

deband Clear Output

(1..12) TX EN-

ABLE NULL NULL n/a n/a n/a n/a 7 n/a n/a n/a n/a 293 8 9 10 Wild-

Card Table 11 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits n/a NULL n/a LLGT Detect TRC Function

(1..17) TRC Function

(1..17) 3 8 T4 if CH2 Conf T5 if CH3 Conf Dekey from Wireline NULL n/a n/a NULL n/a n/a NOTICE: Table configurations are selected from the TABLE parameter. See Figure 126:

CSS - WildCard Tables Example on page 293 for location of parameter fields. 8 For all Receiver Mute Configurations, click Add and populate the new WildCard table to mute external receivers:

Descrip-

tion tion States and Condi-

Actions Inactions State Value Value Value Mute Ext RXs n/a Analog Wireline PTT n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a 3 4 5 Com-

mand Clear Output

(1..12) Clear Output

(1..12) Clear Output

(1..12) 2 3 3 4 5 Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline Com-

mand Set Out-

put

(1..12) Set Out-

put

(1..12) Set Out-

put

(1..12) 9 For a T4-4R configuration, click Add and populate the new WildCard table to control channel 4, as follows NOTICE: The description field is limited to 14 characters, including spaces. WildCard Table Descrip-

tion States and Condition Actions Inactions State Value Value 12 9 TRC Function

(1..17) Com-

mand NULL Com-

mand Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline 4 n/a NOTICE: The function tones used in these tables must be correlated with the function tones set in the console. 294 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits 10 From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. 11 From the menu, select Tools Disconnect to terminate the connection to the device. 12 Repeat steps 17 for all GPW 8000 Receivers. NOTICE: Only the default WildCard tables are required for the GPW 8000 Receivers. 13 For GPW 8000 Receivers, edit TABLE 2 and change the State and Conditions from Input 7 to Input 4. 14 From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. 15 From the menu, select Tools Disconnect to terminate the connection to the device. A.2 T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit The CA01957AA T1-2R with a Talk-Around option kit adds the capability of listening to the output transmit (Tx) frequency of the base radio when the base radio is not transmitting. This capability allows the console operator to listen to any talk-around (direct) operation. A GPW 8000 Receiver is used to monitor the output frequency. A standalone T7039A GTR 8000 Base Radio is required. One GPW 8000 Receiver must be ordered without this option. This option kit includes one RF (transmit/receive) antenna relay, control cable, RF cables, and mounting hardware. The base radio must be ordered with the appropriate duplexer option. All option kit hardware and cables required are included in Table 83: T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Parts List on page 296. 295 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 127: T1-2R Talk-Around Option Kit Wiring Diagram NOTICE: See System Connector Ports (Conventional) on page 112 for a detailed description of system connector pinouts. NOTICE: The antenna relay is mounted on the backplane of the GTR 8000 Base Radio. A.2.1 T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Parts List The required hardware and cables for the CA01957AA T1-2R with a Talk-Around option kit are listed in this section. Table 83: T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Parts List FRU Kit Part Number Description DLN6799 A CLN8792 A T1-2R W/TALKAROUND HARDWARE, T1-2R W/TALKAROUND 0310909A54 SCREW 3.5X30 MM ANT RELAY MTG 40009272002 RELAY, COAXIAL 29 V Quanti-

ty 1 1 2 1 296 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits FRU Kit Part Number Description Quanti-

ty 5682347B20 BAG FOR SCREWS CKN694 5A CABLES, T1-2R W/TALKAROUND 3084921Y09 CBL, ASSY, COAX, 55CM, N-TO-QN 4285026Y01 CLIP, CABLE RETAINER 3013943E25 CBL N-BNC M-M 85CM 3084848Y01 CABLE RELAY W/TEMP 4210217A04 STRAP TIE .184X7.31 NYL BLK 10 5682347B21 BAG, PLASTIC 584 X 431 MM SVCWARR12 12 MONTH STANDARD WARRANTY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A.2.2 Site Performance Expected for T1-2R with Talk-Around The additional cables, splitter, and relay affect receiver sensitivity and transmitter output power. Use the attenuation values found in this section to determine the expected site performance. Other base radio and receiver specifications are not affected. Table 84: Total Transmit and Receive Attenuation for T1-2R with Talk-Around Band Type Attenuation CA01957AA: T1-2R VHF Rx 1 VHF Rx 2 VHF Tx UHF Rx1 UHF Rx2 UHF Tx 800 MHz Rx1 800 MHz Rx2 0.6 dB typical 0.8 dB maximum 0.9 dB typical 1.1 dB maximum 0.8 dB typical 1.0 dB maximum 0.8 dB typical 1.0 dB maximum 1.3 dB typical 1.5 dB maximum 1.2 dB typical 1.4 dB maximum 0.9 dB typical 1.1 dB maximum 1.7 dB typical 1.9 dB maximum 297 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Band Type Attenuation CA01957AA: T1-2R 800 MHz Tx 1.5 dB typical 1.7 dB maximum A.2.3 Installing the T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Procedure:

1 Install the standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio or GPW 8000 Receiver according to the processes and procedures provided in the Base Radio or Receiver Installation Chapter. Install a duplexer according to the appropriate Replacing a Duplexer procedure. WARNING: To guard against personal injury and/or damage to equipment, place the base radio to Service Mode when performing service. Transmit inhibiting the base radio within the Station Status screen in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) also prevents the transmitter from keying. Remember to place the base radio back to Normal Mode when service is complete. 2 If the base radio and receiver are in Normal Mode, ensure that each device is placed in Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. c From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. d Click Change to Service Mode. e At the confirmation screen, click OK. The device halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. f Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the transceiver module Ethernet service port. g Repeat for each device in the configuration. 3 If you choose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the Off (O) position. Antenna Relay procedure for details. 4 Attach the antenna relay to the backplane of the GTR 8000 Base Radio. See the Replacing an 5 Remove the fan module to gain access to the Transceiver Option Card (TOC) on the transceiver module. See Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 for details. 6 Connect cables to each device according to Figure 127: T1-2R Talk-Around Option Kit Wiring Diagram on page 296. 7 Replace the fan modules for the base radio and receivers. 8 If you chose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the On (I) position. 9 Place each base radio and receiver to Normal Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. c From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. 298 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits d At the confirmation screen, click OK. e Click Change to Normal Mode. The device halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. f Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the transceiver module Ethernet service port. g Repeat for each device in the configuration. A.2.4 Configuring the T1-2R with Talk-Around Option Kit Prerequisites: Ensure that all required installation procedures have been performed for the base radio and receiver and that the devices have been powered up. When and where to use: This procedure is used to configure the WildCard Tables for a T1-2R with Talk-Around configuration using the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

CSS on page 134for details. on page 140 for details. 1 If necessary, perform the initial configuration for the base radio. See Device Configuration in 2 Connect to the Ethernet port on the base radio. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link 3 From the menu, select File Read Configuration From the Device. 4 From the navigation pane, select Hardware Configuration. Set Station Type [R] to Analog Only. NOTICE: When configuring GPW 8000 Receivers, the Hardware Platform [R]

parameter is set to GPW 8000 Satellite Receiver. 5 Set Antenna Relay [R] to Enabled. NOTICE: Use the default value of 30 msec for the Antenna Relay Delay. 6 From the navigation pane, select WildCard Tables. Click Set to Default to add default 7 Click Yes to reset the WildCard Tables to their default structure. The following default WildCard WildCard tables. Tables are created:

NOTICE: WildCard Table numbers are arbitrary and shown for illustration purposes. Memory size and the number of States and Commands in each table limit the maximum number of WildCard tables. Wild-

Card Table 1 2 Descrip-

tion tion States and Condi-

Actions Inactions State Value Value Value In-cabi-

net RPT Input 6 n/a Rx In-

hibit Input 7 n/a Com-

mand In-cabi-

net Re-

peat ON RX IN-

HIBIT n/a n/a Com-

mand In-Cabi-

net Re-

peat OFF RX EN-

ABLE n/a n/a 299 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 External PTT RD STAT-

RX ACT Tx In-

hibit Input 5 n/a n/a RX Qualifi-

ers Met Input 3 n/a 1 2 3 8 TRC Function Tone

(1..17) TRC Function

(1..17) LLGT Detect TRC Function

(1..17) TRC Function

(1..17) T4 if CH2 Conf T5 if CH3 Conf Dekey from Wi-

deband Clear Output

(1..12) TX EN-

ABLE NULL NULL n/a Dekey from Wireline NULL n/a 7 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a NULL n/a n/a Monitor n/a n/a 7 n/a 1 n/a 2 3 Key from Wi-

deband Set Out-

put

(1..12) TX IN-

HIBIT Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline n/a NULL n/a NOTICE: Table configurations are selected from the TABLE parameter. See Figure 126:

CSS - WildCard Tables Example on page 293 for location of parameter fields. 8 From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. 9 From the menu, select Tools Disconnect to terminate the connection to the device. 10 Repeat steps 17 for all GPW 8000 Receivers. NOTICE: Only the default WildCard tables are required for the GPW 8000 Receivers. 11 For GPW 8000 Receivers, edit TABLE 2 and change the State and Conditions from Input 7 to Input 4. 12 From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. 13 From the menu, select Tools Disconnect to terminate the connection to the device. 300 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits A.3 T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit The CA01962AA T2-2R with a Duplexer and Triple Relay option kit adds the capability to dynamically tune the TX frequency based on the active channel. The GTR 8000 Base Radio is a normal duplexed repeater while the GPW 8000 Receiver monitors the TX frequency. The other channel is for talk-

around (transmit and receive). This option is sometimes called the triple relay option. A GPW 8000 Receiver is used to monitor the second frequency. A standalone T7039A GTR 8000 Base Radio is required for this option kit. One GPW 8000 Receiver must be ordered without this option. This option kit includes 3 RF (transmit/receive) antenna relays, control cables, RF cables, and mounting hardware. The base radio must be ordered with the appropriate duplexer option. All option kit hardware and cables required are included in Table 85: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Parts List on page 304. NOTICE: The photos and illustrations in this section show the GPW 8000 Receiver with one chassis with one transceiver. A dual-slot chassis with two transceivers is available. Figure 128: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Configuration NOTICE: Base radio and receiver are shown without fan modules for clarity. The triple antenna relay tray is illustrated to show the placement of the antenna relays:

301 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 129: Triple Antenna Relay Tray The wiring diagram for the T2-2R with a Duplexer and Triple Relay option kit outlines the connections for all cables and provides part numbers for each type. 302 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits Figure 130: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Wiring Diagram NOTICE: See System Connector Ports (Conventional) on page 112 for a detailed description of the system connector pinouts. 303 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits A.3.1 T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Parts List The required hardware and cables for the CA01962AA T2-2R with a Duplexer and Triple Relay option kit are listed in this section. Table 85: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Parts List FRU Kit Part Number Description Quanti-

ty DLN6800 A CLN8793 A T2-2R DUPLXR AND TRPL RELAY HARDWARE, T2-2R DUPLXR AND TRPL RELAY 0285854Y01 NUT, M6-GROUND WIRE TO STUDS ON TRAY 0310909A54 SCREW 3.5X30MM ANT RELAY MTG 0310909E46 0312016A49 0312016A54 SCRMCH M3.5X0.6X8 ANT CONN &

SIDE BRKTS 20 SCREW FRONT PANEL TO CHASSIS

(blk) SCRTPG M6 X 1 X 10 (blk) TRAY TO RACK 07009370001 BRACKET CHASSIS SUPPORT 27009304001 CHASSIS, PERIPHERAL 40009272002 RELAY, COAXIAL 29V 5682347B20 BAG FOR SCREWS 64009317001 PANEL, FRONT 0285504U05 CAGE NUT, M6 FOR CABINET MTG 0310909C91 SCREW M6-GROUND CABLE TO BUS BAR AND TRAY TO CABINET CAGE NUTS CABLES, T2-2R DUPLXR AND TRPL RELAY CKN694 6A 30009379001 CABLE, TRIPLE RELAY 3013942M11 CBL N-N M-M 32.5 CM 3013942M23 CBL N-N M-M 75 CM 3013942M29 CBL N-N M-M 110 CM 3013942P19 CBL N-N M-F PNL 55 CM 3013943E25 CBL N-BNC M-M 85 CM 3013943E27 CBL N-BNC M-M 95 CM 3084848Y01 CABLE RELAY W/TEMP 3071488H08 CABLE, GROUND TRAY TO BUS BAR 58009291001 Adapter, N Plug to BNC Jack 1 1 2 6 4 4 2 1 3 1 1 4 5 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 2 304 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits FRU Kit Part Number Description 4210217A04 STRAP TIE .184X7.31 NYL BLK 5682347B21 BAG, PLASTIC 584 X 431 MM SVCWARR12 12 MONTH STANDARD WARRANTY Quanti-

ty 10 1 1 A.3.2 Site Performance Expected for T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay The additional cables, and relays affect receiver sensitivity and transmitter output power. Use the attenuation values found in this section to determine the expected site performance. Other base radio and receiver specifications are not affected. Table 86: Total Transmit and Receive Attenuation for T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Band Type Attenuation CA01962AA: T2-2R VHF Rx 1 VHF Rx 2 VHF Tx UHF Rx1 UHF Rx2 UHF Tx 800 MHz Rx1 800 MHz Rx2 800 MHz Tx 1.0 dB typical 1.2 dB maximum 1.2 dB typical 1.5 dB maximum 1.4 dB typical 1.7 dB maximum 1.6 dB typical 1.8 dB maximum 1.9 dB typical 2.1 dB maximum 2.0 dB typical 2.4 dB maximum 2.2 dB typical 2.5 dB maximum 2.6 dB typical 2.9 dB maximum 2.9 dB typical 3.3 dB maximum 305 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits A.3.3 Installing the T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Procedure:

1 Install the standalone GTR 8000 Base Radio or GPW 8000 Receiver according to the processes and procedures provided in the Base Radio or Receiver Installation Chapter. Install a duplexer according to the appropriate Replacing a Duplexer procedure. WARNING: To guard against personal injury and/or damage to equipment, switch the base radio to Service Mode when performing service. Transmit inhibiting the base radio within the Station Status screen in the Configuration/Service Software (CSS) also prevents the transmitter from keying. Remember to switch the base radio back to Normal Mode when service is complete. 2 If the base radio and receiver are in Normal Mode, ensure that each device is placed to Service Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. c From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. d Click Change to Service Mode. e At the confirmation screen, click OK. The device halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. f Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the transceiver module Ethernet service port. g Repeat for each device in the configuration. 3 If you choose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the Off (O) position. 4 Remove the fan module to gain access to the Transceiver Option Card (TOC) on the transceiver module. Replacing the Fan Assembly on page 237 for details. 5 Connect cables to each device according to Figure 130: T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Wiring Diagram on page 303. NOTICE: When the GTR 8000 Base Radio or GPW 8000 Receiver is ordered with the preselector option, the type N to BNC adaptor (58009291001) must be used on the receiver end of RF cables. 6 Replace the fan modules for the base radio and receivers. 7 If you chose to turn off the power, set the rocker switch on the front of the associated power supply to the On (I) position. 8 Place the base radio and receivers to Normal Mode, as follows:

a Connect to the transceiver module Ethernet service port using CSS. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140. b From the menu, select File Read Configuration From Device. c From the menu, select Service Test And Measurement Screen. d Click Change to Normal Mode. e At the confirmation screen, click OK. The device halts activity in the current mode and switches operation to the requested mode. 306 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits f Disconnect the Ethernet cable from the transceiver module Ethernet service port. g Repeat for each device in the configuration. A.3.4 Configuring the T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay Option Kit Prerequisites: Ensure that all required installation procedures have been performed for the base radio and receiver and that the devices have been powered up. When and where to use: This procedure is used to configure a T2-2R with Duplexer and Triple Relay configuration using the Configuration/Service Software (CSS). Procedure:

1 If necessary, perform the initial configuration for the base radio and receivers. See Device Configuration in CSS on page 134 for details. 2 Connect to the Ethernet port on the device. See Connecting Through an Ethernet Port Link on page 140 for details. Only. 3 From the menu, select File Read Configuration From the Device. 4 From the navigation pane, select Hardware Configuration. Set Station Type [R] to Analog NOTICE: When configuring GPW 8000 Receivers, the Hardware Platform [R]

parameter is set to GPW 8000 Satellite Receiver. The Antenna Relay [R] parameter is not configurable for GPW 8000 Receivers. 5 Set Antenna Relay [R] to Enabled. 6 Set Antenna Relay Delay to 80 msec. NOTICE: The 80 msec antenna rely delay is required to allow sufficient time for all antenna relays to propagate the transmission signal from the GTR 8000 Base Radio. This step is not required for GPW 8000 Receivers. 7 From the navigation pane, select WildCard Tables. Click Set to Default to add default 8 Click Yes to reset the WildCard Tables to their default structure. The following default WildCard WildCard tables. Tables are created:

NOTICE: WildCard Table numbers are arbitrary and shown for illustration purposes. Memory size and the number of States and Commands in each table limit the maximum number of WildCard tables. Wild-

Card Table 1 2 Descrip-

tion tion States and Condi-

Actions Inactions State Value Value Value In-cabi-

net RPT Input 6 n/a Rx In-

hibit Input 7 n/a Com-

mand In-cabi-

net Re-

peat ON RX IN-

HIBIT n/a n/a Com-

mand In-Cabi-

net Re-

peat OFF RX EN-

ABLE n/a n/a 307 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 External PTT RD STAT-

RX ACT Tx In-

hibit Input 5 n/a n/a RX Qualifi-

ers Met Input 3 n/a 1 2 3 8 TRC Function Tone

(1..17) TRC Function

(1..17) LLGT Detect TRC Function

(1..17) TRC Function

(1..17) T4 if CH2 Conf T5 if CH3 Conf Dekey from Wi-

deband Clear Output

(1..12) TX EN-

ABLE NULL NULL n/a Dekey from Wireline NULL n/a 7 n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a n/a NULL n/a n/a Monitor n/a n/a 7 n/a 1 n/a 2 3 Key from Wi-

deband Set Out-

put

(1..12) TX IN-

HIBIT Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline Channel

(1..16) Key from Wireline n/a NULL n/a NOTICE: Table configurations are selected from the TABLE parameter. See Figure 126:

CSS - WildCard Tables Example on page 293 for location of parameter fields. 9 Click Add and populate the new WildCard table, as follows:

Wild-

Card Table 11 De-

scrip-

tion Keye d on Chan-

nel 2 Cur-

rent Chan-

nel

(1..16

) States and Condition Actions Inactions State Value State Value Value Con-

dition AND Sta-

tion Keye d 80 7 Com-

mand WAIT

(10..1 000 msec) Set Out-

put

(1..12

) Com-

mand Chan-

nel

(1..16

) WAIT

(10..1 000 msec) 1 80 308 MN003286A01-E Appendix A: Conventional GTR 8000 Base Radio Option Kits 7 Clear Out-

put

(1..12

) Inac-

tions Com-

mand Inac-

tions Com-

mand 10 Click Add and populate the new WildCard table, as follows:

11 Click Add and populate the new WildCard table, as follows:

Wild-

Card Table 12 Wild-

Card Table 13 De-

scrip-

tion De-

keyed on Ch De-

scrip-

tion De-

keyed on Ch 2 1 Cur-

rent Chan-

nel

(1..16) Cur-

rent Chan-

nel

(1..16) States and Condition Actions State Value Value Condi-

tion AND NOT State Station Keyed Com-

mand Set Output

(1..12) 7 NULL States and Condition Actions State Value Value Condi-

tion AND NOT State Station Keyed Com-

mand Clear Output

(1..12) 7 NULL 12 From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. 13 From the menu, select Tools Disconnect to terminate the connection to the device. 14 Repeat steps 18 for all GPW 8000 Receivers. NOTICE: Only the default WildCard tables are required for the GPW 8000 Receivers. 15 For GPW 8000 Receivers, edit TABLE 2 and change the State and Conditions from Input 7 to Input 4. 16 From the menu, select File Write Configuration To Device. 17 From the menu, select Tools Disconnect to terminate the connection to the device. 309

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C / IC: 109AB-4821C

(Pursuant to FCC Part 2.1033(c)(11), 2.1033(b)(7) and RSP 100 Annex C and Sec 3) EXHIBIT 1 IDENTIFICATION LABEL See the Attached Photograph or Sketch Bottom of Radio Top of Radio Back of Radio Back of Radio under Belt Clip The label must be made of tamper-evident material; i.e. the label must tear, distort, or otherwise show evidence of having been tampered with when an attempt is made to remove the label from the rack. The printable area is 69.85 mm wide and 50.8 mm See the Attached Photograph and Exhibit 3 for the actual location of the FCC/IC label on the device. X Label Attached Below. See Attached Drawing. LOCATION X TYPE X MARKINGS (TEXT) X EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 1 OF 2 Applicant: Motorola Solutions Inc FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C / IC: 109AB-4821C

*** END ***

EXHIBIT 1 SHEET 2 OF 2

 

 

f1' MOTOROLA SOLUTIONS Department Certification Elite Electronic 1516 Centre Circle Downers Grove, IL 60515 Engineering Inc. Date: March 16, 2020 Subject:

Application Authorization for FCC and IC Filing To whom it may concern, I hereby authorize Arine Lee to apply, filing:

on my behalf, the application for the followi ng FCC and IC FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C IC ID: 109AB-4821C IC HVIN: T7039-UHFR1C Please contact me if there are any questions or issues. Regards, Robert Sarocka Engineering 847-344-6075 Bob.Sarocka@motorolasolutions.com Manager

 

 

FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C Date: June 11, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communiations Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Application for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C Dear Sir/Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd herein submits application for Certification of the subject transmitter. This transmitter is intended for use at fixed base station sites only with capabilities for clear and coded communications with a variable transmit power operating within the following frequency ranges:

Model Numbers Frequency Rated Power FCC Rules Part Product Name GTR 8000 T7039A 380 - 435 MHz 2 100 W; Max=110W 90 We are requesting certification under Part(s) of the Commissions Rules listed above to allow operation of this equipment. The transmitter is intended for work related occupational use only under Part 90 of the FCC rules. The subject transmitter complies with Section 90.203 in that the operator cannot directly program transmit frequencies using the unit's normally accessible external controls. A complete Certification application is enclosed. If you require any additional information, please contact me at +604 224 0258. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXHIBIT 13A Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas Penang, Malaysia

 

 

FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C CONFIDENTIALITY REQUEST June 11, 2020 Office of Engineering and Technology Laboratory Division Equipment Authorization Branch Federal Communiations Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Confidentiality Request of Transmitter with FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C Dear Sir / Madam, Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd is requesting that Exhibit 4 (Block Diagram), Exhibit 5 (Schematic Diagrams), Exhibit 10 (Parts List and Tune Up Procedures), and Exhibit 12

(Operational Description) not be made routinely available for public inspection. Motorola Solutions consider the information in these exhibits to be classified as trade secrets, pursuant to 47 CFR Section 0.457(d). 0.459 and Section 552(b)(4) of the Freedom of Information Act. Please mark Exhibits 4, 5, 10, and 12 as Confidential. Please contact me if you require any information. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com ___________________________________________________________________________________________________________ EXHIBIT 13B Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia

 

 

FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C Date: June 11, 2020 Authorization & Evaluation Division Federal Communications Commission Laboratory 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 Subject: Extended Frequencies Justification for Certification of Transmitter with FCC ID: ABZ89FC4821C Dear Sir/Madam:

This transmitter is designed to operate in the following frequency ranges:

Band/Mode UHF Frequency ranges 380-435 MHz FCC rule parts 90 To aid equipment authorization in other countries which accept the United States FCC Grant for Certification, Motorola Solutions is requesting that the FCC lists the above applicable frequencies range under FCC Rule Parts 90 on the FCC Grant. For the FCCs Rule Parts 90 applications, this radio is used in systems by Federal and Public Safety agencies including Police, Fire, and Emergency Medical Services, etc. as indicated in the table below. Equipment programming is the responsibility of Authorized Service Personnel. Also, the radio complies with 47 CFR Part 90.203(e), in that the operator cannot directly program the transmit frequencies using the normally accessible external controls. Per the FCCs KDB634817 guidance, as an alternative to listing the exact frequencies, we acknowledge that its a violation of the FCC Rules if this device operates on unauthorized frequencies. Frequency Range

(MHz) 380-406.1 406.1-435 Part 22 Part 24D Part 74 Part 80 Part 90 X Other Federal Regions X X

*Canada Please contact me at +604 224 0258 if you required any additional information. Sincerely, Arine Lee FCC/IC Certification Manager E-mail: arinelee@motorolasolutions.com _______________________________________________________________________________________________ Motorola Solutions Malaysia Sdn Bhd, Plot2A, Medan Bayan Lepas, Mukim 12 SWD, 11900 Bayan Lepas, Penang, Malaysia EXHIBIT 13C